GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 30i-Model A
Series 300i-Model A
Series 300is-Model A
Descriptions Manual

GFZ-63942EN/01 August 2003

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2003 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B-63942EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of
CNC units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the
safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions
in this section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions
are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable
to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool
builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program
to control the operation of the machine, the operator must become
fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.

CONTENTS

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........s-2

2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................s-3
3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
PROGRAMMING .....................................................................s-5
4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLINGs-8
5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE .......s-11

s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63942EN/01

1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the
Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use
the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-2
B-63942EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first
checking the operation of the machine. Before
starting a production run, ensure that the machine
is operating correctly by performing a trial run
using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function or by operating
the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece
mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of
the machine may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check
the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified
data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for
the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended
operation. Refer to the manual provided with the
machine to determine the maximum allowable
feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed,
it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing
damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or
injury to the user.
4 When using a tool compensation function,
thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified
data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.

s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63942EN/01

WARNING
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-
set. Usually, there is not need to change them.
When, however, there is not alternative other than
to change a parameter, ensure that you fully
understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in
the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine
itself, or injury to the user.
6 Immediately after switching on the power, do not
touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the
position display or alarm screen appears on the
CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated
to maintenance or other special operations.
Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit
in other than its normal state. Starting the machine
in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.
7 The User’s Manual and programming manual
supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall
description of the machine's functions, including
any optional functions. Note that the optional
functions will vary from one machine model to
another. Therefore, some functions described in
the manuals may not actually be available for a
particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
8 Some functions may have been implemented at the
request of the machine-tool builder. When using
such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine-tool builder for details of their use and any
related cautions.

CAUTION
The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very
precise fabrication technology. Some pixels may
not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is
not a defect.

s-4
B-63942EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are
stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, they are retained even if the power is
turned off.
Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however,
or it may prove necessary to delete all data from
nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and
assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup all
vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe
place.

s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63942EN/01

1.3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to

programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the
supplied User’s Manual carefully such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.

WARNING
1 Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly,
the machine may behave unexpectedly as a result
of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,
or cause injury to the user.
2 Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear
interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement
between the start and end points), the tool path
must be carefully confirmed before performing
programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If
the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause
injury to the user.
3 Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation
or normal-direction (perpendicular) control, pay
careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis.
Incorrect programming may result in the rotation
axis speed becoming excessively high, such that
centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its grip
on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted
securely. Such mishap is likely to damage the tool,
the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the user.
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not
convert the measurement units of data such as the
workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current
position. Before starting the machine, therefore,
determine which measurement units are being
used. Attempting to perform an operation with
invalid data specified may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
user.

s-6
B-63942EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
5 Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed
control approaches the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system, the spindle speed may become
excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to
specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying
the maximum allowable speed incorrectly may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,
or cause injury to the user.
6 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual
reference position return as required. Stroke check
is not possible before manual reference position
return is performed. Note that when stroke check is
disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke
limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to
the user.
7 Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check is performed based
on the tool data specified during automatic
operation. If the tool specification does not match
the tool actually being used, the interference check
cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the
tool or the machine itself, or causing injury to the
user. After switching on the power, or after
selecting a tool post manually, always start
automatic operation and specify the tool number of
the tool to be used.
8 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in
incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine may
behave unexpectedly.
9 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular
interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned
cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions
for details.
10 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the
torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified without
the torque limit actually being applied, a move
command will be executed without performing a
skip.

s-7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63942EN/01

WARNING
11 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary
considerably when a programmable mirror image is
enabled.
12 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate
system or a reference position return command is
issued in compensation function mode,
compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in
the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands,
therefore, always cancel compensation function
mode.

s-8
B-63942EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of

machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the
supplied User’s Manual carefully, such that you are fully familiar
with their contents.

WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine
the current position of the tool and workpiece, and
ensure that the movement axis, direction, and
feedrate have been specified correctly. Incorrect
operation of the machine may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual
reference position return as required.
If the machine is operated without first performing
manual reference position return, it may behave
unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before
manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,
or cause injury to the user.
3 Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command,
determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis,
direction, and command have been specified
correctly, and that the entered values are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid
command specified may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
operator.
4 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a
large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes the
tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling
may damage the tool and/or machine, or cause
injury to the user.

s-9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63942EN/01

WARNING
5 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the
specification in a macro variable) during threading,
rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be
predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the
operator.
6 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation
when the machine is operating under the control of
a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the
user.
7 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror
imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate
system. Before attempting to operate the machine
under the control of a program, confirm the
coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a
program without making allowances for any shift in
the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool,
the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury
to the operator.
8 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu
switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it is
possible to specify operations not supported by the
machine operator's panel, such as mode change,
override value change, and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are
operated inadvertently, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to
the user.
9 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently
running program. As a result, the servo axes are
stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to
function for reasons such as an MDI panel
problem. So, when the motors must be stopped,
use the emergency stop button instead of the
RESET key to ensure security.

s-10
B-63942EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
10 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during
programmed operation of the machine, the tool
path may vary when the machine is restarted.
Before restarting the machine after manual
intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
11 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block
functions can be disabled using custom macro
system variable #3004. Be careful when operating
the machine in this case.
12 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation
of the machine. During a dry run, the machine
operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the
dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the
programmed feed rate.
13 Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in
MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a
command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool
nose radius compensation is not applied. When a
command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in
automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius
compensation mode, pay particular attention to the
tool path when automatic operation is subsequently
resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the
corresponding functions for details.
14 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the
machining program is edited (modification,
insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave
unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the
control of that program. Basically, do not modify,
insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.

s-11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63942EN/01

1.5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries,
keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine.
Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who
have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to
touch the high-voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of
its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while
external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage
alarm is displayed on the machine operator's panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed,
replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section “Method of replacing battery”
in the User’s Manual (Common to T/M series) for
details of the battery replacement procedure.

s-12
B-63942EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries,
keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine.
Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who
have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to
touch the high-voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to
preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage
alarm is displayed on the machine operator's panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed,
replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will
be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
Maintenance Manual for details of the battery
replacement procedure.

s-13
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63942EN/01

WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is
necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

s-14
B-63942EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................... s-1

I. GENERAL
1 GENERAL ..............................................................................................3
2 LIST OF SPECIFICATION .....................................................................6

II. NC FUNCTION
1 CONTROLLED AXIS............................................................................19
1.1 MULTI-PATH CONTROL.............................................................................20
1.2 MACHINE GROUP / CONTROLLED PATH / CONTROLLED AXIS............20
1.2.1 Number of Machine Groups .................................................................................. 20
1.2.2 Number of Controlled Paths .................................................................................. 20
1.2.3 Number of Controlled Axes .................................................................................. 21
1.2.4 Number of Controlled Paths and Axes for Loader ................................................ 21
1.3 AXIS CONTROL BY PMC ...........................................................................22
1.4 Cs CONTOURING CONTROL.....................................................................23
1.5 LOADER CONTROL....................................................................................23
1.6 NAMES OF AXES........................................................................................24
1.6.1 Names of Axes....................................................................................................... 24
1.6.2 Axis Name Expansion ........................................................................................... 25
1.7 ARBITRARY AXIS NAME SETTING ...........................................................26
1.7.1 Arbitrary Axis Name ............................................................................................. 26
1.7.2 AXNUM Function................................................................................................. 27
1.8 SPINDLE NAME EXPANSION ....................................................................28
1.9 SYNCHRONOUS / MIXTURE CONTROL ...................................................29
1.10 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL .....................................................................32
1.11 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .............................................................34
1.12 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ........................................................................35
1.13 INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL.........................................................36
1.14 TANDEM CONTROL ...................................................................................39
1.15 TANDEM DISTURBANCE ELIMINATION CONTROL.................................40
1.16 TORQUE CONTROL ...................................................................................41
1.17 POLE POSITION DETECTION FUNCTION ................................................41
1.18 CONTROL AXIS DETACH ..........................................................................41

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63942EN/01

1.19 INCREMENT SYSTEM................................................................................42

1.20 FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR ..............................................................................43
1.21 ARBITRARY COMMAND MULTIPLY ..........................................................43
1.22 DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK.....................................................................43
1.23 HRV CONTROL...........................................................................................44
1.24 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ....................................................................45
1.25 INTERLOCK ................................................................................................46
1.25.1 All-axis Interlock................................................................................................... 46
1.25.2 Each-axis Interlock ................................................................................................ 46
1.25.3 Block Start Interlock.............................................................................................. 46
1.25.4 Cutting Block Start Interlock................................................................................. 46
1.26 MACHINE LOCK..........................................................................................47
1.26.1 All-axis Machine Lock .......................................................................................... 47
1.26.2 Each-axis Machine Lock ....................................................................................... 47
1.27 EMERGENCY STOP ...................................................................................47
1.28 OVERTRAVEL.............................................................................................47
1.29 STORED STROKE CHECK 1......................................................................48
1.30 STROKE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING .......................................................48
1.31 STORED STROKE CHECK 2 (G22, G23)...................................................49
1.32 STORED STROKE CHECK 3......................................................................49
1.33 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE ...................................................50
1.34 CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER.........................................................51
1.35 MIRROR IMAGE..........................................................................................53
1.36 FOLLOW-UP ...............................................................................................53
1.37 SERVO OFF / MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED............................................54
1.38 CHAMFERING ON/OFF ..............................................................................54
1.39 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH .............................................55
1.40 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION ........56
1.41 ROTARY AXIS CONTROL ..........................................................................56
1.42 POSITION SWITCH ....................................................................................57
1.43 HIGH-SPEED POSITION SWITCH .............................................................57
1.44 DIRECTION-DEPENDENT TYPE HIGH-SPEED POSITION SWITCH.......57
1.45 LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESS REFERENCE MARK ........58
1.45.1 Linear Scale Interface with Absolute Address Reference Mark ........................... 58
1.45.2 Linear Scale with Absolute Address Reference Mark Expansion ........................ 58

c-2
B-63942EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2 OPERATION ........................................................................................59
2.1 OPERATION MODE ....................................................................................60
2.1.1 Automatic Operation (Memory Operation)........................................................... 60
2.1.2 MDI Operation ...................................................................................................... 60
2.1.3 DNC Operation...................................................................................................... 60
2.1.4 DNC Operation with Memory Card ...................................................................... 60
2.2 PROGRAM SEARCH ..................................................................................60
2.3 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ................................................................60
2.4 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP....................................61
2.5 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS ...................................................61
2.6 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTION.....................................62
2.7 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING .........................................................63
2.8 BUFFER REGISTER ...................................................................................63
2.9 DRY RUN.....................................................................................................63
2.10 SINGLE BLOCK...........................................................................................64
2.11 JOG FEED ...................................................................................................64
2.12 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN.............................................64
2.13 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG .................................65
2.14 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER .......66
2.15 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FEEDRATE SETTING ........................66
2.16 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT .................................................................67
2.17 MANUAL HANDLE FEED............................................................................68
2.17.1 Manual Handle Feed (1st) ..................................................................................... 68
2.17.2 Manual Handle Feed (2nd and 3rd)....................................................................... 68
2.17.3 Manual Handle Feed Magnification...................................................................... 68
2.18 MANUAL FEED FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING .................................................69
2.18.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis Direction Jog Feed /
Tool Axis Direction Incremental Feed .................................................................. 70
2.18.2 Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis Right-Angle
Direction Jog Feed / Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed............ 71
2.18.3 Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed / Tool Tip Center Rotation Jog Feed /
Tool Tip Center Rotation Incremental Feed.......................................................... 72
2.18.4 Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed / Table Vertical Direction Jog Feed /
Table Vertical Direction Incremental Feed ........................................................... 73
2.18.5 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed / Table Horizontal Direction Jog
Feed / Table Horizontal Direction Incremental Feed ............................................ 73
2.19 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION...........................................................74

c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63942EN/01

2.20 INCREMENTAL FEED.................................................................................74

2.21 JOG AND HANDLE SIMULTANEOUS MODE ............................................75
2.22 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND ............................................................75
3 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .............................................................76
3.1 NANO INTERPOLATION.............................................................................77
3.2 POSITIONING .............................................................................................78
3.3 EXACT STOP MODE ..................................................................................79
3.4 TAPPING MODE .........................................................................................79
3.5 CUTTING MODE .........................................................................................79
3.6 EXACT STOP ..............................................................................................80
3.7 LINEAR INTERPOLATION ..........................................................................80
3.8 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION.....................................................................81
3.9 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION..............................................................82
3.10 DWELL ........................................................................................................83
3.11 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION ..................................................84
3.12 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ...............................................................86
3.13 HELICAL INTERPOLATION ........................................................................87
3.14 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B.....................................................................89
3.15 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION .....................................................................90
3.16 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION ..................................................92
3.17 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION ..........................93
3.18 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION .......................................................................96
3.19 NANO SMOOTHING ...................................................................................97
3.20 THREADING................................................................................................98
3.21 MULTIPLE THREADING .............................................................................99
3.22 THREADING RETRACT............................................................................100
3.22.1 Threading Retract (Canned Cycle) ...................................................................... 100
3.22.2 Threading Retract (Multiple Repetitive Cycle)................................................... 100
3.23 CONTINUOUS THREADING.....................................................................101
3.24 VARIABLE LEAD THREADING.................................................................102
3.25 CIRCULAR THREADING ..........................................................................103
3.26 POLYGON TURNING................................................................................104
3.27 POLYGON TURNING WITH TWO SPINDLES .........................................106
3.28 SKIP FUNCTION .......................................................................................107
3.28.1 Skip Function....................................................................................................... 107
3.28.2 Multi-step Skip .................................................................................................... 108
3.28.3 High-speed Skip................................................................................................... 108
c-4
B-63942EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.28.4 Torque Limit Skip ............................................................................................... 109

3.29 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN...........................................................110
3.29.1 Automatic Reference Position Return ................................................................. 110
3.29.2 Reference Position Return Check........................................................................ 111
3.29.3 Second, Third, and Fourth Reference Position Return........................................ 112
3.29.4 Floating Reference Position Return..................................................................... 113
3.30 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL ............................................................114
3.31 NURBS INTERPOLATION ........................................................................116
3.32 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION............................118
3.33 BALANCE CUTTING .................................................................................119
3.34 INDEX TABLE INDEXING .........................................................................120
4 FEED FUNCTION...............................................................................121
4.1 RAPID TRAVERSE....................................................................................122
4.2 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ................................................................122
4.3 FEED PER MINUTE ..................................................................................123
4.4 FEED PER REVOLUTION.........................................................................124
4.5 WITHOUT POSITION CODER FEED PER REVOLUTION.......................125
4.6 WITHOUT POSITION CODER CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL .................................................................................................125
4.7 TANGENTIAL SPEED CONSTANT CONTROL ........................................125
4.8 CUTTING FEEDRATE CLAMP .................................................................126
4.9 AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION ....................................127
4.10 RAPID TRAVERSE BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION 128
4.11 OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION........................129
4.12 BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER CUTTING
FEED INTERPOLATION ...........................................................................130
4.13 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE CUTTING FEED
INTERPOLATION ......................................................................................131
4.14 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ............................................................................131
4.15 SECOND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE............................................................132
4.16 ONE-DIGIT F CODE FEED .......................................................................132
4.17 INVERSE TIME FEED ...............................................................................133
4.18 JOG OVERRIDE........................................................................................133
4.19 OVERRIDE CANCEL.................................................................................133
4.20 MANUAL PER REVOLUTION FEED.........................................................133
4.21 EXTERNAL DECELERATION ...................................................................134
4.22 FEED STOP ..............................................................................................134
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63942EN/01

4.23 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER CUTTING FEED

INTERPOLATION ......................................................................................135
4.24 AI CONTOUR CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR CONTROL II .........................136
4.25 HIGH-SPEED PROCESSING....................................................................138
4.26 LOOK-AHEAD BLOCKS EXPANSION ......................................................138
4.27 BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE LOOK-AHEAD
INTERPOLATION ......................................................................................138
4.28 JERK CONTROL .......................................................................................139
4.29 RIGID TAPPING BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION.....140
5 PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................141
5.1 PROGRAM CODE .....................................................................................142
5.2 LABEL SKIP ..............................................................................................142
5.3 PARITY CHECK ........................................................................................142
5.4 CONTROL-IN / CONTROL-OUT ...............................................................143
5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ..........................................................................143
5.6 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP EXTENSION.....................................................143
5.7 MAXIMUM COMMAND VALUES...............................................................144
5.8 PROGRAM FILE NAME ............................................................................146
5.9 SEQUENCE NUMBER ..............................................................................147
5.10 ABSOLUTE PROGRAMMING / INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING .........147
5.11 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ..........................................................148
5.12 INPUT UNIT 10 TIME MULTIPLY..............................................................149
5.13 DIAMETER PROGRAMMING / RADIUS PROGRAMMING ......................150
5.14 DIAMETER/RADIUS DYNAMIC SWITCHING...........................................150
5.15 PLANE SELECTION..................................................................................151
5.16 ROTARY AXIS SPECIFICATION ..............................................................152
5.17 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER .....................................................................152
5.18 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND ..........................................................153
5.19 COORDINATE SYSTEM ...........................................................................154
5.19.1 Machine Coordinate System................................................................................ 154
5.19.2 Workpiece Coordinate System ............................................................................ 154
5.19.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System ..........................................................155
5.19.2.2 Automatic Coordinate System Setting..............................................................156
5.19.2.3 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System ..........................................................157
5.19.3 Local Coordinate System..................................................................................... 158
5.20 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET.....................................159

c-6
B-63942EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.21 ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PAIR...................160

5.22 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT.........................................160
5.23 DIRECT INPUT OF WORKPIECE ORGIN OFFSET VALUE
MEASURED...............................................................................................161
5.24 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF.........................................................161
5.25 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING .................................162
5.26 G CODE SYSTEM .....................................................................................163
5.26.1 G Code for Lathe System .................................................................................... 163
5.26.2 G Code System for Machining Center ................................................................ 167
5.27 CHAMFERING AND CORNER R ..............................................................170
5.28 OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AD CORNER R..............................................174
5.29 PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT ..............................................................175
5.29.1 Setting the Pitch Error Compensation Data......................................................... 175
5.29.2 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value ........................................................ 176
5.29.3 Setting the Tool Compensation Offset Value...................................................... 177
5.29.4 Setting the Tool Management Data ..................................................................... 181
5.29.4.1 Registering new tool management data ............................................................181
5.29.4.2 Modifying tool management data.....................................................................182
5.29.4.3 Deleting tool management data ........................................................................182
5.29.4.4 Registering new cartridge management table data ...........................................183
5.29.4.5 Modifying the cartridge management table ......................................................183
5.29.4.6 Deleting cartridge management table data .......................................................184
5.29.4.7 Naming customization data ..............................................................................184
5.29.4.8 Naming tool life states......................................................................................185
5.30 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT .................................................186
5.31 SUB PROGRAM CALL ..............................................................................187
5.32 CUSTOM MACRO .....................................................................................189
5.33 ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES ......................196
5.34 CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES BETWEEN EACH PATH ......196
5.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO...............................................197
5.36 CANNED CYCLE.......................................................................................198
5.36.1 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Cutting Cycle ............................................... 198
5.36.2 Threading Cycle .................................................................................................. 200
5.36.3 End Face Turning Cycle ...................................................................................... 202
5.37 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE ..............................................................204
5.37.1 Stock Removal in Turning................................................................................... 204
5.37.2 Stock Removal in Facing..................................................................................... 207
5.37.3 Pattern Repeating................................................................................................. 210

c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63942EN/01

5.37.4 Finishing Cycle.................................................................................................... 212

5.37.5 End Face Peck Drilling Cycle ............................................................................. 213
5.37.6 Outer Diameter / Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle............................................. 214
5.37.7 Multiple Threading Cycle.................................................................................... 215
5.38 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING.............................................................217
5.39 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY R PROGRAMMING.............................219
5.40 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET ................................................220
5.41 AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE..........................................................221
5.42 SCALING ...................................................................................................222
5.43 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION........................................................225
5.44 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION ...........................227
5.45 TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND ...................................................228
5.46 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE ........................................................230
5.47 FIGURE COPY ..........................................................................................231
5.48 PROGRAM FORMAT FOR Series15.........................................................233
5.49 MACRO EXECUTOR.................................................................................234
5.50 C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ......................................................................235
5.51 CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE .....................................................................236
6 AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION...................237
6.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION.............................................................................238
6.2 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ............................................................238
6.3 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK ..................................................................239
6.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE .........................................................240
6.5 WAITING FUNCTION................................................................................242
6.6 MULTIPLE COMMAND OF AUXILIARY FUNCTION ................................243
6.7 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) ..................................244
6.8 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT ......................................................................244
6.9 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL .............................................245
6.10 SPINDLE OVERRIDE................................................................................245
6.11 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT .......................................................246
6.12 SPINDLE ORIENTATION ..........................................................................246
6.13 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION...........................................246
6.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL....................................................246
6.15 SPINDLE SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL......................................247
6.16 MULTI SPINDLE CONTROL .....................................................................248
6.17 SPINDLE POSITIONING ...........................................................................251
6.18 RIGID TAPPING ........................................................................................252
c-8
B-63942EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.19 RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE ...................................................253

6.20 ARBITRARY POSITION REFERENCE SETTING FOR Cs AXIS
FUNCTION ................................................................................................253
7 TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION ................254
7.1 TOOL FUNCTION......................................................................................255
7.2 TOOL OFFSET PAIRS ..............................................................................256
7.3 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY ..........................................................257
7.4 COMMON COMPENSATION MEMORY BETWEEN EACH PATH...........259
7.5 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION ...........................................................260
7.6 TOOL OFFSET ..........................................................................................262
7.7 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING.................264
7.8 CUTTER COMPENSATION FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING ............................265
7.9 Y-AXIS OFFSET ........................................................................................266
7.10 CUTTER OR TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ...........................267
7.11 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION ...............................271
7.12 CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL
INTERPOLATION ......................................................................................274
7.13 TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET AND TOOL WEAR OFFSET ......................275
7.14 SECOND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET ....................................................276
7.15 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION ...........................................................277
7.16 TOOL OFFSET VALUE COUNTER INPUT...............................................278
7.17 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT.............................................................278
7.18 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT.......................................279
7.19 TOOL LENGTH / WORKPIECE ZERO POINT MEASUREMENT.............280
7.20 AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET....................................................................281
7.21 DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED........................282
7.22 DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B ....................282
7.23 ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET.......................................283
7.24 CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL MOVE ................284
8 ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION ......................................285
8.1 BACKLASH COMPENSATION..................................................................286
8.2 BACKLASH COMPENSATION FOR EACH RAPID TRAVERSE AND
CUTTING FEED ........................................................................................286
8.3 SMOOTH BACKLASH COMPENSATION .................................................287
8.4 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ............................................288
8.5 INTERPOLATION TYPE PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION....................289

c-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63942EN/01

8.6 BI-DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ..............................290

8.7 EXTENDED BI-DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ..........290
8.8 PERIODICAL SECONDARY PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION..............290
8.9 INCLINATION COMPENSATION ..............................................................291
8.10 STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION.........................................................292
8.11 INTERPOLATION TYPE STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION.................293
8.11.1 Straightness Compensation 128 Points ............................................................... 293
8.11.2 Interpolation Type Straightness Compensation................................................... 293
8.12 THREE-DIMENSIONAL ERROR COMPENSATION .................................294
8.13 THERMAL GROWTH COMPENSATION ALONG TOOL VECTOR ..........295
9 EDITING OPERATION .......................................................................296
9.1 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE
PROGRAMS ..............................................................................................297
9.2 PROGRAM EDITING.................................................................................298
9.3 PROGRAM PROTECT ..............................................................................299
9.4 KEY AND PROGRM ENCRYPTION..........................................................299
9.5 EXTENDED PART PROGRAM EDITING..................................................300
10 SETTING AND DISPLAY ...................................................................301
10.1 STATUS DISPLAY.....................................................................................302
10.2 CLOCK FUNCTION ...................................................................................302
10.3 CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ...............................................................303
10.4 PROGRAM DISPLAY ................................................................................304
10.5 PARAMETER SETTING AND DISPALY ...................................................306
10.6 ALARM DISPLAY ......................................................................................307
10.7 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY .....................................................................308
10.8 OPERATOR MESSAGE HISTORY DISPLAY ...........................................308
10.9 OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY.............................................................309
10.10 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ............................................310
10.11 ACTUAL CUTTING FEEDRATE DISPLAY................................................311
10.12 DISPLAY OF SPINDLE SPEED AND T CODE AT ALL SCREENS ..........312
10.13 DIRECTORY DISPLAY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE.....................................312
10.14 OPTIONAL PATH NAME DISPLAY...........................................................312
10.15 OPERATING MONITOR SCREEN ............................................................313
10.16 SERVO SETTING SCREEN......................................................................314
10.16.1 Servo Setting Screen............................................................................................ 314
10.16.2 Servo Motor Tuning Screen ................................................................................ 315

c-10
B-63942EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.17 SPINDLE SETTING SCREEN ...................................................................316

10.17.1 Spindle Setting Screen......................................................................................... 316
10.17.2 Spindle Tuning Screen ........................................................................................ 317
10.17.3 Spindle Monitor Screen....................................................................................... 317
10.18 SERVO WAVEFORM DISPLAY ................................................................318
10.19 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN...............................................319
10.20 SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL .........................................................320
10.21 SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCH......321
10.22 MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY...................................................................322
10.23 DATA PROTECTION KEY.........................................................................322
10.24 PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS...........................................323
10.25 PARAMETER SET SUPPORTING SCREEN ............................................324
10.26 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION.................................325
11 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT.......................................................................326
11.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ............................................................327
11.2 FAST DATA SERVER ...............................................................................328
11.3 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT..........................................................................329
11.3.1 External Tool Offset ............................................................................................ 329
11.3.2 One Touch Macro Call ........................................................................................ 329
11.3.3 External Workpiece Number Search ................................................................... 330
11.3.4 External Program Number Search ....................................................................... 330
11.3.5 External Workpiece Coordinate System Shift..................................................... 330
11.3.6 External Machine Zero Point Shift...................................................................... 330
11.3.7 External Alarm Message ..................................................................................... 331
11.3.8 External Operator Message ................................................................................. 331
11.3.9 Assignment Of Required Parts Count And Machined Parts Count..................... 331
11.4 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT ............................................................332
11.5 SCREEN HARD COPY..............................................................................332
11.6 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ..............................................................332
12 INTERFACE FUNCTION ....................................................................333
12.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ..........................................................................334
12.2 FAST ETHERNET .....................................................................................334
13 PMC ...................................................................................................335
13.1 FIRST/SECOND/THIRD PMC PATH.........................................................336
13.2 I/O Link EXPANSION SECOND/THIRD/FOURTH CHANNEL ..................337
13.3 NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION....................................338

c-11
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63942EN/01

14 OTHERS.............................................................................................339
14.1 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL.......................................................................340
14.1.1 NC Ready Signal ................................................................................................. 340
14.1.2 Servo Ready Signal.............................................................................................. 340
14.1.3 Automatic Operation Signal ................................................................................ 340
14.1.4 Automatic Operation Start Lamp Signal ............................................................. 340
14.1.5 Feed Hold Signal ................................................................................................. 340
14.1.6 Reset Signal ......................................................................................................... 340
14.1.7 NC Alarm Signal ................................................................................................. 340
14.1.8 Distribution End Signal ....................................................................................... 341
14.1.9 Rewinding Signal ................................................................................................ 341
14.1.10 Inch Input Signal.................................................................................................. 341
14.1.11 Cutting Signal ...................................................................................................... 341
14.1.12 In-position Signal................................................................................................. 341
14.1.13 Threading Signal.................................................................................................. 341
14.1.14 Tapping Signal..................................................................................................... 341
14.1.15 Axis Moving Signal............................................................................................. 341
14.1.16 Axis Moving Direction Signal............................................................................. 342
14.1.17 Rapid Traverse Signal ......................................................................................... 342
14.1.18 Constant Surface Speed Signal............................................................................ 342
14.1.19 DI Status Output Signal ....................................................................................... 342

APPENDIX
A RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE ........................................................345
B LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT ............................348
C PROGRAM CODE LIST .....................................................................359
D EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF BASIC UNIT......................................362
E PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD...............................................................365
F EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF MDI UNIT ..........................................379
G EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT.......................................382

c-12
I. GENERAL
B-63942EN/01 GENERAL 1.GENERAL

1 GENERAL
The FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A is the highest-end
CNC of FANUC, which can control up to 10 paths, 32 axes, and 8
spindles.
The features are as follows:
• The performance of the CNC is remarkably enhanced by
employing cutting-edge hardware such as an ultra high-speed
processor, higher-speed bus internal to the CNC, and optical
cable enabling high-speed data transfer.
• High-speed, high-precision, and high-quality machining is
achieved with the CNC, servo system, and detector for exercising
nanometer control. Similar control is exercised not only on
milling for metal dies but also on turning.
• The CNC is applicable to a 5-axis machine tool that can be
configured in various ways. The CNC has many functions for
programming complicated figures easily and for facilitating setup
work.
• With a 15" large liquid-crystal display panel for displaying much
more information and vertical soft keys provided on the side of
the screen, the operability of the CNC is much improved. A
large CNC program memory is provided to enable file
management and editing as is possible on the personal computer.
• A management system connected with a personal computer via
Ethernet can be built easily. Various field networks are
supported.
• The FANUC Series 300i is an Open CNC that incorporates the
personal computer functions compatible with Microsoft
Windows NT/2000/XP and enables the use of Windows-
compatible software and development environments. The
FANUC Series 300is is an Open CNC that supports Microsoft
Windows CE.NET, which is an O/S not requiring hard disk.
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation of the United States of America.

This manual describes the models indicated in the table below.

In the text, the abbreviations indicated below may be used.

Applicable models
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A 30i-A Series 30i
FANUC Series 300i-MODEL A 300i-A Series 300i
FANUC Series 300is-MODEL A 300is-A Series 300is

-3-
1.GENERAL GENERAL B-63942EN/01

Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i/300is-
MODEL A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is -MODEL A
Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN *
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (Common to T series/M series) B-63944EN
USER’S MANUAL (T series) B-63944EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (M series) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-63950EN

Related manuals of servo motor αi series

The following table lists the manuals related to servo motor αi series.
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series
B-65270EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65272EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series,
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series,
B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Either of the above servo motors and the corresponding spindle can be
connected to the CNC covered in this manual.
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi
series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information,
refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.

-4-
B-63942EN/01 GENERAL 1.GENERAL

Special symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:

- M
Indicates a description or function that is valid only for the machine
center system (M series) set as system control type.
The term "M series" used in the text means "machining center system
type".

- T
Indicates a description or function that is valid only for the lathe
system (T series) set as system control type.
The term "T series" in the text means "lathe system type".

-
Indicates the end of a description of a system control type.

- IP
Indicates a combination of axes such as X_ Y_ Z_
(Used for descriptions of command formats)

- ;
Indicates the end of a block. It actually corresponds to the ISO code
LF or EIA code CR.
(Used for descriptions of command formats)

-5-
2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION GENERAL B-63942EN/01

2 LIST OF SPECIFICATION
: Standard : Standard option
: Option : Function included in another option
: Not Available
Note) Some combinations of these options are restricted.

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Controlled axis
Max. controlled axes
(Machine controlled axes + Loader controlled
axes) Max. 32 axes
(Machine controlled axes are including Cs
axes and PMC axes.)
Machine groups 1 group
Machine groups Max. 3 groups
Controlled path 1 path
Controlled path Max. 10 paths
Controlled axis (each path) 2 axes
Controlled axis (each path) 3 axes
Simultaneously controlled axes (each path) Simultaneous 2 axes
Max. 32 axes
Controlled axes expansion (total)
(including Cs axes and PMC axes)
Simultaneously controlled axes expansion
Max. 24 axes
(each path)
Axis control by PMC Max. 32 axes (not available on Cs axis)
Designation of spindle axes (each path / total) Max. 4 axes / 8 axes
Cs contouring control (each path / total) Max. 4 axes / 8 axes
Controlled path for Loader Max. 8 paths
Controlled axes for Loader (each path) Max. 4 axes
Simultaneously controlled axes for Loader
Max. 4 axes
(each path)
Axis control by PMC for Loader (each path) Max. 4 axes
Basic three axes are X, Y and Z, additional
Axis name (machining center system)
axes are optional from U, V, W, A, B, and C.
In case of G code system A, basic 2 axes are
Axis name (lathe system with G code system
X and Z, additional axes are optional from Y,
A)
A, B, and C.
In case of G code system B/C, basic 2 axes
Axis name (lathe system with G code system
are X and Z, additional axes are optional from
B/C)
Y, U, V, W, A, B, and C.
Axis name expansion Max 3 characters
Arbitrary axis name setting Included in custom macro function
Max. 3 characters, Included in Multi-spindle
Spindle name expansion
function
Synchronous / mixture control

-6-
B-63942EN/01 GENERAL 2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Superimposed control
Axis synchronous control Max. 12 pairs
Angular axis control
Inclined rotary axis control
Tandem control
Tandem disturbance elimination control Axis synchronous control is required.
Torque control Included in PMC axis control
Pole position detection function
Control axis detach
Increment system IS-A, IS-B
Increment system C 0.0001mm, 0.0001deg, 0.00001inch
Increment system D 0.00001mm, 0.00001deg, 0.000001inch
Increment system E 0.000001mm, 0.000001deg, 0.0000001inch
Flexible feed gear Optional DMR
Arbitrary command multiply 1/9999 to 9999 times
Dual position feedback
HRV control
Inch/metric conversion
All axes / each axis / each direction /
Interlock
block start / cutting block start
Machine lock All axes / each axis
Emergency stop
Overtravel
Stored stroke check 1
Stroke limit external setting
Stored stroke check 2, 3
Stroke limit check before move
Chuck and tail stock barrier
Mirror image Each axis
Follow-up
Servo off / mechanical handle feed
Chamfering on/off
Interference check for each path Only for more than 2-path control
Unexpected disturbance torque detection
function
Rotary axis control
Position switch
High-speed position switch
Direction-dependent type high-speed position
switch
Linear scale interface with absolute address
reference mark
Linear scale with absolute address reference
mark expansion
Operation
Automatic operation (memory)
MDI operation
DNC operation Reader/puncher interface is required.
CF card and PCMCIA Card Attachment is
DNC operation with Memory Card
required.

-7-
2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION GENERAL B-63942EN/01

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Program search
Sequence number search
Sequence number comparison and stop
Malfunction prevent functions
Wrong operation prevention
Retraction for rigid tapping
Buffer register
Dry run
Single block
Jog feed
Manual reference position return
Reference position setting without DOG
Reference position setting with mechanical
stopper
Reference position return feedrate setting
Reference position shift
Manual handle feed 1-unit 1 unit/each path
Manual handle feed 2/3-units 2 units or 3 units
×1, ×10, ×m , ×n
Manual handle feed rate
m : 0 to 2000, n : 0 to 2000
Manual feed for 5-axis machining
Manual handle interruption
Incremental feed ×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000, ×10000
Jog and handle simultaneous mode
Manual numerical command
Interpolation functions
Nano interpolation
G00 (Linear interpolation type positioning is
Positioning
possible)
Exact stop mode G61
Tapping mode G63
Cutting mode G64
Exact stop G09
Linear interpolation
Circular interpolation
Exponential interpolation
Dwell in seconds and dwell in revolution (In
case of dwell in revolution for machining
Dwell
center system, threading, synchronous cutting
option is required.)
Polar coordinate interpolation
Cylindrical interpolation
Circular interpolation plus max. 2 axes linear
Helical interpolation
interpolation
Circular interpolation plus max. 4 axes linear
Helical interpolation B
interpolation
Involute interpolation
Hypothetical axis interpolation
Conical / spiral interpolation
Smooth interpolation AI contour control I or II is required.

-8-
B-63942EN/01 GENERAL 2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Nano Smoothing AI contour control I or II is required.
Threading, synchronous cutting Spindle serial output is required.
Multiple threading
Threading retract
Continuous threading
Variable lead threading
Circular threading
Polygon turning
Polygon machining with two spindles
Skip G31
Multi-step skip
High-speed skip Input signal is 8 points
Torque limit skip
Reference position return G28
Reference position return check G27
2nd reference position return
3rd/4th reference position return
Floating reference position return
Normal direction control
NURBS interpolation AI contour control I or II is required.
Three-dimensional circular interpolation
Balance cutting Only for more than 2-path control
Index table indexing
Feed function
Rapid traverse rate (increment system B) Max. 999.999m/min (1 µm)
Rapid traverse rate (increment system C) Max. 99.9999m/min (0.1 µm)
Rapid traverse rate (increment system D) Max. 9.99999m/min (0.01 µm)
Rapid traverse rate (increment system E) Max. 0.999999m/min (0.001 µm)
Rapid traverse override F0, 25, 50, 100 % or 0 to 100 % (1 % step)
Feed per minute
For machining center system, threading,
Feed per revolution
synchronous cutting option is required.
Without position coder feed per revolution Included in constant surface speed control
Without position coder constant surface speed
Included in constant surface speed control
control
Tangential speed constant control
Cutting feedrate clamp
Rapid traverse: linear
Automatic acceleration/deceleration
Cutting feed: exponential, linear
Rapid traverse bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration
Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
cutting feed interpolation
Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting
Included in AI contour control I or II
feed interpolation
Feedrate override 0 to 254 %
Second feedrate override 0 to 254 %
One-digit F code feed
Inverse time feed

-9-
2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION GENERAL B-63942EN/01

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Jog override 0 to 655.34 %
Override cancel
Manual per revolution feed
External deceleration
Feed stop
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting
feed interpolation
AI contour control I Look-ahead block no. is Max. 30.
AI contour control II Look-ahead block no. is Max. 200.
Look-ahead block no. is Max. 600.
High-speed processing
AI contour control II is required.
Look-ahead block no. is Max. 1000.
Look-ahead blocks expansion AI contour control II and high-speed
processing are required.
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before
Included in AI contour control I or II
look-ahead interpolation
Jerk control AI contour control II is required.
Rigid tapping bell-shaped
Rigid tapping is required.
acceleration/deceleration
Program input
Program code EIA RS244/ISO840
Label skip
Parity check Horizontal and vertical parity
Control in/out
Optional block skip 1
Optional block skip 9
Max. programmable dimension ±9 digit (R,I,J and K is ±12digit.)
Program file name 32 characters
Sequence number N8-digit
Absolute/incremental programming Combined use in the same block
Decimal point programming / pocket
calculator type decimal point programming
Input unit 10 time multiply
Diameter/radius programming
Diameter/radius dynamic switching
Plane selection G17, G18, G19
Rotary axis designation
Rotary axis roll-over
Polar coordinate command
Coordinate system setting
Automatic coordinate system setting
Workpiece coordinate system G52 to G59
Workpiece coordinate system preset
Addition of workpiece coordinate system 48
48 pairs
pairs
Addition of workpiece coordinate system 300
300 pairs
pairs
Direct input of workpiece origin offset value
Included in workpiece coordinate system
measured
Manual absolute on and off

- 10 -
B-63942EN/01 GENERAL 2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Direct drawing dimension programming
G code system A
G code system B/C
Chamfering / corner R
Optional chamfering / corner R
Programmable data input G10
Programmable parameter input
Sub program call 10 folds nested
Custom macro
Addition of custom macro common variables #100 to #199, #500 to #999
Custom macro common variables between
Only for more than 2-path control
each path
Interruption type custom macro
Canned cycles
Multiple repetitive cycle
Multiple repetitive cycle II Pocket profile
Canned cycles for drilling
Circular interpolation by R programming
Mirror image for double turret
Automatic corner override
Scaling
Coordinate system rotation
Three-dimensional coordinate conversion
Tilted working plane command
Programmable mirror image
Figure copy
FANUC Series 15 program format
Macro executor
C language executor
Custom software size 256KB
Custom software size 512KB
Custom software size 1MB
Total size for all paths.
Custom software size 2MB
Specify a size of 1MB or greater when using
Custom software size 3MB
the C language executor.
Custom software size 4MB
Custom software size 5MB
Custom software size 6MB
Auxiliary function / Spindle speed function
Auxiliary function M8-digit
2nd auxiliary function B8-digit
Auxiliary function lock
High-speed M/S/T/B interface
Waiting function Only for more than 2-path control
Multiple command of auxiliary function 3
Spindle speed function S5-digit, binary output
Spindle serial output S5-digit, serial output (max. 8 spindles)
Constant surface speed control
Spindle override 0 to 254 %
Actual spindle speed output
Spindle orientation Max. 8 spindles

- 11 -
2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION GENERAL B-63942EN/01

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Spindle output switching function Max. 8 spindles
Spindle synchronous control
Spindle simple synchronous control
Multi spindle control
Spindle positioning
Rigid tapping
Rigid tapping by manual handle
Arbitrary position reference setting for Cs axis
function
Tool function / Tool compensation function
Tool function T7+1/T6+2/T5+3-digit
Tool function T8-digit
32
(Note)
Tool offset pairs
Specify total of tool offset pairs of each path.
Max. digit of tool offset is 9.
Tool offset pairs 64
Tool offset pairs 99
Tool offset pairs 200
Tool offset pairs 400
Tool offset pairs 499
Tool offset pairs 999
Tool offset pairs 2000
Tool offset memory B Geometry/wear memory
Distinction between geometry and wear, or
Tool offset memory C
between cutter and tool length compensation.
Common offset memory between each path Only for more than 2-path control
Tool length compensation
Tool offset
Tool center point control for 5-axis machining
Y-axis offset
Cutter or tool nose radius compensation
Three-dimensional cutter compensation
Cutting point interpolation for cylindrical
interpolation
Tool geometry/wear compensation
Tool geometry/wear compensation is
2nd geometry tool offset
required.
Tool management function: 64 pairs 64 tools
Tool management function: 240 pairs 240 tools
Tool management function: 1000pairs 1000 tools
Tool management function:
Customized data expansion (5 to 20)
Tool management function:
Customized data expansion (5 to 40)
Tool offset value counter input
Tool length measurement
Automatic tool length measurement
Tool length/workpiece origin measurement
Automatic tool offset

- 12 -
B-63942EN/01 GENERAL 2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Direct input of tool offset value measured
Direct input of tool offset value measured B
Rotary table dynamic fixture offset
Changing active offset value with manual
move
Accuracy compensation function
Backlash compensation
Backlash compensation for each rapid
traverse and cutting feed
Smooth backlash compensation
Stored pitch error compensation
Interpolation type pitch error compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required.
Bi-directional pitch error compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required.
Stored pitch error compensation and bi-
Extended bi-directional pitch error
directional pitch error compensation are
compensation
required.
Periodical secondary pitch error
Stored pitch error compensation is required.
compensation
Inclination compensation
Straightness compensation
Included in interpolation type straightness
Straightness compensation 128 points
compensation
Interpolation type straightness compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required.
Three-dimensional error compensation Stored pitch error compensation is required.
Thermal growth compensation along tool
vector
Editing operation
Part program storage size (Specify total of
64Kbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Part program storage size (Specify total of
128Kbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Part program storage size (Specify total of
256Kbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Part program storage size (Specify total of
512Kbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Part program storage size (Specify total of
1Mbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Part program storage size (Specify total of
2Mbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Part program storage size (Specify total of
4Mbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Part program storage size (Specify total of
8Mbyte
part program storage size of each path.)
Number of registerable programs 63
Number of registerable programs expansion 1 Max. 1000 programs
Number of registerable programs expansion 2 Max. 4000 programs
Part program editing
Program protect
Key and program encryption
Extended part program editing

- 13 -
2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION GENERAL B-63942EN/01

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Setting and display
Status display
Clock function
Current position display
Program display Program name 31 characters
Parameter setting and display
Alarm display
Alarm history display
External message or external data input is
Operator message history display
required.
Operation history display
Run hour and parts count display
Actual cutting feedrate display
Display of spindle speed and T code at all
screens
Directory display of floppy cassette
Optional path name display Only for more than 2-path control
Operating monitor screen Load meter etc.
Servo setting screen
Spindle setting screen Only for αi/α series
Servo waveform display
Maintenance information screen
Software operator's panel
Software operator's panel general purpose
Software operator's panel is required.
switch
Software operator's panel general purpose Software operator's panel general purpose
switch expansion switch is required.
Multi-language display English
Multi-language display Japanese
Data protection key 4 types
Protection of data at eight levels
Erase CRT screen display Manual or Automatic
Parameter set supporting screen
Machining condition selecting screen AI contour control I or II is required.
Data input/output
Reader/puncher interface Reader/puncher (Ch.1) interface
Reader/puncher interface Reader/puncher (Ch.2) interface
Fast data server only for 1-path control
External message
External data input Including external message
External key input
External workpiece number search 9999
External program number search 1 to 9999
Memory card input/output
Screen hard copy
Power Mate CNC manager
Interface function
Embedded Ethernet
Fast Ethernet Fast Ethernet board is required.

- 14 -
B-63942EN/01 GENERAL 2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
PMC
Basic instruction: 25nsec/step
1st PMC path
Max. step number ladder: 64000
Basic instruction: 25nsec/step
2nd PMC path
Max. step number ladder: 64000
Basic instruction: 25nsec/step
3rd PMC path
Max. step number ladder: 64000
I/O Link expansion 2nd channel DI/DO points: addition 1024/1024 points
I/O Link expansion 3rd channel DI/DO points: addition 1024/1024 points
I/O Link expansion 4th channel DI/DO points: addition 1024/1024 points
Nonvolatile PMC extra relay function
Others
NC ready, servo ready, automatic operation,
automatic operation start lamp, feed hold,
Status output signal reset, NC alarm, distribution end, rewinding,
inch input, cutting, in-position, threading,
tapping, etc.
Control unit incorporated type display unit 10.4" color LCD
(Not available in 300i) 15" color LCD
Without option slots
(depth 60mm except 10.4"LCD)
Option 2 slots
Control unit dimensions for LCD unit mounted (depth 110mm except 10.4"LCD)
type (depth) Without option slots
(depth 70mm except 15"LCD)
Option 2 slots
(depth 120mm except 15"LCD)
Separate MDI
(standard size, vertical type, symbol and
caption in English on keys) (*1)
MDI unit
Separate MDI
(Qwerty key, vertical type, symbol and caption
in English on keys)
Standard operator's panel
I/O Unit-MODEL A
Machine interface (I/O Link) I/O Unit-MODEL B
Max. DI/DO points: 1024/1024 points Operator's panel I/O module
Extendable up to 4096/4096 points with the Power magnetics control I/O module
I/O Link point extension option Connection panel I/O module (DI/DO module,
2A output module, analog input module)
I/O Link - AS-i converter
Manual pulse generator
Pendant type manual pulse generator With axis selection and magnification switches
Handy machine operator’s panel
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR
Connectable servo motor αiS series, αi series, α series,
βiS series, β series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER
Connectable servo amplifier
αi series, α series, βi series, β series

- 15 -
2.LIST OF SPECIFICATION GENERAL B-63942EN/01

Machining
Lathe
Item Specifications center
system
system
Pulsecoder/optical scale (2-phase pulse
Separate detector interface unit for full-closed
interface)
control
Pulse coder/optical scale (serial interface)
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR
Connectable spindle motor
αi series, α series, etc.
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER
Connectable spindle amplifier
αi series, α series
Input power supply 24VDC±10%
LCD-mounted type control unit
At operating: 0 to 58°C
Ambient temperature of unit (*2)
At non-operating: -20 to 60°C
Temperature change : Max. 0.3°C/minute
Normally: 75%RH or less
(No dew, nor frost allowed)
Ambient relative humidity
Short term (within one month): 95%RH or
less(No dew, nor frost allowed)
0.5G or less
FANUC evaluation tests are conducted under
the following condition:
Vibration
10 to 58Hz : 0.075mm (amplitude)
58 to 500Hz : 1G
Tests conforming to IEC68-2-6 are conducted.
(Note)
*1 : There are some limitations in case of 300i/300is.
*2 : If the CNC is installed at a location higher than 1000 m above the sea level, a restriction is imposed on the
maximum allowable ambient temperature of the CNC inside the cabinet. For each 100-m increase in height from
1000 m above the sea level, decrease the maximum allowable ambient temperature of the CNC inside the cabinet
by 1.0°C.
Example) The maximum allowable ambient temperature of the CNC inside the cabinet installed at a height of
1750 m above the sea level is:
55°C - 1750/100 × 1.0°C = 47.5°C
Therefore, the maximum allowable ambient temperature is 0°C to 47.5°C.
When hard disk is used, the following restriction is imposed on the height of installation:
Height above the sea level at operating time: -60 to 3000 m
Height above the sea level at non-operating time: -60 to 12000 m

- 16 -
II. NC FUNCTION
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1 CONTROLLED AXIS

- 19 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.1 MULTI-PATH CONTROL

This function is designed to enable 10 independent simultaneous
machining with up to 10 paths (10-path control). This function is
applicable to lathes and automatic lathes which perform cutting
simultaneously with multiple tool posts, combined machine tools
which perform turning and milling simultaneously with multiple paths,
and machines which require additional control paths such as a loader
control path.
Available functions specific to multi-path control include waiting
function between each path, interference check for each path, balance
cut, synchronous control, mixture control, spindle control between
each path, and common memory between each path.
A multi-path control system consists of machine groups, controlled
paths, and controlled axes. Each component can be set by parameters
according to the desired machine configuration.

1.2 MACHINE GROUP / CONTROLLED PATH / CONTROLLED

AXIS

1.2.1 Number of Machine Groups

If multiple paths are used, several paths can be formed into a group.
By doing so, the group can share data, and if an alarm is issued with a
path, the other path(s) in the group can be stopped. A group of those
paths is referred to as a machine group.
Up to three groups can be used, depending on the type of NC system.
Mainly, the following depend on the machine group:
• Emergency stop signal
• <RESET> key on the MDI
• Operation performed when an alarm is issued

1.2.2 Number of Controlled Paths

A path represents a group of axes that are controlled by the same NC
program.
Up to 10 paths can be used, depending on the type of NC system.
(A path for loader control is included as a path.)
Which machine group the local path must belong to is determined by
parameter setting.

- 20 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.2.3 Number of Controlled Axes

The configuration of controlled axes is indicated below.

Item Specifications
*1
Maximum controlled axes Maximum 32 axes
Controlled axes (each path) M series : 3 axes T series : 2 axes
Simultaneously controlled axes
2 axes
(each path)
Controllable axes expansion *2 (total) Maximum 32 axes
Simultaneously controlled axes expansion
Maximum 24 axes
(total)
Axis control by PMC *3 Maximum 32 axes
Designation of spindle axes (each path) Maximum 4 spindle axes
Designation of spindle axes (total) Maximum 8 spindle axes
Cs contouring control (each path) Maximum 4 spindle axes
Cs contouring control (total) Maximum 8 spindle axes
*1: Sum of the number of machine controlled axes (including Cs
axes and PMC axes) and the number of loader controlled axes
*2: Including PMC axes and Cs axes
*3: Cs axes are not to be included.

1.2.4 Number of Controlled Paths and Axes for Loader

The number of controlled paths and the number of controlled axes for
loader control are indicated below.

Item Specifications
Controlled path Maximum 8 paths
Controlled axes (each path) Maximum 4 axes
Controlled axes (total) Maximum 4 axes
Axis control by PMC Maximum 4 axes

- 21 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.3 AXIS CONTROL BY PMC

The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC.
By specifying an amount of travel, feedrate, and so forth from the
PMC, a movement can be made along an axis independently of other
axes operated under CNC control. This enables the control of turrets,
pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes
of the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input
signal provided for that particular axis.

The following operations can be directly controlled from the PMC:

(1) Rapid traverse with a travel distance specified
(2) Cutting feed with a travel distance specified :
Feed per minute
(3) Cutting feed with a travel distance specified :
Feed per revolution
(4) Cutting feed with a travel distance specified :
Specification of sec/block
(5) Cutting feed with a travel distance specified :
Feed per minute
(6) Dwell
(7) Continuous feed
(8) Reference position return
(9) 1st to 4th reference position return
(10) External pulse synchronization - Position coder
(11) External pulse synchronization - 1st to 3rd manual handle
(12) Feedrate control
(13) Torque control command
(14) Auxiliary function, Auxiliary function 2, Auxiliary function 3
(15) Selection of the machine coordinate system
(16) Simultaneous start mode command
(17) Superimposed control

- 22 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.4 Cs CONTOURING CONTROL

The Cs contouring control function positions the serial spindle using
the spindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on
the spindle.
The Cs contouring control function is higher in precision than spindle
positioning, and enables positioning with other servo axes. Namely,
the Cs contouring control function enables linear interpolation
between the spindle and servo axes.

The speed of the serial spindle is controlled by the spindle speed

control function, while the spindle positioning is controlled by the Cs
contouring control function ("spindle contouring control"). Spindle
speed control rotates the spindle using the velocity command, while
the spindle contour control rotates the spindle using the move
command.
Switching between spindle speed control and Cs contouring control is
performed by the signal from the PMC.
In the Cs contouring control mode, the Cs contouring control axis can
be operated either manually or automatically, in the same way as
normal servo axes.

1.5 LOADER CONTROL

Loader control is a part of the multi-path control function and

designed to control targets (peripheral units such as a loader) that
perform operations other than machining. To use loader control, a
path for exercising loader control is to be set by a parameter. In a path
with loader control set, the usable functions are limited.

- 23 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.6 NAMES OF AXES

1.6.1 Names of Axes

Axis names can be assigned to axes controlled by the CNC (including
PMC controlled axes). An axis name can be freely selected from 'A',
'B', 'C', 'U', 'V', 'W', 'X', 'Y', and 'Z'.

NOTE
1 The same name must not be set for multiple axes.
(However, an axis name used in a path may be
used in another path.)
2 When G code system A is used with a lathe
system, U, V, and W must not be used as axis
names. Only when G code system B or C is used,
U, V, and W can be used as axis names.
3 When a multiple repetitive cycle for turning is used,
use X, Y, or Z as the address of a target axis.

- 24 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.6.2 Axis Name Expansion

The axis name expansion function enables an axis name to be
extended by up to three characters.
In order to extend an axis name:
(1) Enable the parameter for the axis name expansion function.
(2) Set the first character ('A', 'B', 'C', 'U', 'V', 'W', 'X', 'Y', 'Z') in the
first axis name parameter.
(3) Set the second character ('0' to '9', 'A' to 'Z') in the second axis
name parameter.
(4) Set the third character ('0' to '9', 'A' to 'Z') in the third axis name
parameter.

NOTE
1 If the second axis name is not set for an axis, the
specification of the third axis name is invalid.
2 If a character from '0' to '9' is set as the second
axis name, do not set a character from 'A' to 'Z' as
the third axis name.
3 If an axis name ends with a number, '=' is required
between the axis name and a command value.
4 In a macro call, no axis name expansion can be
used as an argument.
5 If an axis name expansion is used for at least one
axis within a path, the axis name subscript cannot
be used within the path.
6 When G code system A is used for a lathe system,
X, Y, Z, or C may be used for the first axis name
character of an axis. In this case, when a
command containing U, V, W, or H as the first axis
name character is specified, it is used as the
incremental command for the corresponding axis.
7 In a multi-path system, when no axis name
expansion is used within a path and the axis name
subscript is not set, the path number is
automatically used as the axis name subscript.
When you do not want to display the axis name
subscript, set a blank (32) in ASCII code for the
axis name subscript parameter.

The usable names and their allowed combinations are indicated below.
First axis name Second axis Third axis
character name character name character
A, B, C, 0 to 9 0 to 9
Setting U, V, W, 0 to 9
A to Z
X, Y, Z A to Z
Correct example <1> X 1 1
Correct example <2> X A 1
Correct example <3> X A B
Incorrect example X 1 A

- 25 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.7 ARBITRARY AXIS NAME SETTING

When the custom macro function is enabled, an indirect command
based on an axis number can be specified for an axis address by using
AX[(Axis number)], instead of direct axis name specification.
By using AXNUM[(Axis name)], the axis number of an axis name can
also be obtained.

1.7.1 Arbitrary Axis Name

By using arbitrary axis name AX[ ], a command for an axis can be
specified with an axis number. (AX[ ] must always be followed by
'='.)
Format
AX[ (Axis number) ] = (Numerical value) ;
(Axis number) : 1 to number of controlled axes
(number of controlled axes of each path
in the case of a multi-path system)
(Numerical value) : Command value for the axis specified
by an axis number
Explanation
If an invalid (Axis number) is specified, an alarm is issued. If a
specified axis number has fractional digits, a value rounded off to an
integer is used as (Axis number).
As (Axis number), a variable (local variable, common variable, or
system variable) can also be specified. When an operation using a
variable name as (Axis number) is performed, however, the variable
name must be enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
Example)
1. AX[1]=100.0;
For the first axis, 100.000 is specified.
2. AX[#500]=200.0;
For the axis with the axis number stored in #500, 200.000 is
specified.
3. AX[#500+1]=300.0;
For the axis with the axis number obtained by adding 1 to
the value stored in #500, 300.000 is specified.
4. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[#ABC]=400.0;
For the axis with the axis number stored in #ABC(#500),
400.000 is specified.
5. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[[#ABC]+1]=500.0;
For the axis with the axis number obtained by adding 1 to
the value stored in #ABC(#500), 400.000 is specified.
6. SETVN 500 [ABC];
AX[#ABC+1]=500.0;
An alarm is issued.

- 26 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.7.2 AXNUM Function

By using AXNUM[ ], an axis number can be obtained.

Format
AXNUM[ (Axis name) ];

Explanation
If an invalid (Axis name) is specified, an alarm is issued.

Example)
Suppose that there are three controlled axes and that the first axis
name is "X", the second axis name is "Y", and the third axis
name is "Z".
1. #500=AXNUM[X];
In #500, 1 is stored.
2. #501=AXNUM[Y];
In #501, 2 is stored.
3. #502=AXNUM[Z];
In #502, 3 is stored.
4. #503=AXNUM[A];
An alarm occurs.

Example
Sample program where the first axis name is "X", the second axis
name is "Y", and the third axis name is "Z1"

N10 SETVN 500[AXIS1,AXIS2,AXIS3] ;

N20 [#AXIS1]=AXNUM[X] ;
N30 [#AXIS2]=AXNUM[Y] ;
N40 [#AXIS3]=AXNUM[Z1] ;
N50 G92 AX[#AXIS1]=0 AX[#AXIS2]=0 AX[#AXIS3]=0 ;
N60 G01F1000. ;
N70 AX[#AXIS1]=100.0 AX[#AXIS2]=100.0 AX[#AXIS3]=100.0 ;
N80 G02 AX[#AXIS1]=200. 0 AX[#AXIS1]=200.0 R50.0 ;
N90 M02;

- 27 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.8 SPINDLE NAME EXPANSION

A spindle name can be extended by up to three characters starting with
'S' as the first spindle name. With this function, a command can be
specified for each spindle without specifying a P command.
As the second and third spindle names, characters '0' to '9' and 'A' to
'Z' in ASCII code can be freely set. If the second spindle name is not
set for a spindle, however, the third spindle name is invalid. If a
character from '0' to '9' is set as the second spindle name, do not set a
character from 'A' to 'Z' as the third spindle name.
If a spindle name ends with a number, '=' is required between the
spindle name and a command value.

The usable names and their allowed combinations are indicated below.
First spindle Second Third spindle
name (fixed) spindle name name
0 to 9 0 to 9
Setting S 0 to 9
A to Z
A to Z
Correct example
S 1 1
<1>
Correct example
S A 1
<2>
Correct example
S A B
<3>
Incorrect example S 1 A

In multi-path control, an extended spindle name is common to all

paths. This means that if the first spindle of path 2 is named "SA",
and the following is specified for path 1:
SA1000;
1000 is specified for the first spindle of path 2. So, the same
expanded spindle name cannot be used with a different path.

- 28 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.9 SYNCHRONOUS / MIXTURE CONTROL

In multi-path control, movements are usually made on the axes of a
path according to a move command for the path (independent control
in each path). However, the synchronous/mixture control function
enables an arbitrary axis of one path to be synchronized with an
arbitrary axis of another path (synchronous control).
Moreover, a move command for an arbitrary axis of one path and a
move command for an arbitrary axis of another path can be exchanged
with each other to make a movement on each axis (mixture control).

Explanation
- Independent control in each path
Movements on the axes (X1, Z1, and so on) of path 1 are made
according to a move command for path 1, and movements on the axes
(X2, Z2, and so on) of path 2 are made according to a move command
for path 2.

Machining according to
X1 Turret 1
Z1 a program for path 2

Workpiece 2

Workpiece 1

X2 Z2
Machining according to Turret 2
a program for path 1

- Mixture control
By applying a move command for an axis (master axis) to a different
arbitrary axis (slave axis), the movements on the two axes can be
synchronized with each other. Whether to synchronize the movement
on a slave axis with the move command for the master axis or make a
movement on a slave according to the command for the slave can be
chosen using the signal (synchronous control selection signal) from
the PMC.

- 29 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

CAUTION
1 Synchronization mentioned above means that a
move command for the master axis is also
specified for a slave axis at the same time.
Synchronization loss compensation, which detects
the positional deviation between the master axis
and slave axis and compensates for the deviation,
is not performed. However, the positional deviation
is detected at all times, and if the positional
deviation exceeds a certain parameter-set value,
the movement on each axis is stopped with an
alarm.
2 The master axis and slave axis may belong to the
same path, or the master axis may belong to one
axis and the slave axis may belong to another.
Moreover, multiple slave axes can be specified for
one master axis.

Example 1)
The Z2 axis of path 2 is synchronized with the Z1 axis of path 1.

Turret 1

X1

Workpiece
Z1 Z2 (Synchronized with
movement along the Z1 axis)

Machining according to a program for path 1

Example 2)
The B1 axis of path 1 is synchronized with the Z1 axis of path 1.
Turret 1

X1
Tail stock

Workpiece
B1
Z1
(Synchronized with
movement along the Z1 axis)

- 30 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

- Mixture control
A move command for an arbitrary axis of one path and a move
command for an arbitrary axis of another path can be exchanged with
each other to make a movement on each axis.
Example)
A move command for the X1 axis of path 1 and a command for
the X2 axis of path 2 are exchanged with each other.
The program for path 1 makes movements along the X2 axis and
Z1 axis.
The program for path 2 makes movements along the X1 axis and
Z2 axis.

Machining according to
a program for path 1
X1 Turret 1
Z1

Workpiece 1

Workpiece 2

Z2
Turret 2 X2
Machining according to
a program for path 2

- 31 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.10 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL

In multi-path control, usually, movements are made on the axes of
path 1 according to a move command for path 1, and movements are
made on the axes of path 2 according to a move command for path 2
(independent control in each path). However, the superimposed
control function enables the travel distance on an arbitrary axis of one
path to be superimposed on the travel distance on an arbitrary axis of
another path.

Explanation
- Independent control in each path
Movements on the axes (X1, Z1, and so on) of path 1 are made
according to a move command for path 1, and movements on the axes
(X2, Z2, and so on) of path 2 are made according to a move command
for path 2.

Machining according to
X1 Turret 1
a program for path 2
Z1

Workpiece 2

Workpiece 1

X2 Z2
Machining according to Turret 2
a program for path 1

- 32 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

- Superimposed Control
To the travel distance on an axis (slave axis) for which an ordinary
move command is executed, the travel distance on the axis (master
axis) of another path is added. Superimposed control resembles
synchronous control. In superimposed control, however, a movement
on the slave axis can be specified with a command for the path to
which the slave axis belongs.
The master axis and slave axis may belong to the same path, or the
master axis may belong to one axis and the slave axis may belong to
another. Moreover, multiple slave axes can be specified for one
master axis. By parameter setting, the move directions on the master
axis and slave axis can be reversed from each other.
Example)
A move command for the Z1 axis of path 1 is superimposed on
the travel distance on the Z2 axis of path 2.

Machining according to
a program for path 1
X1 Turret 1

Workpiece
Z1 Turret 2
X2
Machining according to
Z2 a program for path 2

- 33 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.11 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

When a movement is made along one axis by using two servo motors
as in the case of a large gantry machine, a command for one axis can
drive the two motors by synchronizing one motor with the other.
Moreover, by using a feedback signal from each motor, a positional
difference (synchronous error) between the two motors is detected to
compensate for the synchronous error. When a synchronous error
exceeding a set value occurs, a synchronous error check can be made
to issue an alarm and stop a movement along the axis.

An axis used as the reference for axis synchronous control is referred

to as a master axis (M-axis), and an axis along which a movement is
made in synchronism with the master axis is referred to as a slave axis
(S-axis).

Z
A
(Slave axis)

X
(Master axis)

Even when synchronous error compensation is not used, the

synchronous establishment function can be used for automatic
compensation to eliminate a machine coordinate error in cases such as
emergency stop cancellation.

An external signal can be used to turn synchronization on and off.

When synchronization is turned on and off using an external signal,
synchronous error compensation cannot be used.

- 34 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.12 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL

When the angular axis installed makes an angle other than 90° with
the perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the
distance traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle as
in the case where the angular axis makes 90° with the perpendicular
axis.
Arbitrary axes can be specified as a set of an angular axis and
perpendicular axis by parameter setting.
The actual distance traveled is controlled according to an inclination
angle. However, a program, when created, assumes that the angular
axis and perpendicular axis intersect at right angles.

Program coordinate system

+Y'(Hypothetical axis) (Cartesian coordinates)
+Y'
θ

+Y'(Angular axis)
+X
+X(Perpendicular axis)

Machine coordinate system

(Angular coordinates)
+Y
θ: Inclination angle
+X

- 35 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.13 INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL

The conventional tilted working plane command / tool center point

control function for 5-axis machining / cutter compensation for 5-axis
machining / manual handle feed for 5-axis machining are used only
for those machines whose tool rotation axis or table rotation axis is
parallel to the basic axis of the basic coordinate system.
Inclined rotary axis control is intended to allow the tilted working
plane command / tool center point control function for 5-axis
machining / cutter compensation for 5-axis machining / manual handle
feed for 5-axis machining to be applied even when the tool rotation
axis or table rotation axis is inclined with respect to the X-Y plane, a
Y-Z plane or a Z-X plane of the machine coordinate system.

<1> Tool rotation type machine

Z
Z Y
C
C
B B

X Y

<2> Table rotation type machine

Z Y
X
C
Y
C
A
A X

<3> Mixed-type machine

B
Z
Y
C
X
B
Y
C

Fig. 1.13 (a) Three types of 5-axis machine

- 36 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

The machine shown in following figure has rotary axis B (master) that
turns around the Y-axis and rotary axis C (slave) whose Y-axis is
inclined at an angle of 45 degrees on the Y-Z plane.
The tilted working plane command / tool center point control function
for 5-axis machining / cutter compensation for 5-axis machining /
manual handle feed for 5-axis machining can be used even for the
machine configuration shown in following figure

Tool rotation type machine

Z
X

Y
B
Fig. 1.13 (b) Example of tool rotation type machine

The machine shown in following figure has rotary axis B (master)

whose Y-axis is inclined at an angle of -45 degrees on the Y-Z plane
and rotary axis C (slave) that turns around the Z-axis.
The tilted working plane command / tool center point control function
for 5-axis machining / cutter compensation for 5-axis machining /
manual handle feed for 5-axis machining can be used even for the
machine configuration shown in following figure.

Table rotation type machine

Z
X
C

B B

Fig. 1.13 (c) Example of table rotation type machine

- 37 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

The machine shown in following figure has tool rotation axis B whose
Y-axis is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees on the Y-Z plane and table
rotation axis C that turns around the Z-axis.
The tilted working plane command / tool center point control function
for 5-axis machining / cutter compensation for 5-axis machining /
manual handle feed for 5-axis machining can be used even for the
machine configuration shown in following figure.

Mixed-type machine

B
Z
X

Z
X
C

C
Y

Fig. 1.13 (d) Example of mixed-type machine

- 38 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.14 TANDEM CONTROL

If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large
table, for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By
means of this function, two motors can be used to perform movement
along a single axis.
Positioning is carried out only for the master axis. The slave axis is
used only to produce a torque. By means of this function, double the
amount of torque can be obtained.

Main motor
Table

Ball screw

Sub motor

The CNC generally processes the two axes of tandem control as a

single axis. In the management of servo parameters and the
monitoring of servo alarms, however, the two axes are handled
individually.

- 39 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.15 TANDEM DISTURBANCE ELIMINATION CONTROL

This function suppresses vibration caused by interference between the
main axis and sub-axis in position tandem control (feed axis
synchronization).

Disturbance
Servo

NC command + + + +
Position Velocity fbm
Velocity Kt/Jm⋅s
control control
- +
Main motor
Main axis
Velocity fbm
Tandem Disturbance
Velocity fbs
Elimination control

Sub axis
Sub motor
- -
Position Velocity Kt/Jm⋅s
control + control + + Velocity fbs
+

Disturbance

- 40 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.16 TORQUE CONTROL

For a PMC controlled axis, continuous feed based on torque control is
performed.
Control on a PMC controlled axis can be switched from position
control to torque control, so that the servo motor outputs torque as
specified by the NC.

1.17 POLE POSITION DETECTION FUNCTION

When a motor manufactured by other than FANUC is driven, the
magnetic pole position of the motor is detected.

NOTE
1 This function cannot be used with a vertical axis to
which force is applied at all times.
2 This function cannot be used with an axis when the
axis is completely locked.

1.18 CONTROL AXIS DETACH

These signals release the specified control axes from control by the
CNC. When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table),
these signals are selected according to whether the attachments are
mounted. When multiple rotary tables are used in turn, the tables must
use motors of the same model.

- 41 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.19 INCREMENT SYSTEM

Five types of increment systems are available as indicated in the table
below, and can be chosen from by parameter setting.
Table 1.19 (a) Increment system
Name of Least command
Least input increment
increment system increment
0.01 mm 0.01 mm
IS-A 0.001 inch 0.001 inch
0.01 deg 0.01 deg
0.001 mm 0.001 mm
IS-B 0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch
0.001 deg 0.001 deg
0.0001 mm 0.0001 mm
IS-C 0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg
0.00001 mm 0.00001 mm
IS-D 0.000001 inch 0.000001 inch
0.00001 deg 0.00001 deg
0.000001 mm 0.000001 mm
IS-E 0.0000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
0.000001 deg 0.000001 deg

The least command increment is either metric or inch depending on

the machine tool. Set metric or inch to the parameter INM.
For selection between metric and inch for the least input increment, G
code (G20 or G21) or a setting parameter selects it.
By parameter setting, a least input increment 10 times greater than a
least command increment can be set as indicated in the table below.
Table 1.19 (b) Increment system
Name of Least command
Least input increment
increment system increment
0.01 mm 0.001 mm
IS-B 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch
0.01 deg 0.001 deg
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
IS-C 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm
IS-D 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch
0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg
0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm
IS-E 0.000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
0.00001 deg 0.000001 deg

NOTE
When the increment system is IS-A or pocket
calculator type decimal point programming is used,
a least input increment 10 times greater than a
least command increment cannot be set.

- 42 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.20 FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR

The detection multiply (DMR) can be extended to set DMR=n/m by
using two parameters n and m.

1.21 ARBITRARY COMMAND MULTIPLY

When the detection unit assumes a special value, an arbitrary
command multiply can be set using the ratio of n:m. The setting range
is 1/9999 to 9999/1.

1.22 DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK

In general, a machine with a large backlash may operate stably with a
semi-closed loop but may vibrate with a closed loop. This function
exercises control so that such a machine can operate stably with a
closed loop as in the case of a semi-closed loop.

The block diagram of dual position feedback control is shown below.

Position Separate
ER1 gain Motor detector
MCMD + + ER + Velocity
Σ Kp control Amplifier
- + -

Velocity feedback
Conversion
coefficient
Position feedback (from motor)

ER2
+ -
Σ Primary delay time
constant
- +

Position feedback (from separate detector)

Fig. 1.22 (a) Block diagram of dual position feedback control

- 43 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.23 HRV CONTROL

HRV control is a digital servo current control method, and the HRV
control system includes servo HRV2, servo HRV3, and servo HRV4.
By employing these control methods, even higher speed, higher
precision, and higher machining speed can be achieved.

• Servo HRV control system

Servo HRV2 control
Servo HRV control Servo HRV3 control
Servo HRV4 control

HRV control has three features:

(1) A disturbance elimination filter for eliminating low-frequency
vibration from a low-rigidity machine has been developed.
(2) Smoother feed is made possible by a higher-precision servo
amplifier and detector.
(3) By employing high-speed DSP, a current control cycle higher
than the conventional one is made achievable with the standard
servo system.

HRV filter that can widely match low-

frequency to high-frequency vibration Higher-speed current control
Higher-
precision
current
detection

Velocity HRV ＨＲＶ Servo

Position
control control filter current amplifier
control

Current feedback

Velocity feedback
Motor

Detector with high response and high precision

- 44 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.24 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION

Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be selected by
G code.

Format
G20 ; Inch input
G21 ; Metric input

Explanation
This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting
the coordinate system at the beginning of the program. Do not specify
this G code in the middle of a program.
Moreover, inch/metric conversion is possible in setting data setting.
After the G code for inch/metric conversion is specified, the unit of
input data is switched to the least inch or metric input increment of
increment system. The unit of data input for degrees remains
unchanged. The unit systems for the following values are changed
after inch/metric conversion:
• Feedrate commanded by F code
• Positional command
• Workpiece origin offset value
• Tool compensation value
• Unit of scale for manual pulse generator
• Movement distance in incremental feed
• Some parameters
When the power is turned on, the G code is the same as that held
before the power was turned off.

- 45 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.25 INTERLOCK

1.25.1 All-axis Interlock

Feed on all axes can be disabled. If all-axis interlock is applied during
movement, a gradual stop occurs.
When the all-axes interlock signal is canceled, movement restarts.

1.25.2 Each-axis Interlock

Feed on a specified axis can be disabled, independent of other axes. If
each-axis interlock is applied to an axis during cutting feed, a gradual
stop occurs on all axes of the movable machine section.
When the interlock signal is canceled, movement restarts.

1.25.3 Block Start Interlock

During automatic operation, the start of the next block can be disabled.
A block whose execution has already been started continues to be
executed up to the end of the block.
When block start interlock is canceled, the execution of the next block
starts.

1.25.4 Cutting Block Start Interlock

During automatic operation, the start of a block including a move
command other than a command for positioning can be disabled.
When cutting block start interlock is canceled, the execution of the
next block starts.
If spindle rotation is specified or the spindle speed is changed, the
next cutting block can be executed at the desired spindle speed by
applying cutting block start interlock until the spindle reaches the
desired speed.

- 46 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.26 MACHINE LOCK

1.26.1 All-axis Machine Lock

The change of the position display can be monitored without moving
the machine.
When all-axis machine lock signal is set to 1, output pulses (move
commands) to the servo motors are stopped in manual or automatic
operation. The commands are distributed, however, updating the
absolute and relative coordinates. The operator can therefore check if
the commands are correct by monitoring the position display.
Machine lock during operation can be enabled even in the middle of
block execution.

1.26.2 Each-axis Machine Lock

With the each-axis machine lock signal, machine lock can be applied
to each axis.

1.27 EMERGENCY STOP

An emergency stop stops all commands and instantly stops the
machine. Connect the emergency stop signal to both of the control
unit side and servo unit side.

When an emergency stop is applied, servo system activation is

canceled, and the servo ready signal is turned off. However, the travel
distance of the machine during that time is reflected in the current
position, so that the position data is not lost (follow-up). If the
position detection system is normal, operation can be restarted after
emergency stop cancellation without performing a reference position
return operation again.

1.28 OVERTRAVEL

When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine
tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the
limit switch and an OVER TRAVEL alarm is displayed.
An overtravel signal is provided for each direction on each axis.

- 47 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.29 STORED STROKE CHECK 1

A machine movable range is set with coordinates in the machine

coordinate system in parameters. If the machine attempts to move
beyond the range, it is decelerated and stopped and an alarm is
displayed.
This function is enabled after manual reference position return is
performed after power-on.
It can be used instead of an overtravel limit switch (hardware
component).
When both functions are used, both are valid.
Unlike an overtravel limit switch, this function checks whether the
position at which the machine is stopped after decelerated from the
current position is beyond the range.
The stroke check 1 release signal common to all axes can be set to 1
so that the control unit does not make stroke check 1.

(X1, Y1, Z1, ...)

The forbidden area is

shaded.

(X2, Y2, Z2, ...)

1.30 STROKE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING

When a tool is changed, the tool tip is aligned with the end of the limit
area and signals are input. This operation sets the machine position
(machine coordinates) at that time as the limit position in stored stroke
check parameters. A setting signal is provided for each direction of
each axis.

- 48 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.31 STORED STROKE CHECK 2 (G22, G23)

For stored stroke check 2, the outside or inside of the area specified by
parameters or a program is defined as the forbidden area. As a limit
position, specify a distance from the origin of the machine coordinate
system. This function is enabled after manual reference position
return is performed at power-on. When the limits are specified in a
program, they can be set for the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. For this reason,
the forbidden area can be changed according to the workpiece.
Whether to define the inside or outside of the specified area as the
forbidden area is determined by setting the corresponding parameter.
(X,Y,Z) (X,Y,Z)

(I,J,K)
(I,J,K)
When the outside of the When the inside of the
specified area is defined as specified area is defined as
the forbidden area. the forbidden area.

Format
G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ; Stored stroke check 2 on
X, Y, Z : Coordinates in the + direction of stored stroke check 2
I, J, K : Coordinates in the - direction of stored stroke check 2
The address is X, Y, Z, I, J, or K. X and I, Y and J, and Z and K
specify a forbidden area for the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis of the
basic three axes, respectively. If an address is omitted, a stroke
check is make according to the parameter settings.
G23 ; Stored stroke check 2 off

1.32 STORED STROKE CHECK 3

The inside of a parameter-set area is a forbidden area.

(X1,Y1,Z1)

(X2,Y2,Z2)

When the inside of the specified area is

defined as the forbidden area.

- 49 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.33 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE

During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given
block is started, whether the tool enters the inhibited area defined by
stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the coordinate
of the end point from the current position of the machine and a
specified amount of travel. If the tool is found to enter the inhibited
area defined by a stored stroke limit, the tool is stopped immediately
upon the start of movement for that block, and an alarm is displayed.

- 50 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.34 CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER

T
The chuck and tail stock barrier function prevents damage to the
machine by checking whether the tool tip interferes with either the
chuck or tail stock.
Specify an area into which the tool may not enter (entry-prohibition
area). This is done using the special setting screen, according to the
shapes of the chuck and tail stock. If the tool tip should enter the set
area during a machining operation, this function stops the tool and
outputs an alarm message.
The tool can be removed from the prohibited area only by retracting it
in the direction from which the tool entered the area.
This function can be enabled or disabled by G22 (stored stroke check
2 on), G23 (stored stroke check 2 off), and a machine-side signal.
Tail stock barrier
G code Tail stock barrier Chuck barrier
signal
0 Valid Valid
G22
1 Invalid Valid
0 Invalid Invalid
G23
1 Invalid Invalid

Explanation
- Chuck figure definition
- Chuck holding the - Chuck holding the
outer face of a tool inner face of a tool
L X L X
A A

L1 W1
W W
CX CX
W1 L1

Z Z
CZ
CZ

Workpiece coordinate
system origin
Workpiece coordinate
system origin

Note) The hatched areas indicate entry-inhibition areas.

- 51 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Symbol Description
Chuck-shape selection (0: Holding the inner face of a
TY
tool, 1: Holding the outer face of a tool)
CX Chuck position (along X-axis)
CZ Chuck position (along Z-axis)
L Length of chuck jaws
W Depth of chuck jaws (radius)
L1 Holding length of chuck jaws
W1 Holding depth of chuck jaws (radius)

- Tail stock figure definition

X
L

TZ L1

L2
Workpiece
B
D3 D2 D1 D
Z

Workpiece
coordinate system
origin

Symbol Description
TZ Tail stock position (along the Z-axis)
L Tail stock length
D Tail stock diameter
L1 Tail stock length (1)
D1 Tail stock diameter (1)
L2 Tail stock length (2)
D2 Tail stock diameter (2)
D3 Tail stock hole diameter (3)

- 52 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.35 MIRROR IMAGE

Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by
parameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions are
reversed during automatic operation along axes to which a mirror
image is applied.
X
B

A
B’
Z
0
Mirror image ON relative to X-axis at point A

Mirror image (Example for lathe system)

However, the following directions are not reversed:

• Direction of manual operation and direction of movement, from
the intermediate position to the reference position during
automatic reference position return (for the machining center
system and lathe system)
• Shift direction for boring cycles (G76 and G87) (for machining
center system only)
Signals indicate whether mirror image is applied to each axis. System
variable contains the same information.

1.36 FOLLOW-UP

If the machine moves in the state in which position control on

controlled axes is disabled (during servo-off, emergency stop, or servo
alarm), feedback pulses are accumulated in the error counter. The
CNC reflects the machine movement corresponding to the error count
in the current position managed by the CNC. This operation is referred
to as follow-up. When follow-up is performed, the current position
managed by the CNC does not shift from the actual machine position.
So, operation can be restarted after emergency stop cancellation or
servo alarm cancellation without performing a reference position
return operation again.
You can select whether to perform follow-up for axes when the servo
is turned off.
Follow-up is always performed during emergency stop or a servo
alarm.

- 53 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.37 SERVO OFF / MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED

Place the controlled axes in the servo off state, stop the current to the
servo motor, which disables position control. However, the position
detection feature functions continuously, so the current position is not
lost.
These signals are used to prevent the servo motors from overloading
when the tools on the axes are mechanically clamped under certain
machining conditions on the machine, or to move the machine by
driving the motors by mechanical handles.

1.38 CHAMFERING ON/OFF

T
In the threading cycle (G76), which is a multiple repetitive cycle for
turning, and in the threading cycle (G92), which is a canned cycle,
threading can be selected with the chamfering signal.

Approx.
Approx.
45°
45°

r r

r : Threading amount

Fig. 1.38 (a) Straight threading and taper threading

- 54 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.39 INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH

T
When tool posts on individual paths machine the same workpiece
simultaneously, the tool posts can approach each other very closely.
If the tool posts interfere with each other due to a program error or any
other setting error, a serious damage such as a tool or machine
destruction can occur.
If such a command that causes tool posts of paths to interfere with
each other is specified, this function gradually stops the tool posts
before the tool posts actually interfere with each other.
The contours and shapes of the tool posts on individual paths are
checked to determine whether or not an interference occurs.
This function enables an interference check between two paths or
interference check among multiple paths. Which check to make can
be determined by parameter setting.

Tool post 2

Tool post 1

To make a path interference check, data including the relationships

between the tool posts on individual paths and interference forbidden
areas (that is, tool shapes) needs to be set.
Based on the interference forbidden areas of the tool currently selected
on the tool post of each path and tool posts, an inter-path interference
check determines whether the tools and tool posts interfere with each
other, by checking whether those forbidden areas overlap each other
as a result of movement of each tool post. If an interference occurs,
the interfering tool posts gradually stop with an alarm.

- 55 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.40 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION

FUNCTION
Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load
torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid
traverse or cutting feed. This function detects the disturbance torque
on the motors and sends this value as an estimated load torque to the
PMC. If the detected disturbance torque value is abnormally great
compared with the value specified in the parameter, the function stops
the servo motor as early as possible or reverses the motor by an
appropriate value specified in a parameter, in order to minimize
possible damage to the machine.
The unexpected disturbance torque detection function is further
divided as follows:
(1) Estimated disturbance torque output function
The CNC is always calculating the estimated disturbance torque
for the motor (excluding acceleration/deceleration torque). The
estimated disturbance torque output function enables the PMC to
read the calculated torque using the window function.
(2) Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm function
This function stops motors or reverses them by an amount
specified in a parameter, causing the CNC to output an alarm,
whenever the disturbance torque is greater than the value
specified in a parameter. (The function to reverse motors is
effective only for servo motors.)

Unexpected disturbance torque detection can also be disabled only for

specific axes by using parameter for the unexpected disturbance
torque detection function and unexpected disturbance torque detection
ignore signals. (This function is effective only for servo motors.)

1.41 ROTARY AXIS CONTROL

This function controls a rotary axis as specified by an absolute

command.
With this function, the sign of the value specified in the command is
interpreted as the direction of rotation, and the absolute value of the
specified value is interpreted as the coordinates of the target end
position.
This function is valid when rotary axis roll-over is enabled.
If the parameter is set, an absolute command specified for the roll-
over rotary axis is interpreted as follows: The sign and absolute value
of the value specified in the command represent the direction of
rotation and the end position of movement respectively.

- 56 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 1.CONTROLLED AXIS

1.42 POSITION SWITCH

Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine
coordinates along a controlled axes are within a parameter-specified
ranges.
Using parameters, specify arbitrary controlled axes and machine
coordinate operating ranges for which position switch signals are
output.
Up to 10 position switch signals can be output.
Parameter can be set to use up to 16 position switch signals.

1.43 HIGH-SPEED POSITION SWITCH

The high-speed position switch function monitors the current position

at shorter intervals than the normal position switch function to output
a high-speed precise position switch signal.
In the same way as for the normal position switch function, using
parameters, specify arbitrary controlled axes and machine coordinate
operating ranges for which position switch signals are output.
Up to 6 high-speed position signals can be output. Parameter can be
set to 1 to use up to 16 high-speed position switch signals.

1.44 DIRECTION-DEPENDENT TYPE HIGH-SPEED POSITION

SWITCH
The high-speed position switch function monitors the machine
coordinates and move direction to output high-speed position switch
signals.
Two machine coordinates are monitored. When the tool passes
through one coordinate in the specified direction, the high-speed
position switch signal is set to 1. When it passes through the other
coordinate in the specified direction, the signal is set to 0.
The output mode of high-speed position switch signals (normal type
or direction-dependent type) is set using parameters.

- 57 -
1.CONTROLLED AXIS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

1.45 LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESS

REFERENCE MARK

1.45.1 Linear Scale Interface with Absolute Address Reference Mark

With this function, an absolute position can be identified if the interval
of reference marks is known, because the intervals of two reference
marks (one-rotation signals) differ from each other by a certain
distance. This CNC measures one-rotation signal intervals by making
a slight movement on an axis to calculate an absolute position. So, a
reference position can be established without making a movement to
the reference position on the axis.

Reference Reference Reference

mark 1 mark 1 mark 1
Reference Reference Reference
mark 2 mark 2 mark 2

10.02 10.04 10.06

20.02 20.02

20.00 20.00 20.00

1.45.2 Linear Scale with Absolute Address Reference Mark

Expansion
When a G00 command is specified or a move command based on jog
feed is specified, this function enables a reference mark interval
measurement to be made automatically in order to establish a
reference position.

- 58 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2 OPERATION

- 59 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.1 OPERATION MODE

2.1.1 Automatic Operation (Memory Operation)

Program registered in the memory can be executed.

2.1.2 MDI Operation

Multiple blocks can be input and executed on the MDI unit.

2.1.3 DNC Operation

A program can be executed while being read from the input device
connected with the reader/punch interface.

2.1.4 DNC Operation with Memory Card

A program can be executed while being read from the memory card.

2.2 PROGRAM SEARCH

By operating the MDI panel, a program to be executed can be selected

from the programs stored in the program memory.

2.3 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH

By operating the MDI panel, a block can be selected according to a
sequence number in the currently selected program in the program
memory.
When a program is to be executed starting with a block in the middle
of the program, the sequence number of the block is to be specified to
search for the sequence number.

- 60 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.4 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP

If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the
program being executed, operation enters single block mode after the
block is executed. By setting operation, the operator can set a
sequence number through the MDI panel. This function is useful for
checking a program, because the program can be stopped at a desired
position without modifying the program.

2.5 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS

These functions monitor the CNC internal status and check that
related data is within the allowable range. If an invalid state due to a
deteriorated hardware component or noise is detected, these functions
stop the machine with an alarm to prevent any malfunction.

The following malfunction prevention functions are available:

• Checking the maximum speed of the servo motor
• Checking the maximum acceleration of the servo motor
• Checking the maximum speed of the spindle motor
• Checking the stored stroke limit at the end point
• Monitoring execution of NC command analysis
• Monitoring execution of acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation

- 61 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.6 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTION

An improper tool offset setting or an improper operation of the
machine can result in the workpiece being cut inadequately or the tool
being damaged. Also, if data is lost due to an operation mistake, it
takes extra time to recover from the mistake.
The wrong operation prevention functions described below are meant
to prevent the operator from performing any unintended operation.
1 Functions that are used when data is set
• Data check to verify that the offset data is within the valid
setting range
• Incremental input operation confirmation
• Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key to prevent
any improper absolute or incremental input operation
• Confirmation of any operation of deleting the program or all
data
• Confirmation of a data update during the data setting
process
2 Functions that are used when the program is executed
• Highlighting of updated modal information
• Display of the executed block status prior to the program
execution
• Display of the axis status, such as the mirror image function
enabled or the interlock function enabled
• Check for starting from the middle of the program
• Data check to verify that the offset data is within the
effective setting range
• Maximum incremental value check

- 62 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.7 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING

When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop
or a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can
subsequently be drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function
automatically stores information relating to the tapping executed most
recently. When a tap retraction signal is input, the tap is removed from
the hole, based on the stored information. The tap is pulled toward the
R point. When a retract value α is set in parameter, the retraction
distance can be increased by α.

Initial point
2nd return
completion
α point

1st return
Retract completion
completion α point
R point point

L L

Tapping stop
point

Z point (α=0) (when α is set)

2.8 BUFFER REGISTER

The CNC contains a buffer register so that a pause in CNC command

operation caused by program reading and preprocessing time can be
suppressed.

2.9 DRY RUN

The tool is moved at a constant feedrate regardless of the feedrate

specified in the program. This function is used, for example, to check
the movement of the tool without a workpiece.
Dry run is valid only for automatic operation.

- 63 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.10 SINGLE BLOCK

When the single block signal is set to 1 during automatic operation,
the CNC enters the automatic operation stop state after executing the
current block. In subsequent automatic operation, the CNC enters the
automatic operation stop state after executing each block in the
program. When the single block signal is set to 0, normal automatic
operation is restored.
Single block operation is valid only for automatic operation.

2.11 JOG FEED

- Jog feed
Each axis can be moved in the + or - direction for the time the button
is pressed. Feedrate is the parameter set speed with override of:
0 to 655.34%, 0.01% step.
The parameter set feedrate can be set to each axis.

- Manual rapid traverse

Each axis can be fed in a rapid feed to the + or - direction for the time
the button is pressed.
Rapid traverse override is also possible.

2.12 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

Positioning to the reference position can be done by manual operation.

With jog feed mode, manual reference position return signals, and
signal for selecting manual reference position return axis on, the tool
the machine is turned on, it decelerates, and when it is turned off again,
it stops at the first grid point.
Upon completion of manual reference position return operation, the
reference position return completion signal is sent.
By performing manual reference position return, the machine
coordinate system and the workpiece coordinate system is established.
A grid method of manual reference position return is available.
The grid method can shift the reference position with the grid shift
function.

- 64 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.13 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG

This function moves the machine to around the reference position set
for each axis in the jog feed mode. Then it sets the reference position
for the machine in the manual reference position return mode without
the deceleration signal for reference position return. With this function,
the machine reference position can be set at a given position without
the deceleration signal for reference position return.
If the absolute-position detector is provided, the set reference position
is retained after the power is turned off. In this case, when the power
is turned on again, there is no need for setting the reference position
again.

- Procedure for setting the reference position

(1) Feed the tool, along the axis for which the reference position is to
be set, by jog feed in the reference position return direction. Stop
the tool near the reference position, but do not exceed the
reference position.
(2) Enter manual reference position return mode, then set 1 for the
feed axis direction selection signal (for the positive or negative
direction) for the axis.
(3) The CNC positions the tool to the nearest grid line (based on
one-rotation signals from the position detector) in the reference
position return direction specified with parameter. The point at
which the tool is positioned becomes the reference position.
(4) The CNC checks that the tool is positioned to within the in-
position area, then sets the completion signal for reference
position return and the reference position establishment signal to
1.

- Manual reference position return

When the feed axis and direction selection signal is set to 1 in manual
reference position return mode after the reference position has been
established, the tool is positioned to the reference position regardless
of the direction specified by the feed axis and direction selection
signal. The completion signal for reference position return is then set
to 1.

- 65 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.14 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL

STOPPER
This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a
mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose
of this function is to eliminate the variations in reference position
setting that arise depending on the operator, and to minimize work
required to make fine adjustments after reference position setting.
Select the axis for which the reference position is to be set, then
perform cycle start. Then, the following operations are performed
automatically:
1. The torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced to make the
butting feedrate constant, and the tool is butted against the
mechanical stopper. Then, the tool is withdrawn a parameter-set
distance from the mechanical stopper.
2. Again, the torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced, and the
tool is butted against the mechanical stopper. Then, the tool is
withdrawn a parameter-set distance from the mechanical stopper.
3. The withdrawal point on the axis is set as the reference position.

2.15 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FEEDRATE SETTING

If a value is set with the parameter for reference position return
feedrate setting, the manual and automatic reference position return
feedrates and automatic rapid traverse rate before coordinate system
establishment in the first reference position return operation after
power-on follow the parameter settings for each axis.
After a reference position return operation is completed and a
reference position is established, the manual reference position return
feedrate set in the parameter for each axis is used.

- 66 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.16 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT

In reference position return operation based on the grid method, the
reference position can be shifted without moving the deceleration
dogs, by setting a reference position shift amount in a parameter.
This function eliminates the need for adjusting the deceleration dogs
at the time of reference position adjustment, so that the time required
for reference position adjustment can be reduced remarkably.

Reference position
return direction
LDEC LSFT
Deceleration dog

Machine
Grid point zero point
LDEC : Distance from the turning-off of the deceleration dog to the first grid
point (grid point when the reference position shift amount is 0)
LSFT : Reference position shift amount

- 67 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.17 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

2.17.1 Manual Handle Feed (1st)

By rotating the manual pulse generator on the machine operator's

panel in the handle mode, the axis feed corresponding to the amount
of rotation can be performed. A desired axis can be selected using the
handle axis selection switch.

2.17.2 Manual Handle Feed (2nd and 3rd)

A 2nd, as well as 3rd manual pulse generator can be rotated to move
the axis for the equivalent distance. Manual handle feed of 3 axes can
be done at a time. Multiplier is common to 1st, 2nd, and 3rd manual
pulse generators.

2.17.3 Manual Handle Feed Magnification

The manual pulse generator generates 100 pulses per rotation. Move
amount per pulse can be specified from the following magnifications:
×1, ×10, ×m, ×m.
m and n are parameters set values of 1 to 2000.
Move distance is :
(Least command increment) x (magnification)
Moreover, the magnifications can be increased by a factor of 10 by
parameter setting.

Table 2.17.3 (a) Travel increment in manual handle feed

Increment Travel increment
system Metric input (mm) Inch input (inch)
IS-A 0.01, 0.1, m/100, n/100 0.001, 0.01, m/1000, n/1000
0.0001, 0.001, m/10000,
IS-B 0.001, 0.01, m/1000, n/1000
n/10000
0.0001, 0.001, m/10000, 0.00001, 0.0001, m/100000,
IS-C
n/10000 n/100000
0.00001, 0.0001, m/100000, 0.000001, 0.00001,
IS-D
n/100000 m/1000000, n/1000000
0.000001, 0.00001, 0.0000001, 0.000001,
IS-E
m/1000000, n/1000000 m/10000000, n/10000000

- 68 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.18 MANUAL FEED FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING

This function enables the use of the following functions.

• Tool axis direction handle feed/tool axis direction jog feed/tool

axis direction incremental feed
• Tool axis right-angle direction handle feed/tool axis right-angle
direction jog feed/tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed
• Tool tip center rotation handle feed/tool tip center rotation jog
feed/tool tip center rotation incremental feed
• Table vertical direction handle feed/table vertical direction jog
feed/table vertical direction incremental feed
• Table horizontal direction handle feed/table horizontal direction
jog feed/table horizontal direction incremental feed

A handle interrupt can be generated for each handle feed. Handle

interrupts work according to the corresponding handle feed
specifications described hereinafter unless otherwise noted.

NOTE
1 To execute 5-axis machining handle feed requires
the manual handle feed option. Also, to generate
5-axis machining handle interrupts requires the
manual handle interrupt option.
2 A 5-axis machining handle interrupt must not be
generated when a rotation axis command is being
executed during automatic operation.
3 Manual feed for 5-axis machining is disabled when
the manual reference position return mode is
selected.

- 69 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.18.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis Direction Jog
Feed / Tool Axis Direction Incremental Feed
This function moves the tool or table in the tool axis direction of the
tool inclined by the rotation of the rotation axis, by the specified
amount of travel by handle feed/jog feed/incremental feed.
As the rotation axes for controlling the tool rotate, the tool axis
direction changes according to the rotation axis angle.

B
C
Tool axis direction

Z
Workpiece C
B
Y

- 70 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.18.2 Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis

Right-Angle Direction Jog Feed / Tool Axis Right-Angle
Direction Incremental Feed
This function moves the tool or table in a specified direction
perpendicular to the tool axis of the tool inclined by the rotation of the
rotation axis, by the specified amount of travel by handle feed/jog
feed/incremental feed.
A tool axis right-angle direction is perpendicular to the tool axis
direction, and there are two tool axis right-angle directions for
selection by parameter setting.
As the rotation axes for controlling the tool rotate, the tool axis right-
angle direction changes according to the rotation axis angle.

B
Tool axis right- C
angle direction

Workpiece
Tool axis Z
direction C
B
Y

- 71 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.18.3 Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed / Tool Tip Center
Rotation Jog Feed / Tool Tip Center Rotation Incremental
Feed
This function makes a movement along the linear axes (X-axis, Y-axis,
Z-axis) by the specified amount of travel by handle feed/jog
feed/incremental feed so that when a rotation axis is rotated, its
rotation does not change the relative relationship between the tool tip
position and workpiece (table).

• The following figure shows an example where the tool is rotated on

the rotation axis. In this case, the linear axes are moved so that the
position of the tool tip is not moved with respect to the workpiece.

Tool tip position

Workpiece

• The following figure shows an example where the table is rotated

on the rotation axis. As in the previous case, the linear axes are
moved so that the position of the tool tip is not moved with respect
to the workpiece (table).

Workpiece
Table

Z
B B
B Y

- 72 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.18.4 Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed / Table Vertical Direction

Jog Feed / Table Vertical Direction Incremental Feed
This function moves the tool in the table vertical direction by the
specified amount of travel by handle feed/jog feed/incremental feed.
The table vertical direction is a direction vertical to the table. When
the rotation axes for controlling the table rotate, the table vertical
direction changes according to the rotation axis angle.

Table vertical direction

Z
Y
B
B
X

2.18.5 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed / Table Horizontal

Direction Jog Feed / Table Horizontal Direction Incremental
Feed
This function moves the tool in a table horizontal direction by the
specified amount of travel by handle feed/jog feed/incremental feed.
A table horizontal direction is perpendicular to the table vertical
direction (mentioned in Subsection 2.18.4), and there are two table
horizontal directions for selection by parameter setting.
As the rotation axes for controlling the table rotate, the table
horizontal direction changes according to the rotation axis angle.

Table horizontal direction 2

Table horizontal direction 1

Z
Y
B
B
X

- 73 -
2.OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

2.19 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION

By rotating the manual pulse generator in the automatic operation
mode (manual data input, DNC operation, or memory operation) or in
the memory editing mode, handle feed can be superimposed on
movement by automatic operation. A handle interruption axis is
selected using the manual handle interruption axis selection signal.
The minimum unit of travel distance per scale division is the least
input increment.
An axis subject to manual handle interruption is selected using the
manual handle interruption axis selection signal.

2.20 INCREMENTAL FEED

Pressing a certain button on the machine operator's panel changes a
specified travel distance in the + direction or - direction. The
minimum unit of travel distance is the least input increment. It can be
multiplied by a magnification of 10, 100, or 1000. By parameter
setting, it can be additionally multiplied by 10. The table below lists
travel increments.

Table 2.20 (a) Travel increments in incremental feed

Increment Travel increment
system Metric input (mm) Inch input (inch)
IS-A 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0
IS-B 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
IS-C 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01
0.000001, 0.00001, 0.0001,
IS-D 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01
0.001
0.000001, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.0000001, 0.000001,
IS-E
0.001 0.00001, 0.0001

CAUTION
For an axis with its diameter specified in
incremental feed, the travel distance is based on
the diameter value.

- 74 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 2.OPERATION

2.21 JOG AND HANDLE SIMULTANEOUS MODE

Usually, manual handle feed is enabled only when the operation mode
is set to the manual handle feed mode. By parameter setting, however,
manual handle feed can be performed even in the jog feed mode.
Note, however, that jog feed and manual handle feed cannot be
performed at the same time.
Manual handle feed can be performed only when jog feed is not being
performed (when no movement is being made on the axis).

2.22 MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND

The manual numerical command function allows data programmed

through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is
ready for jog feed, a manual numerical command can be executed.
The following eight functions are supported:
Movements on the axes and commands based on the M, S, T, and B
functions can be disabled by parameter setting.
(1) Positioning (G00)
(2) Linear interpolation (G01)
(3) Automatic reference position return (G28)
(4) 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30)
(5) M codes (auxiliary functions)
(6) S codes (spindle speed functions)
(7) T codes (tool functions)
(8) B codes (second auxiliary functions)

- 75 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

- 76 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.1 NANO INTERPOLATION

As the unit of output to the servo system, the detection unit is usually
used. However, this function enables output to the servo system to be
performed using the detection unit multiplied by 1/1000 for improved
precision in machining. This function remarkably improves surface
roughness in particular.
However, positioning precision depends on machine conditions such
as the resolution of the detector.

NOTE
This function is most effective if the resolution of a
detector is finer than the detection unit. Even if the
resolution of a detector is the same as the
detection unit (as in the case of a closed loop), this
function is effective when the feed-forward function
is used.

- 77 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.2 POSITIONING
This command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece
coordinate system specified with an absolute or an incremental
command at a rapid traverse rate.
In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is
programmed.
In the incremental command the distance the tool moves is
programmed.

Either of the following tool paths can be selected according to

parameter.
• Nonlinear interpolation type positioning
The tool is positioned with the rapid traverse rate for each axis
separately. The tool path is normally straight.
• Linear interpolation type positioning.
The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed
that is not more than the rapid traverse rate for each axis.

Linear interpolation type positioning Start point

End point
Nonlinear interpolation type positioning

In the positioning mode based on G00, the machine is accelerated up

to a specified feedrate at the start of a block. At the end of the block,
the machine is decelerated to a stop to make an in-position check (to
see if the machine has arrived at a specified position).
By parameter setting, an in-position check for each block can be
disabled.

Format
G00 IP_ ;
IP_ : For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end
point, and for an incremental command, the distance
the tool moves.

- 78 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.3 EXACT STOP MODE

When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at
the end point and in-position check is performed per block thereafter.
This G61 is valid until G62 (automatic corner override), G63 (tapping
mode), or G64 (cutting mode), is commanded.

3.4 TAPPING MODE

When G63 is commanded, feedrate override is ignored (always

regarded as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed
does not decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block.
This G63 is valid until G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
override), or G64 (cutting mode) is commanded.

3.5 CUTTING MODE

When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block

thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
command is valid until G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded. However, in G64
mode, feedrate is decelerated to zero and in-position check is
performed in the following case;
• Positioning mode (G00, G60)
• Block with exact stop check (G09)
• Next block is a block without movement command

- 79 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.6 EXACT STOP

The feedrate of a block specifying continuous cutting feed can be
controlled using NC commands as described below.
Move command in blocks commanded with G09 decelerates at the
end point, and in–position check is performed. When the feed motor
enters the effective area, the movement of the next block starts. This
function is used when sharp edges are required for workpiece corners
in cutting feed.

Exact stop OFF

Exact stop ON (The in-position

check is performed at the end of a
block.)

3.7 LINEAR INTERPOLATION

A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate

specified in F.
The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified.
It need not be specified for each block.
X axis (Program example)
G90 G01 X200. Y150. F200. ;

End point (200,150)

Start point
Z axis

Format
G01 IP_ F_ ;
IP_ : For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end
point, and for an incremental command, the distance
the tool moves.
F_ : Speed of tool feed (Feedrate)

- 80 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.8 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

Circular interpolation of optional angle from 0° to 360° can be

specified.
G02: Clockwise (CW) circular interpolation
G03: Counterclockwise (CCW) circular interpolation
Yp Xp Zp

G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

Xp Zp Yp
G17 G18 G19

Feedrate of the tangential direction takes the speed specified by the F

code. Planes to perform circular interpolation is specified by G17,
G18, G19. Circular interpolation can be performed not only on the X,
Y, and Z axis but also on the parallel axes of the X, Y, and Z axes.
G17: Xp-Yp plane where Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18: Zp-Xp plane Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19: Yp-Zp plane Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
Parameter is set to decide which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes to be
the additional axis.

Format
Arc in the XpYp plane
G02 I_ J_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the ZpXp plane
G02 K_ I_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the YpZp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
I_, j_, K_ :Distance of the X, Y, Z axes from the start
point to the center of the circle
R_ :Arc radius (For an arc having a central angle of 180°
or greater, specify an R value with a minus sign. A
complete circumference cannot be specified.)
End point (x,y) End point (z,x) End point (y,z)

y x z
x Start z Start y Start
i k j
point point point
j i k
Center Center Center

- 81 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.9 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION

Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a
workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore,
exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect to
another axis. This enables tapered groove machining with a constant
helix angle (constant helix taper machining). This function is best
suited for grooving and grinding tools such as taper end mills.

X
β3 β2 β1
A

Helix angle β 1 = β2 = β3

Relationship between X-axis and A-axis

A
(Rotary axis)

∆A

∆X X (Linear axis)

- 82 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

Format
Positive rotation (ω = 0)
G02. 3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
Negative rotation (ω = 1)
G03. 3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
X_ :
Specifies an end point with an absolute or incremental value.
Y_ :
Specifies an end point with an absolute or incremental value.
Z_ :
Specifies an end point with an absolute or incremental value.
I_ Specifies angle I (from ±1 to ±89 deg in units of 0.001 deg).
:
J_ Specifies angle J (from ±1 to ±89 deg in units of 0.001 deg).
:
K_ :
Specifies the amount to divide the linear axis for exponential
interpolation (span value). The specification unit depends on
the reference axis. Specify a positive value.
R_ : Specifies constant R for exponential interpolation.
F_ : Specifies the initial feedrate.
Specified in the same way as an ordinary F code. Specify a
composite feedrate including a feedrate on the rotary axis.
Q_ : Specifies the feedrate at the end point.
The same unit used for F is used. The CNC internally
performs interpolation between the initial feedrate (F) and
final feedrate (Q), depending on the travel distance on the
linear axis.

3.10 DWELL

By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by

the specified time. (Dwell per second)
By setting parameter in the feed per revolution mode, the execution of
the next block is delayed until the rotation count of the spindle reaches
the specified number. (Dwell per revolution)

Format
M
G04 X_; or G04 P_ ;
X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted)
P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted)

T
G04 X_ ; or G04 U_ ; or G04 P_ ;
X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted)
U_ :Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted)
P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted)

- 83 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.11 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION

Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour
control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian
coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a
tool) and the movement of a rotary axis (rotation of a workpiece).
This function is useful for grinding a cam shaft.

Format
G12.1; Starts polar coordinate interpolation mode
(enables polar coordinate interpolation)
Specify linear or circular interpolation using
coordinates in a Cartesian coordinate system
consisting of a linear axis and rotary axis
(hypothetical axis).
G13.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation mode is cancelled
(for not performing polar coordinate interpolation)
Specify G12.1 and G13.1 in Separate Blocks.

Explanation
- Polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1)
The axes of polar coordinate interpolation (linear axis and rotary axis)
should be specified in advance, with corresponding parameters.
Specifying G12.1 places the system in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode, and selects a plane (called the polar coordinate
interpolation plane) formed by one linear axis and a hypothetical axis
intersecting the linear axis at right angles. The linear axis is called the
first axis of the plane, and the hypothetical axis is called the second
axis of the plane. Polar coordinate interpolation is performed in this
plane.
In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, both linear interpolation
and circular interpolation can be specified by absolute or incremental
programming.
Cutter compensation can also be performed. The polar coordinate
interpolation is performed for a path obtained after cutter
compensation.
The tangential velocity in the polar coordinate interpolation plane
(Cartesian coordinate system) is specified as the feedrate, using F.

- Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (G13.1)

Specifying G13.1 cancels the polar coordinate interpolation mode.

- 84 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

Example
- Polar coordinate interpolation in a Cartesian coordinate system consisting of the
X axis (a linear axis) and a hypothetical axis

Hypothetical axis

C axis Path after cutter compensation

Program path

N204 N203

N205
N202 N201 N200
X axis
Tool
N208
N206
N207
Z axis

O001 ;
.
N0010 T0101
.
N0100 G90 G00 X60.0 C0 Z_ ; Positioning to start point
N0200 G12.1 ; Start of polar coordinate interpolation
N0201 G42 G01 X20.0F_ ;
N0202 C10.0 ;
N0203 G03 X10.0 C20.0 R10.0 ;
N0204 G01 X-20.0 ; Geometry program
N0205 C-10.0 ; (program based on cartesian
N0206 G03 X-10.0 C-20.0 I10.0 J0 ; coordinates on X axis-
N0207 G01 X20.0 ; hypothetical axis plane)
N0208 C0 ;
N0209 G40 X60.0 ;
N0210 G13.1 ; Cancellation of polar coordinate
N0300 Z_ ; interpolation
N0400 X_ C_ ;
.
N0900M30 ;

- 85 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.12 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION

In cylindrical interpolation, the amount of movement of a rotary axis
specified by angle is converted to the amount of movement on the
circumference to allow linear interpolation and circular interpolation
with another axis. Since programming is enabled with the cylinder
side face expanded, programs such as a program for grooving
cylindrical cams can be created very easily.

Format
G07.1 IP r ; Starts the cylindrical interpolation mode
(enables cylindrical interpolation).
:
G07.1 IP 0 ; The cylindrical interpolation mode is cancelled.
IP : An address for the rotary axis
r : The radius of the workpiece
Specify G07.1 IPr ; and G07.1 IP0; in separate blocks.

Example
Example of a cylindrical interpolation programs C
O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION);
N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ;
N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ;
N03 G07.1 C57299 ; Z R
N04 G90 G01 G42 Z120.0 D01 F250 ;
N05 C30.0 ;
N06 G03 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ;
N07 G01 Z70.0 ;
N08 G02 Z60.0 C70.0 R10.0 ;
N09 G01 C150.0 ;
N10 G02 Z70.0 C190.0 R75.0 ;
N11 G01 Z110.0 C230.0 ;
N12 G03 Z120.0 C270.0 R75.0 ;
N13 G01 C360.0 ;
N14 G40 Z100.0 ;
N15 G07.1 C0 ;
N16 M30 ;
Note) Sample program where the C axis is parallel to the X-axis.
Z

mm
N05 N12 N13
120
110 N06
N11
90
N07
70 N08
60 N09 N10

C
0 30 60 70 150 190 230 270 360 deg

- 86 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.13 HELICAL INTERPOLATION

Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying
up to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular
interpolation by circular commands.
A tangential velocity of an arc in a specified plane or a tangential
velocity about the linear axis can be specified as the feedrate,
depending on the setting of parameter.

- When a feedrate along an arc is specified

Therefore, the feedrate of the linear axis is as follows:

Length of linear axis

F×
Length of circular arc

Determine the feedrate so the linear axis feedrate does not exceed any
of the various limit values.

Tool path

X Y

The feedrate along the circumference of two circular

interpolated axes is the specified feedrate.

- 87 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- When a feedrate along the tool path including a linear axis is specified
Therefore, the tangential velocity of the arc is expressed as follows:
Length of arc
F×
(Length of arc)2 + (Length of linear axis)2

The velocity along the linear axis is expressed as follows:

Length of linear axis
F×
(Length of arc)2 + (Length of linear axis)2

Tool path

X Y

The feedrate along the tool path is specified.

Format
Arc of XpYp plane
G02 I_ J_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ β_) F_ ;
α_ (β
G03 R_
Arc of ZpXp plane
G02 K_ I_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ α_ (β
β _) F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc of YpZp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ β _) F_ ;
α_ (β
G03 R_
α, β : Any one axis where circular interpolation is not
applied.

- 88 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.14 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B

Helical interpolation B moves the tool in a helical manner. This
interpolation can be executed by specifying the circular interpolation
command together with up to four additional axes.
Basically, the command can be specified by adding two movement
axes to a standard helical interpolation command.
A feedrate can be specified in the same way as for normal helical
interpolation.

Format
Arc of XpYp plane
G02 I_ J_
G17
G03
Xp_ Yp_ α_ β_ γ_ δ_ F_ ;
R_
Arc of ZpXp plane
G02 K_ I_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ α_ β_ γ_ δ_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc of YpZp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ α_ β_ γ_ δ_ F_ ;
G03 R_
α, β, γ, δ : Any axis to which circular interpolation is not
applied. Up to four axes can be specified.

- 89 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.15 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION

Involute curve machining can be performed by using involute
interpolation. Cutter compensation can be performed. Involute
interpolation eliminates the need for approximating an involute curve
with minute segments or arcs, and continuous pulse distribution is
ensured even in high-speed operation of small blocks. Accordingly,
high-speed operation can be performed smoothly. Furthermore,
machining programs can be created easily and efficiently, reducing the
required length of program.

Yp Yp

Start point
Po Ps
R I
End point
Start 0 J
point Pe
I
Ps Po
J
0 R

Base circle
Pe End point Xp
Xp

Clockwise involute interpolation (G02.2)

Yp Yp

Ro End point
R Pe
Start point
End I 0
Ps
point
Pe Po
J
0 R J

I
Ps Start point
Xp Xp
Counterclockwise involute interpolation (G03.2)

- 90 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

Format
Involute interpolation on the Xp-Yp plane
G02.2
G17 Xp_ Yp_ I_ J_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2
Involute interpolation on the Zp-Xp plane
G02.2
G18 Zp_ Xp_ K_ I_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2
Involute interpolation on the Yp-Zp plane
G02.2
G19 Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2

G02.2 : Clockwise involute interpolation

G03.2 : Counterclockwise involute interpolation
G17/G18/G19 : Xp-Yp/Zp-Xp/Yp-Zp plane selection
Xp_ : X-axis or an axis parallel to the X-axis
(specified in a parameter)
Yp_ : Y-axis or an axis parallel to the Y-axis
(specified in a parameter)
Zp_ : Z-axis or an axis parallel to the Z-axis
(specified in a parameter)
I_,J_,K_ : Center of the base circle for an involute curve
viewed from the start point
R_ : Radius of basic circle
F_ : Cutting feedrate

- 91 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.16 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION

In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the
circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation
is enabled.
When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a hypothetical
axis, pulse distribution causes the speed of movement along the
remaining axis to change sinusoidally. If the major axis for threading
(the axis along which the machine travels the longest distance) is set
to a hypothetical axis, threading with a fractional lead is enabled. The
axis to be set as the hypothetical axis is specified with G07.

2π
π
O Z
π
2

Format
G07 α0 ; : Hypothetical axis setting
:
G07 α1 ; : Hypothetical axis cancel
Where, α is any one of the addresses of the controlled axes.

- 92 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.17 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION

Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation
command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired
increment (decrement) for the radius per revolution.
Conical interpolation is enabled by specifying the spiral interpolation
command together with an additional axis of movement, as well as a
desired increment (decrement) for the position along the additional
axes per spiral revolution.

- Spiral interpolation
+Y

+X

- Conical interpolation
+Z

+Y

+X

- 93 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Format
- Spiral interpolation
XpYp plane
G02
G17 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03
ZpXp plane
G02
G18 Z_ X_ K_ I_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03
YpZp plane
G02
G19 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

X, Y, Z : Coordinates of the end point

L : Number of revolutions (positive value without a
decimal point) (*1)
Q : Radius increment or decrement per spiral
revolution (*1, *2)
I, J, K : Signed distance from the start point to the center
(same as the distance specified for circular
interpolation)
F : Feedrate

(*1) Either the number of revolutions (L) or the radius

increment or decrement (Q) can be omitted. When L is
omitted, the number of revolutions is automatically
calculated from the distance between the current
position and the center, the position of the end point,
and the radius increment or decrement. When Q is
omitted, the radius increment or decrement is
automatically calculated from the distance between the
current position and the center, the position of the end
point, and the number of revolutions. If both L and Q are
specified but their values contradict, Q takes
precedence. Generally, either L or Q should be
specified. The L value must be a positive value without
a decimal point. To specify four revolutions plus 90 ,
for example, round the number of revolutions up to five
and specify L5.
(*2) The increment system for Q depends on the reference
axis.

- 94 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

- Conical interpolation
XpYp plane
G02
G17 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Z_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03
ZpXp plane
G02
G18 Z_ X_ K_ I_ Y_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03
YpZp plane
G02
G19 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ X_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

X, Y, Z : Coordinates of the end point

L : Number of revolutions (positive value without a decimal point) (*1)
Q : Radius increment or decrement per spiral revolution (*1, *2)
I, J, K : Two of the three values represent a signed vector from the start point to the
center. The remaining value is a height increment or decrement per spiral
revolution in conical interpolation. (*1)
When the XpYp plane is selected:
The I and J values represent a signed vector from the start point to the
center.
The K value represents a height increment or decrement per spiral revolution.
When the ZpXp plane is selected:
The K and I values represent a signed vector from the start point to the
center.
The J value represents a height increment or decrement per spiral revolution.
When the YpZp plane is selected:
The J and K values represent a signed vector from the start point to the
center.
The I value represents a height increment or decrement per spiral revolution.
F : Feedrate (The tangential velocity about the linear axis is specified.)

(*1) One of the height increment/decrement (I, J, K), radius increment/decrement (Q), and
the number of revolutions (L) must be specified. The other two items can be omitted.
- Sample command for the XpYp plane
K_
G02
G17 X_Y_I_J_ Q_ F_ ;
G03
L_
If both L and Q are specified, but their values contradict, Q takes precedence. If both L
and a height increment or decrement are specified, but their values contradict, the
height increment or decrement takes precedence. If both Q and a height increment or
decrement are specified, but their values contradict, Q takes precedence. The L value
must be a positive value without a decimal point. To specify four revolutions plus 90 ,
for example, round the number of revolutions up to five and specify L5.
(*2) The increment system for Q depends on the reference axis.

- 95 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.18 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION

Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the
program command.
• For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical,
such as at corners, machining is performed exactly as specified
by the program command.
• For those portions having a large radius of curvature where a
smooth figure must be created, points along the machining path
are interpolated with a smooth curve, calculated from the
polygonal lines specified with the program command (smooth
interpolation).
In this manner, high-speed, high-precision machining can be
performed.
In smooth interpolation mode, the CNC automatically determines,
according to the program command, whether an accurate figure is
required, such as at corners, or a smooth figure is required where the
radius of curvature is large. If a block specifies a travel distance or
direction which differs greatly from that in the preceding block,
smooth interpolation is not performed for that block. Linear
interpolation is performed exactly as specified by the program
command. Programming is thus very simple.

(Example) Interpolated by smooth curve

N17

N16
N15 N14 N13 N12
N11
N1
N2 N10
N3 N4 N5 N6 N7
N8 N9

Interpolated by smooth curve Linear interpolation

Linear interpolation

N17

N16
N15 N14 N13 N12
N1 N11

N2 N10
N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

N8 N9

Format
G05.1Q2X0Y0Z0 ; Starting of smooth interpolation mode
:
G05.1Q0 ; Cancellation of smooth interpolation mode

- 96 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.19 NANO SMOOTHING

When a desired sculptured surface is approximated by minute
segments, the nano smoothing function generates a smooth curve
inferred from the programmed segments and performs necessary
interpolation.
The nano smoothing function infers a curve from a programmed
figure approximated with segments within tolerance. If the spacing
between adjacent inflection points or programmed points is not
constant, this function can generate a smoother curve than the
conventional smooth interpolation function.
The interpolation of the curve reduces the segment approximation
error, and the nano-interpolation makes the cutting surface smoother.

Format
G5.1 Q3 Xp0 Yp0 Zp0 ; Nano smoothing mode on
G5.1 Q0 ; Nano smoothing mode off
Xp: X-axis or an axis parallel to the X-axis
Yp: Y-axis or an axis parallel to the Y-axis
Zp: Z-axis or an axis parallel to the Z-axis

NOTE
1 Specify G5.1 alone in a block. (Avoid specifying
any other G code in the same block.)
2 Specify position 0 for the axis programmed in the
nano smoothing mode on block. The specified axis
is subjected to nano smoothing, but no movement
is made even in the absolute programming mode.

- 97 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.20 THREADING
By feeding the tool synchronizing with the spindle rotation, threading
of the specified lead is performed. In addition to straight threads, taper
threads and scroll threads can be cut with equal leads.

L
L: Lead
L L

Straight thread Taper thread Scroll thread

Format
G33 IP_ F_ ;
F_ : Lead along the long axis
(G32 when G code system A with lathe system)

Explanation
To form a single thread, threading is generally performed several
times from rough machining to finish machining along the same path.
Threading starts in synchronism with a one-rotation signal from the
position coder attached to the spindle. So, the tool path and cutting
start point on the periphery of a workpiece remain unchanged,
regardless of the number of threading operations performed. In this
case, however, the shaft must rotate at a constant speed during
operations from rough machining to finish machining. If the spindle
speed changes, an accurate thread may not be produced.
The following shows the specifiable lead range:
Least command increment Specifiable lead range
0.01 mm 0.001 to 5000.0000 mm/rev
0.001 mm 0.00001 to 500.00000 mm/rev
Metric
0.0001 mm 0.000001 to 50.000000 mm/rev
input
0.00001 mm 0.0000001 to 5.0000000 mm/rev
0.000001 mm 0.00000001 to 0.50000000 mm/rev
0.001 inch 0.00001 to 500.00000 inch/rev
Inch 0.0001 inch 0.000001 to 50.000000 inch/rev
input 0.00001 inch 0.0000001 to 5.0000000 inch/rev
0.000001 inch 0.00000001 to 0.50000000 inch/rev

NOTE
Leads exceeding the maximum cutting feed speed
when converted to per minute feed speed cannot
be specified.
- 98 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.21 MULTIPLE THREADING

Using the Q address to specify an angle between the one-spindle-
rotation signal and the start of threading shifts the threading start angle,
making it possible to produce multiple-thread screws with ease.

L : Lead

Format
(Constant lead threading)
G32 IP _ F_ Q_ ;
IP : End point
F_ : Lead in longitudinal direction
G32 IP _ Q_ ;
Q_ : Threading start angle

Explanation
- Available threading commands
G32: Constant lead threading
G34: Variable lead threading
G76: Combined threading cycle
G92: Threading cycle

- 99 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.22 THREADING RETRACT

3.22.1 Threading Retract (Canned Cycle)

Feed hold may be applied during threading. In this case, the tool
immediately retracts with chamfering and returns to the start point on
the second axis (X-axis), then the first axis (Z-axis) on the plane.

X a xis O rdinary cycle

M otion at feed hold

Z axis Start point

R apid traverse

C utting feed

F eed hold is effected here.

The amount of chamfering during retraction is the same as that of

chamfering at the end point.

3.22.2 Threading Retract (Multiple Repetitive Cycle)

If feed hold is applied during threading in the multiple repetitive
threading cycle (G76), chamfering for threading is performed and the
tool returns to the threading cycle start point and stops.
If a cycle start operation is performed here, machining restarts with
the threading cycle to which feed hold was applied.

X -axis O rdinary cycle

M otion at feed hold
Z -axis C ycle start point

R apid traverse

C utting feed

F eed hold is applied at this point.

The amount of chamfering during retraction is the same as that of

chamfering at the end point.

- 100 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.23 CONTINUOUS THREADING

Threading blocks can be programmed successively to eliminate a
discontinuity due to a discontinuous movement in machining by
adjacent blocks.

G32 G32
G32

Fig. 3.23 (a) Image of continuous threading

- 101 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.24 VARIABLE LEAD THREADING

Specifying an increment or a decrement value for a lead per screw
revolution enables variable lead threading to be performed.

Fig. 3.24 (a) Variable lead screw

Format
G34 IP_ F_ K_ Q_ ;
IP_ : End point
F_ : Lead in longitudinal axis direction at the start point
K_ : Increment and decrement of lead per spindle revolution
Q_ : Shift amount of starting angle of thread cutting

Explanation
Address other than K are the same as in straight/taper threading with
G32.
The K value depends on the increment system of the reference axis, as
indicated in following table.
increment
system of
the Metric input (mm/rev) Inch input(inch/rev)
reference
axis
IS-A ±0.001 to ±500.000 ±0.00001 to ±50.00000
IS-B ±0.0001 to ±500.0000 ±0.000001 to ±50.000000
IS-C ±0.00001 to ±50.00000 ±0.0000001 to ±5.0000000
IS-D ±0.000001 to ±5.000000 ±0.00000001 to ±0.50000000
IS-E ±0.0000001 to ±0.5000000 ±0.000000001 to ±0.050000000

- 102 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.25 CIRCULAR THREADING

Using the G35 and G36 commands, a circular thread, having the
specified lead in the direction of the major axis, can be machined.

L : Lead

Fig. 3.25 (a) Example of circular threading

Format
A sample format for the G18 plane (Z-X plane) is indicated below.
When using the format for the G17 plane (X-Y plane), change the
addresses Z, X, K, and I to X, Y, I, and J respectively. When using
the format for the G19 plane (Y-Z plane), change the addresses Z, X,
K, and I to Y, Z, J, and K respectively.

G35 I_ K_
X(U)_ Z(W) _ F_ Q_ ;
G36 R_
G35 : Clockwise circular threading command
G36 : Counterclockwise circular threading
command

X(U), Z(W) : Specify the arc end point (in the same way
as for G02, G03).
I,K : Specify the arc center relative to the start
point, using relative coordinates (in the same
way as for G02, G03).
R : Specify the arc radius.
F : Specify the lead in the direction of the major
axis.
Q : Specify the shift of the threading start angle
(0° to 360°, with least input increment of
0.001) (The value cannot be programmed
with a decimal point.)
Note) U and W can be used only with the lathe system.

- 103 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.26 POLYGON TURNING

Polygon turning means machining a workpiece to a polygonal figure
by rotating the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio.

Tool

Workpiece

By changing conditions which are rotation ratio of workpiece and tool

and number of cutters, the workpiece can be machined to a square or
hexagon. The machining time can be reduced as compared with
polygonal figure machining using the polar coordinate interpolation.
The machined figure, however, is not exactly polygonal. Generally,
polygon turning is used for the heads of square and/or hexagon bolts
or hexagon nuts.

Format
G51.2P_ Q_ ;
P,Q : Rotation ratio of spindle and Y-axis
Specify range:
P : Integer from 1 to 999
Q : Integer from -999 to -1 or from 1 to 999
When Q is a positive value, Y-axis makes positive
rotation.
When Q is a negative value, Y-axis makes negative
rotation.
G51.2P_ Q_ ; Polygon turning cancel

NOTE
Specify G50.2 and G51.2 in a single block.

- 104 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

Explanation
A CNC controlled axis (servo axis) is assigned to the tool rotation axis.
This rotary axis of tool is called Y-axis in the following description.
As the workpiece axis (spindle), either a serial spindle or analog
spindle can be used.
The Y-axis is controlled by the G51.2 command, so that the ratio of
the rotation speeds of the spindle (previously specified by S-
command) and the tool becomes the specified ratio.
When simultaneous start is specified by G51.2, the one-rotation signal
sent from the position codes set on the spindle is detected. After one-
rotation signal detection, the Y-axis is controlled using the rotation
ratio of the spindle and Y-axis specified by P and Q. So, a position
coder needs to be attached to the spindle. This control will be
maintained until the polygon turning cancel command is executed
(G50.2).

- 105 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.27 POLYGON TURNING WITH TWO SPINDLES

When two or more serial spindles are used, the workpiece rotation
axis (master axis) and tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization
axis) are synchronized at a certain speed ratio.
With this function, it is also possible to specify the phase difference
between the master and polygon synchronization axes.
The polygonal turning with two spindles can use different spindle
speeds for the same workpiece, because it performs automatic phase
compensation when a polygon synchronization mode command is
issued or the S command is changed during polygon synchronization
mode.
With a multi-path system, polygonal turning is possible on each path.
By default, the first and second spindles in each system are selected as
the master axis and polygon synchronization axis for each system. By
setting parameters, however, any spindles belonging to the same
system or different systems can be selected as the master axis and
polygon synchronization axis.

Format
This is the same as the program command format for polygon turning
except for the following points.
1) The command position (R) can be used.
2) Repeated specification in polygon synchronization mode is
allowed.
G51.2 Pp Qq Rr ; Polygon synchronization mode start
The command above starts the polygon synchronization mode or
modifies specified values (P, Q, R) in the polygon synchronization
mode.
P : Master axis rotation ratio
Specifiable range: Integer from 1 to 999
(The rotation direction of the master axis is determined by an
ordinary command [such as M03/M04] used for spindle control.)
Q : Polygon synchronization axis rotation ratio
Specifiable range: Integer from 1 to 999 or from -1 to -999
(The rotation direction of a polygon synchronization axis is
determined by the sign of a Q command value. Depending on the
parameter, however, the rotation direction of the first axis is
followed. In this case, no negative value may be specified for Q.)
R : Specification of phase between the master axis and polygon
synchronization axis (Specify a relative value.)
Valid specifiable range: 0 ≤ phase angle < 360 deg
The increment system is the same as for the reference axis.
However, the least command increment is 360/4096 (deg), and a
specified value smaller than the least command increment is
rounded for use.
(R is omissible. If R is not specified even once after the start of the
polygon synchronization mode, phase 0 (deg) is used.)
If phase control is disabled by parameter setting, the specification
of R is ignored. No particular alarm is issued.)
G50.2 ; Polygon turning cancel
- 106 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.28 SKIP FUNCTION

3.28.1 Skip Function

Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move
following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is
input during the execution of this command, execution of the
command is interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not
programmed but specified with a signal from the machine, for
example, in grinding. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of
a workpiece.

Format
G31 IP_ ;
G31 : One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in
which it is specified)

G31 G91 X100.0 F100;

Y50.0;

Skip signal is input here 50.0

Y
100.0
Actual motion
X
Motion without skip signal

G31 G90 X200.0 F100;

X300.0 Y100.0;
Y

Skip signal is input here

100
(300,100)

Actual motion
Motion without skip signal

X
100 200 300

- 107 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.28.2 Multi-step Skip

In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function
stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4-
point or 8-point ; 8-point when a high-speed skip signal is used) is
turned on. In the block where Q1 to Q4 are specified after G04, dwell
can be skipped when skip signals (4-point or 8-point ; 8-point when a
high-speed skip signal is used) are input.
A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size
measuring instrument can be used to skip programs being executed.
In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough
machining to spark-out can be performed automatically by applying a
skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining, fine-
machining, or spark-out operation is completed.

Format
Move command
G31 P_ IP_ F_ ;
P_ : P1 to P4
IP_ : End point
F_ : Feedrate
Dwell
G04X(U,P) (Q ) ;
X(U,P)_ : Dwell time
Q_ : Q1 to Q4

Explanation
Parameters can be used to specify whether the 4-point or 8-point skip
signal is used (when a high-speed skip signal is used). Specification is
not limited to one-to-one correspondence. It is possible to specify that
one skip signal correspond to two or more G codes. The multi-skip
function can also be set to skip dwell.

3.28.3 High-speed Skip

The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal
(connected directly to the CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an
ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input.
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 to 2 msec at the NC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec
or less, thus allowing high precision measurement.

Format
G31 IP ;
G31; One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in
which it is specified)

- 108 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.28.4 Torque Limit Skip

When the movement command following G31 P99 (or G31 P98) is
executed with the servo motor torque limit overridden, cutting feed
similar to linear interpolation (G01) can be performed. When the
servo motor torque reaches the torque limit (overridden servo motor
torque limit) by pushing or the skip signal (including the high-speed
skip signal) is input during the movement, the remaining movement
commands are canceled and then the next block is executed. (The
operation that executes the next block by canceling the remaining
movement command is called skip operation later.)
The servo motor torque limit can be overridden by:
(1) Executing the torque limit override command for the PMC
window.
(2) Executing the address Q command in the same block in which
G31 P99 (or G31 P98) exists.

Format
G31 P98 Q_ α_ F_ ;
G31 P99 Q_ α_ F_ ;
G31 : Skip command (One–shot G code)
P98 : Skip operation is performed only when the servo
motor torque reaches the limit
P99 : Skip operation is performed when the servo motor
torque reaches the limit or the skip signal is input.
Q : Torque limit override value
Specifiable value range: 1 to 99 (%)
The Q command is omissible. When omitting the Q
command, specify a torque limit in the PMC window
beforehand. If a torque limit override value is not set
in advance when the R command is omitted, an
alarm is issued. An alarm is issued also when a
value beyond the specifiable value range is specified.
A specified override value is valid only in the block
that specifies the override value. At the end of skip
operation, the override value returns to the value
applied immediately before the specification of G31.
α : Address of an arbitrary axis
F : Feedrate

- 109 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.29 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

3.29.1 Automatic Reference Position Return

- Return to reference position (G28)

With the G28 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the
reference position via the commanded intermediate point. After
positioning, the reference position return end lamp lights.
The reference position must be set in parameter (with the coordinates
specified in the machine coordinate system,) before issuing the G28
command.
The tool moves to the intermediate point or reference position at the
rapid traverse rate.
For the tool path up to the intermediate point, a selection can be made
between nonlinear interpolation type positioning or linear
interpolation type positioning.

Reference position
Nonlinear interpolation type positioning

Nonlinear interpolation
type positioning

Intermediate point

Linear interpolation type positioning

Start point

By parameter setting, linear interpolation positioning can be specified

also for the tool path from the intermediate point to the reference
position.

Format
G28 IP_ ;
IP_ : Specify the intermediate position in the absolute
coordinate system.
(absolute/incremental programming)
There is no need to calculate an actual travel distance
between the intermediate position and the reference
position.

- 110 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

- Movement from reference position (G29)

Based on the G29 command, the tool is positioned along the specified
axis at the point specified by G29 through an intermediate point
specified by G28.

Automatic reference position return (G28)

R (Reference position)
A→B→R
Movement from the reference position (G29)
R→B→C

B (Intermediate
point)

C (Destination of return from

A (Start point for reference the reference position)
position return)

Format
G29 IP_ ;
IP : Specify the destination of return from the reference
position in the absolute coordinate system.
(absolute/incremental programming)
The intermediate point is determined by G28, G30, or
G30.1 specified immediately before this command.

3.29.2 Reference Position Return Check

The reference position return check (G27) is the function which
checks whether the tool has correctly returned to the reference
position as specified in the program. If the tool has correctly returned
to the reference position along a specified axis, the lamp for the axis
for indicating the completion of reference position return goes on.
If the tool has not reached the reference position, an alarm is issued.
When no movement was made along the axis, whether the current
position is the reference position is checked.

Format
G27 IP_ ;
IP : Specify positioning to the reference position in the
absolute coordinate system so as to return to the
reference position. (absolute/incremental programming)

- 111 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.29.3 Second, Third, and Fourth Reference Position Return

The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position, via the specified intermediate point. Upon completion of
positioning, the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return completion
lamp is turned on.
Before issuing the G30 command, The 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference
position must be set in parameters with coordinates in the machine
coordinate system.
For the tool path to the intermediate point and the tool path from the
intermediate point to the reference position, a selection can be made
between nonlinear interpolation position gain and linear interpolation
positioning as in the case of G28.
Return to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position can be performed
only after the reference position has been established.

Format
G30 P2 IP_ ; 2nd reference position return (P2 can be
omitted.)
G30 P3 IP_ ; 3rd reference position return
G30 P4 IP_ ; 4th reference position return
IP_ : Specify the intermediate point in the absolute
coordinate system.
(absolute/incremental programming)
There is no need to calculate an actual travel distance
between the intermediate point and the reference
position.

- 112 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.29.4 Floating Reference Position Return

Tools can be returned to the floating reference position. A floating
reference position is a position on a machine tool, and serves as a
reference position for machine tool operation. A floating reference
position need not always be fixed, but can be moved as required.

Format
G30.1 IP_ ;
IP_ : Specify the intermediate point to the floating reference
position in the absolute coordinate system.
(absolute/incremental programming)

Explanation
It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by
commanding the G30.1.
The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a
reference position for some sort of machine operation. It is not always
a fixed position and may vary in some cases. The floating reference
position can be set using the soft keys of MDI and can be memorized
even after power is turned off.
Generally, the position where the tools can be changed on machining
center or milling machine is at a set position, the tools cannot be
replaced at any just position. Normally the tool change position can be
at any of the No. 1 to No. 4 reference positions. The tool can be
moved to these positions easily by G30 command. However,
depending on the machine, the tools can be replaced at any position as
long as it does not contact the workpiece.
For machinery such as these, in order to reduce the cycle time, it is
advantageous to replace tools at a position as close as possible to the
workpiece. For this purpose, change position should be moved for
each workpiece which this feature can be easily performed. The tool
change position which is suitable for workpieces can be memorized as
the floating reference position and it is possible to return to the tool
change position by commanding the G30.1.
Floating reference position return can be used after the reference
position has been established.

Example
Y G30.1 G90 X50.0 Y40.0 ;
Intermediate Floating reference
point (50, 40) position

Workpiece

- 113 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.30 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL

M
The rotary axis (C axis) can be controlled by commanding the G41.1
or G42.1 so that the tool constantly faces the direction perpendicular
to the advancing direction during cutting.
Format
G41.1 ; Normal direction control left side on
G42.1 ; Normal direction control right side on
G40.1 ; Normal direction control cancellation mode
When the workpiece is on the right-hand side of the tool as
viewed in the tool advancing direction, normal direction
control left side (G41.1) is specified.
Once G41.1 or G42.1 is specified, normal direction control
is enabled (the normal direction control mode is set).
When G40.1 is specified, the normal direction control mode
is canceled.

Explanation
In the normal direction control, control is made so that the tool may be
perpendicular to the advancing direction on the X-Y plane.
With the angle of C axis, the +X direction is defined to be 0 degrees
viewed from the rotation center of C axis. Then, the +Y direction, –X
direction, and –Y direction are defined to be 90, 180, and 270 degrees,
respectively.
+Y

90°

180° 0° +X

Rotation
center 270°

Fig. 3.30 (a) Angle of the C axis

When shifting to the normal direction control mode from the

cancellation mode, the C axis becomes perpendicular to the advancing
direction where the G41.1 or G42.1 is at the starting point of
commanded block.
Between blocks, the traveling of C axis is automatically inserted so
that the C axis faces the normal direction at the starting point of each
block according to the change of traveling direction.
In the cutter compensation mode, the C axis is controlled to face the
normal direction relative to the tool path direction after compensation.

- 114 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

The feedrate of rotation of C axis inserted at the starting point of each

block becomes the federate set by parameters. However, when dry run
is valid, the feedrate is set to the dry run rate. Also, in the case of rapid
traverse (G00), it becomes the rapid traverse rate. In the case of
circular interpolation, the C axis is allowed to be rotated first so that
the C axis faces perpendicular to the circular starting point. At this
time, the C axis is controlled so that it constantly faces the normal
direction along with the move of circular interpolation.

NOTE
The rotation of C axis during normal direction
control is controlled at short distance so that 180
degrees or less may result.

- 115 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.31 NURBS INTERPOLATION

Many computer-aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal
dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non-uniform rational B-
spline (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal
dies. This function enables NURBS curve expression to be directly
specified to the CNC. This eliminates the need for approximating the
NURBS curve with minute line segments. This offers the following
advantages:
1. No error due to approximation of a NURBS curve by small line
segments
2. Short part program
3. No break between blocks when small blocks are executed at
high-speed
4. No need for high-speed transfer from the host computer to the
CNC
When this function is used, a computer-aided machining (CAM)
system creates a NURBS curve according to the NURBS expression
output from the CAD system, after compensating for the length of the
tool holder, tool diameter, and other tool elements. The NURBS curve
is programmed in the NC format by using these three defining
parameters: control point, weight, and knot.

CAD(Designing a metal die)

Generating a metal die surface

(NURBS surface or curve)

CAM (Creating an NC part program)

Studying the machining

method and others

Tool compensation file

NC part program after tool compensation

(NURBS curve)

NURBS curve (control point, weight, knot)

CNC equipment Machine tool

NURBS interpolation must be specified in high-precision contour

control mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The CNC executes
NURBS interpolation while smoothly accelerating or decelerating the
movement so that the acceleration on each axis will not exceed the
allowable maximum acceleration of the machine. In this way, the
CNC automatically controls the speed in order to prevent excessive
strain imposed on the machine.

- 116 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

Format
G06.2[P_ ] K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] [F_ ] ;
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
...
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
K_ ;
...
K_ ;
G01 . . .

G06.2 : Start NURBS interpolation mode

P_ : Rank of NURBS curve
XYZ : Control point
R_ : Weight
K_ : Knot
F_ : Feedrate

- 117 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.32 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

Specifying an intermediate and end point on an arc enables circular
interpolation in a 3-dimensional space.
An arc in a 3-dimensional space is uniquely defined with its start point
(current position) and a specified intermediate point and end point, as
shown below. Two command blocks are used to define this arc. The
first command block specifies the tool path between the start point and
intermediate point. The second command block specifies the tool path
between the intermediate point and end point.
X Intermediate point
(X1,Y1,Z1)

End point
Start point (X2,Y2,Z2)

Format
G02.4 XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ; First block (mid-point of the arc)
XX2 YY2 ZZ2 αα2 ββ2 ; Second block (end point of the arc)
or
G03.4 XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ; First block (mid-point of the arc)
XX2 YY2 ZZ2 αα2 ββ2 ; Second block (end point of the arc)

α, β : Arbitrary axes other than the 3-dimensional circular

interpolation axis (up to two axes)

- 118 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

3.33 BALANCE CUTTING

T
When a thin workpiece is to be machined as shown below, a precision
machining can be achieved by machining each side of the workpiece
with a tool simultaneously; this function can prevent the workpiece
from warpage that can result when only one side is machined at a time
(see the figure below). When both sides are machined at the same
time, the movement of one tool must be in phase with that of the other
tool. Otherwise, the workpiece can vibrate, resulting in poor
machining. With this function, the movement of one tool post can be
easily synchronized with that of the other tool post.

Tool post 2

Tool post 1

Fig. 3.33 (a) Example of balance cutting

Format
G68 (P_) ; Balance cutting mode on
P_: Number which specifies a balance cutting combination
(1) In the binary value specification mode, specify the
sum of the binary values corresponding to the
numbers of paths which require balance cutting.
(2) In the path number specification mode, specify the
numbers of all paths that require balance cutting in
combination.
(3) When address P is not specified, balance cutting is
performed for paths 1 and 2.
G69 ; Balance cutting mode cancel
Specifying G68, which turns balance cutting mode on, causes balance
cutting to be performed with the tool post of path 1 and that of path 2.
Alternatively, specifying address P in the same block as that
containing the G68 command causes balance cutting to be performed
between any tool posts.
One of two types of values, binary value or path number, can be set
with address P to be specified in a block including G68 for balance
cutting mode on. A selection can be made by parameter setting.
NOTE
When the "mirror image for double turrets" function is
selected, the balance cutting function cannot be used.

- 119 -
3.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

3.34 INDEX TABLE INDEXING

M
By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one
rotary axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be
indexed.
Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped
or clamped .

Fig. 3.34 (a) Example of index table

- 120 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4 FEED FUNCTION

- 121 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.1 RAPID TRAVERSE

The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse.

Format
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)
IP_ : Dimension word for the end point

In rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified feedrate
becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a certain range set by the
parameter (in-position check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter, so no rapid
traverse feedrate need be programmed.
An override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate.

4.2 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to
the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter .
Also, 1% rapid traverse override select signal allows rapid traverse
override every 1% in the range of 0 to 100%.

Rapid traverse rate Override 5m/min

10m/min 50%

- 122 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.3 FEED PER MINUTE

After specifying G94 (G98 for lathe system) (in the feed per minute
mode), the amount of feed of the tool per minute is specified by
setting a number after F. G94 (G98 for lathe system) is a modal code.
Once a G94 (G98 for lathe system) is specified, it is valid until G95
(G99 for lathe system) (feed per revolution) is specified. At power-on,
the feed per minute mode (feed per revolution mode for lathe system)
is set.
An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per
minute with the feedrate override signal.

[Machining center system] Feed amount per minute

(mm/min or inch/min)

Tool

Workpiece

Table

[Lathe system]

F Feed amount per minute

(mm/min or inch/min)

Format
M
G94 ; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_ ; Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)

T
G98 ; G code for feed per minute (Group 05)
F_ ; Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)

- 123 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.4 FEED PER REVOLUTION

After specifying G95 (G99 for lathe system) (in the feed per
revolution mode), the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution
is to be directly specified by setting a number after F. G95 (G99 for
lathe system) is a modal code. Once a G95 is specified, it is valid until
G94 (G98 for lathe system) (feed per minute) is specified.
An override of between 0 and 254% (in steps of 1%) can be applied to
feed per rotation, using the feedrate override signals.

[Machining center system]

F
Feed amount per spindle revolution
(mm/rev or inch/rev)

[Lathe system]

Feed amount per spindle revolution

(mm/rev or inch/rev)
F

Format
M
G95 ; G code for feed per revolution (Group 05)
F_ ; Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)

T
G99 ; G code for feed per revolution (Group 05)
F_ ; Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)

- 124 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.5 WITHOUT POSITION CODER FEED PER REVOLUTION

Even when no position coder is attached, a command for feed per

revolution can be enabled by parameter setting. (The CNC converts a
command for feed per revolution to a command for feed per minute.)

4.6 WITHOUT POSITION CODER CONSTANT SURFACE

SPEED CONTROL
In general, feed per revolution cannot be performed on a machine with
no position coder attached or used. By parameter setting, feed per
revolution can be enabled by spindle commands including a command
for constant surface speed control.

4.7 TANGENTIAL SPEED CONSTANT CONTROL

In cutting feed, it is controlled so that speed of the tangential direction

is always the same commanded speed.

Y Y

End point Start point

F F

End point
Start point Center
X X

For straight line For arc

- 125 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.8 CUTTING FEEDRATE CLAMP

A maximum allowable cutting feedrate common to all axes can be set
with a parameter. If the actual cutting feedrate (feedrate after an
override is applied) exceeds the maximum allowable value, the cutting
feedrate is clamped to the maximum allowable value.

M
A maximum allowable cutting feedrate can be set on an axis-by-axis
basis with a parameter. This capability, however, is applicable only to
linear interpolation and circular interpolation. The cutting feedrate is
clamped to such a maximum feedrate that the result of interpolation
does not exceed the maximum allowable feedrate on a specified axis.

- 126 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.9 AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION

To prevent a shock from occurring on the mechanical system,
acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied to the tool to enable
smooth starting and stopping when the tool starts and ends moving. In
addition, acceleration/deceleration is applied automatically when the
feedrate changes, so that the feedrate can be changed smoothly.
This means that no programming consideration is required for
acceleration/deceleration.

Rapid traverse : Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant per

axis is set by parameter)
Cutting feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant
per axis is set by parameter)
Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant
per axis is set by parameter)

Rapid traverse rate

FR : Rapid traverse
FR rate
TR : Acceleration/
deceleration
time constant
for rapid
traverse rate

0 Time

TR TR

Cutting feedrate

FC : Cutting feedrate
FC TC : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a cutting
feedrate

0 Time

TC TC

Jog feedrate FJ : Jog feedrate

TJ : Acceleration/
deceleration time
FJ constant for a jog
feedrate
FL : Deceleration stop
feedrate in jog feed

FL
0 Time
TJ TJ

- 127 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.10 RAPID TRAVERSE BELL-SHAPED

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration smoothly
increases or decreases the rapid traverse rate, reducing the stress and
strain imposed on the machine due to the variation in the acceleration
with changes in the feedrate. As the time constant for bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration can be smaller than that for linear
acceleration/deceleration, the time needed for acceleration/
deceleration can be reduced.

<Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration> <Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration>

Speed Speed

0 0
Time Time

Acceleration Acceleration

0 0
Time Time

- 128 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.11 OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION

This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with the
torque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the
machines due to its friction and gravity and performs linear type
positioning with optimum acceleration/deceleration during look-ahead
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.

Usually, because of the friction of the machine, gravity, the torque

characteristics of the motor, and other factors, the acceleration/
deceleration performance (torque for acceleration/deceleration) is
different with direction of movement, acceleration or deceleration. In
this function, acceleration pattern of rapid traverse for the following
situations, plus movement and acceleration, plus movement and
deceleration, minus movement and acceleration, minus movement and
deceleration can be set into parameters according to the torque for
acceleration/deceleration of each situation.
Acceleration/deceleration can be performed according to these
parameter setting, so that the most of the capability of the motor can
be used and positioning time can be reduced.

Speed

A c c e l e r a t io n D e c e l e r a ti o n
T im e
and and
+ m ove + m ove

A c c e l e r a t io n D e c e le ra tio n
A c c e le r a t i o n and and
- m ove - m ove

T im e

A c c / D e c p a t t e r n i s t h e s a m e w a y i n e a c h c o n d it io n .

Fig. 4.11 (a) Conventional acceleration/declaration

Speed

A c c e l e r a ti o n D e c e l e ra tio n T im e
and and
+ m ov e + m ov e

A c c e l e r a ti o n D e c e le r a ti o n
and and
A c c e le r a tio n - m ov e - m ov e

T im e

A c c / D e c p a t t e r n c a n b e c h a n g e d in e a c h c o n d it io n .

Fig. 4.11 (b) Acceleration/deceleration with this function

- 129 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.12 BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER

CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
The bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation provides smooth acceleration and deceleration to reduce
stress and strain on the machine.

Cutting feed:
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration
time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis
in parameter.
Jog feed:
Exponential or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration (constant
acceleration time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis
in parameter.

Speed Speed
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

Acceleration/
deceleration function

Time Time

T T

T : Time constant

The time constants for cutting feed and for jog feed for each axis are
specified in parameters respectively, in the same way as exponential
acceleration/deceleration. The values specified for the FL feedrate for
cutting feed and the FL feedrate for jog feed are ignored (always
assumed to be 0).

- 130 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.13 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE

CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
Linear acceleration/deceleration can be applied to the tangential
feedrate of a specified feedrate command. Thus, unlike acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation applied to each axis, this function can
eliminate machining profile errors caused by delay in acceleration/
deceleration.

4.14 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

The cutting feedrate (per minute feed (G94) and per rotation feed
(G95)) can be overrided by :
0 to 254% (in steps of 1%).
In inverse time (G93), feedrate converted to per minute feed is
overridden. Feedrate override cannot be performed to One-digit F
code feed.
Feedrate also cannot be performed to functions as threading and
tapping in which override is inhibited.

- 131 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.15 SECOND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

Cutting feedrate can be overrided by:
0 to 254% (in steps of 1%)
A second override can be performed on feedrates once overrided.
No override can be performed on functions as threading and tapping
in which override is inhibited.
This function is used for controlling feedrate in adaptive control, etc.

4.16 ONE-DIGIT F CODE FEED

M
If a one-digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the parameter-set
feedrate corresponding to the specified number is set.
When F0 is commanded, rapid traverse rate is set.
If the manual pulse generator is rotated with the one-digit F code feed
selection signal set to 1, the feedrate corresponding to the currently
selected number is increased or decreased.
A set or modified feedrate is preserved while the power is turned off.
The current feedrate is displayed on the screen.

- 132 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.17 INVERSE TIME FEED

M
Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block
and inverse time (FRN). When F0 is specified, an alarm is issued.

• Linear interpolation (G01)

FRN=1/Time (min) = Speed/Distance
Speed: mm/ min (metric input)
inch/ min (inch input)
Distance: mm (metric input)
inch (inch input)

• Circular interpolation (G02, G03)

FRN=1/Time (min) = Speed/Circle radius
Speed: mm/ min (metric input)
inch/ min (inch input)
Circle radius: mm (metric input)
inch (inch input)

4.18 JOG OVERRIDE

The jog feedrate and incremental feedrate can be overridden by:

0 to 655.34% (in steps of 0.01%)

4.19 OVERRIDE CANCEL

Feedrate override and the second feedrate override can be clamped to

100% by a signal from the machine side.

4.20 MANUAL PER REVOLUTION FEED

T
Jog feedrate can be specified by feed per revolution.

- 133 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.21 EXTERNAL DECELERATION

The control axis is externally decelerated. The feedrate is decelerated
by the external deceleration signals from the machine. The
deceleration rate is set by the parameters.
The external deceleration signal are provided for each axis and
direction.
As five types of deceleration condition settings can be dynamically
selected by the signals.
External deceleration can be applied to rapid traverse rate, cutting
feedrate, and manual handle feedrate.

- Rapid traverse and cutting feed

Five types of deceleration conditions can be set by the parameters.
When deceleration conditions specified by multiple external signals
input during machining are conflicted, the condition with the lowest
external deceleration rate is applied.
External deceleration settings 2, 3, 4 and 5 can be switched between
enabled and disabled by the parameters.

- Manual handle feed

Five types of deceleration conditions can be set by the parameters. For
handle feed, the maximum feedrate is switched when the external
deceleration signal in the positive or negative direction for the handle
axis is set to 0. When multiple conditions are conflicted, the condition
with the lowest maximum feedrate is applied.

4.22 FEED STOP

During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviation
amount at all times. When the amount exceeds the "feed stop position
deviation amount" set by the parameter, the function suspends pulse
distribution and acceleration/deceleration control during such a period
of time, and terminates the move command for the positioning control
circuit. Thus the function can minimize an overshoot that may occur
with a large servo motor in rapid traverse acceleration operation.

Specified speed
Speed Actual speed

Time
Feed stop

- 134 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.23 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER

CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION
If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is
enabled, acceleration/ deceleration is performed as follows:
Cutting feed : Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration
time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for
each axis in parameter.
Jog feed : Exponential or linear acceleration/deceleration
(constant acceleration time)
Specify the acceleration/deceleration time constant for
each axis in parameter
If an identical time constant is specified, linear acceleration/
deceleration can halve the delay relative to the programmed time, in
comparison with exponential acceleration/deceleration, thus reducing
the time needed for acceleration and deceleration.
Speed

Time
TC TC

If circular interpolation is performed, especially when high-speed

cutting is being performed, the actual tool path created after
acceleration/deceleration will deviate from the programmed arc in the
radial direction. This deviation can also be reduced, in comparison
with exponential acceleration/deceleration, by applying linear
acceleration/deceleration.
Y ∆r

Specified path
∆r : Maximum radius error (mm)
Actual path v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Radius of arc (mm)
T1 : acceleration/deceleration
r
time constant (sec) at cutting
(T=0)
T2 : Time constant of servo motor
Z (s)

The maximum value of an error in the radius direction can be

approximately obtained by the following expressions:
For exponential acceleration/deceleration:
2
1 2 1 2 V
∆r = (2T1 +2T2 ) r
For linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation:
2
1 2 1 2 V
∆r = (24T1 + T2 )
2 r
Accordingly, if the same time constant for acceleration/deceleration is
used, the value of an error that occurs with linear
acceleration/deceleration is 1/12 of the value of an error that occurs
with exponential acceleration/deceleration when an error due to the
time constant of the servo motor is not considered.

- 135 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.24 AI CONTOUR CONTROL I / AI CONTOUR CONTROL II

The AI contour control I and AI contour control II functions are
provided for high-speed, high-precision machining. This function
enables suppression of acceleration/deceleration delays and servo
delays that become larger with increases in the feedrate and reduction
of machining profile errors.
There are two types of AI contour control; these two types are referred
to temporarily as AI contour control I and AI contour control II. AI
contour control I is designed mainly for part machining, and AI
contour control II is for machining of successive minute straight lines
such as mold machining and for machining by curve commands in
NURBS and so on.
In the descriptions below that are common to AI contour control I and
AI contour control II, the term "AI contour control" is used.

Format
G05.1 Q_ ;
Q1 : AI contour control mode on
Q0 : AI contour control mode off

NOTE
1 Always specify G05.1 in an independent block.
2 The AI contour control mode is also canceled by a
reset.
3 The AI contour control mode can be turned on at
the start of automatic operation by setting
parameter.

The AI contour control mode can be controlled also with the formats
that have been used for the conventional advanced preview control,
high-precision contour control, and AI high-precision contour control
functions.

G08 P_ ;
P1 : AI contour control mode on
P0 : AI contour control mode off
G05 P_ ;
P10000 : AI contour control mode on
P0 : AI contour control mode off

- 136 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

NOTE
1 Always specify G08 and G05 in an independent
block.
2 G05 can be specified only for AI contour control II.
3 The AI contour control mode is also canceled by a
reset.
4 Valid functions are limited depending on the
command format. For details, see the description
of "Valid functions".

Valid functions
The functions listed below are valid in the AI contour control mode.
Valid functions are limited depending on the command format and
whether AI contour control I or II is used.

AI contour control II with

Function AI contour control I AI contour control II
high-speed processing
Number of blocks read 30 200 600 (*1)
ahead (When G08 is specified: 1) (When G08 is specified: 1) (When G08 is specified: 1)
Look-ahead
Linear or bell-shaped Linear or bell-shaped Linear or bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation
Speed control with feedrate
Enabled Enabled Enabled
difference on each axis
Speed control with
acceleration in circular Enabled Enabled Enabled
interpolation
Enabled Enabled Enabled
Speed control with
(When G08 is specified: (When G08 is specified: (When G08 is specified:
acceleration on each axis
Not enabled) Not enabled) Not enabled)
Enabled Enabled
Smooth speed control Not enabled (When G08 is specified: (When G08 is specified:
Not enabled) Not enabled)
Speed control with cutting
Not enabled Enabled Enabled
load
Disregard of feedrate
Not enabled Enabled Enabled
command

*1 The number of blocks can optionally be expanded to 1000 blocks.

- 137 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.25 HIGH-SPEED PROCESSING

When this optional function is added to AI contour control II, up to
600 blocks can be read in advance. This function enables high-speed
processing so that the interpolation period can be reduced for higher-
speed and higher-precision machining.

4.26 LOOK-AHEAD BLOCKS EXPANSION

When this optional function is added to AI contour control II + high-

speed processing, up to 1000 blocks can be additionally read in
advance.

4.27 BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION

BEFORE LOOK-AHEAD INTERPOLATION
By producing a bell-shaped feedrate profile for acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation in AI contour control I or AI contour
control II, machining profile errors caused by delay in acceleration/
deceleration can be eliminated, and a shock to the machine can be
reduced for smoother acceleration/deceleration.

Speed profile in linear Speed profile in bell-shaped

acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration

Speed Speed

0 0
Time Time

- 138 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 4.FEED FUNCTION

4.28 JERK CONTROL

In portions in which acceleration changes largely, such as a portion
where a programmed figure changes from a straight line to curve,
vibration or shock on the machine may occur. Speed control with
change of acceleration on each axis is a function to suppress
machining errors due to vibration and machine shock generated by
change of acceleration. This function obtains a feedrate so that
change of acceleration is within the parameter-set permissible
acceleration change amount for each axis, and performs deceleration
by using acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.

NOTE
To use this function, the options for jerk control and
AI contour control II are required.

In the following example, the Y-axis acceleration changes largely at

the contact point between a linear interpolation and circular
interpolation, so deceleration is performed.

From linear interpolation (N1) to circular interpolation (N2)

Y N1 N1
N2 N2

X
Vibration due to change
of acceleration
Feedrate Feedrate

Tangential
feedrate

Time Time

Time Time
Y-axis
acceleration

Acceleration Acceleration

- 139 -
4.FEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

4.29 RIGID TAPPING BELL-SHAPED

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
In rigid tapping, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration of constant
acceleration type can be applied by parameter setting.
In parameters, set a time required until a maximum spindle speed is
reached (linear portion) and a time required for the curved portion.
The actual time constant for the linear portion is the proportion of the
maximum spindle speed to a specified S value.
The time constant for the curved portion is determined not by an S
command but by a set value.
Accordingly, the actual time constant is [proportionally calculated
value for linear portion + value for curved portion].

min-1 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration

(constant acceleration)

<1>

msec
T2 T2

T1
Set time constants T1 and T2 in parameters.
(From the maximum speed and setting of T1, the
acceleration of linear portion <1> is constant.)

NOTE
In three-dimensional rigid tapping, bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration is disabled, and linear
acceleration/deceleration is applied.

- 140 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5 PROGRAM INPUT

- 141 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.1 PROGRAM CODE

Either EIA code or ISO code may be used as program code. Which
program code is used for an input program is automatically identified
according to the first end-of-block code (EIA: CR or ISO: LF).
For the usable program codes, see the list of program codes in
Appendix.

5.2 LABEL SKIP

In one of the following cases, the label skip function is enabled, and
"LSK" is indicated on the screen:
• When the power is turned on
• When the CNC is reset
When the label skip function is enabled, all codes are ignored until the
first end-of-block (EOB) code is read. A portion ignored is referred to
as a "leader portion", and the data after the first end-of-block (EOB)
code is regarded as "significant information".

5.3 PARITY CHECK

• Program horizontal direction parity check (TH check)

Each character of an input program is checked for parity. If a
parity error is detected, an alarm is issued.

• Program vertical direction parity check (TV check)

Each block of an input program is checked for parity. If a block
(from the code immediately after an EOB to the next EOB)
includes an odd number of characters, an alarm is issued.

The TH check function and TV check function do not operate on a

portion skipped by the label skip function. In a comment portion, no
TH check is made. However, whether to include the number of
characters of a comment portion for a TV check can be chosen by
parameter setting. The TV check function can be enabled or disabled
by setting through the MDI panel.

- 142 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.4 CONTROL-IN / CONTROL-OUT

Any information enclosed by the control-out and control-in codes is
regarded as a comment.
In a comment portion, however, the reset code (ISO code: % or EIA
code: ER) cannot be used. A portion ignored is referred to as a
"comment portion".

Name ISO code EIA code

Control-out ( 2-4-5 channel on
Control-in ) 2-4-7 channel on

5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP

If a slash followed by a number (/n) is coded at the start of a block,
and optional block skip switch n on the machine operator's panel is
turned on, the information of the block where number /n
corresponding to switch number n is specified is ignored.
If optional block skip switch n is turned off, the information of the
block where /n is specified is not ignored. This means that the block
where /n is specified can be skipped according to the choice by the
operator.
As n, 1 can be used. The number 1 of /1 can be omitted.
Example)
/1 N12345 G00 X100. Z200. ;

5.6 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP EXTENSION

As n of /n for optional block skip, a number from 2 to 9 can be used.

- 143 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.7 MAXIMUM COMMAND VALUES

The basic addresses and specifiable value ranges are indicated below.
Note, however, that the information below represents restrictions
imposed by the CNC, and is totally irrelevant to the restrictions
imposed by each machine.

Table 5.7 (a) Major addresses and ranges of command values

Function Address Input in mm Input in inch
(*1)
Program number O 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Sequence number N 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Preparatory function G 0 to 99.9 0 to 99.9
±999999.99 mm ±99999.999 inch (*3)
Increment system IS-A
±999999.99 deg. ±999999.99 deg.
±999999.999 mm ±99999.9999 inch (*3)
Increment system IS-B
±999999.999 deg. ±999999.999 deg.
Dimension X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,I ±99999.9999 mm ±9999.99999 inch (*3)
Increment system IS-C
word ,J,K,R (*2) ±99999.9999 deg. ±99999.9999 deg.
±9999.99999 mm ±999.999999 inch (*3)
Increment system IS-D
±9999.99999 deg. ±9999.99999 deg.
±999.999999 mm ±99.9999999 inch (*3)
Increment system IS-E
±999.999999 deg. ±999.999999 deg.
0.01 to 0.001 to
Increment system IS-A
999000.00mm/min 96000.000inch/min
0.001 to 0.0001 to
Increment system IS-B
999000.000mm/min 9600.0000inch/min
Feed per 0.0001 to 0.00001 to
Increment system IS-C F
minute 99999.9999mm/min 4000.00000inch/min
0.00001 to 0.000001 to
Increment system IS-D
9999.99999mm/min 400.000000inch/min
0.000001 to 0.0000001 to
Increment system IS-E
999.999999mm/min 40.0000000inch/min
Feed per revolution F 0.001 to 50000mm/rev 0.0001 to 50.0000inch/rev
Spindle speed function S (*4) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Tool function T (*4) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
M (*4) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Auxiliary function
B (*4) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Offset number (M series only) H, D 0 to 999 0 to 999
Increment system IS-A 0 to 999999.99 sec 0 to 999999.99 sec
Increment system IS-B 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec
Dwell Increment system IS-C X, U (T series only) 0 to 9999.9999 sec 0 to 9999.9999 sec
Increment system IS-D 0 to 999.99999 sec 0 to 999.99999 sec
Increment system IS-E 0 to 99.999999 sec 0 to 99.999999 sec
Dwell P 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Designation of a program number P 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
L 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Number of sub program repetitions
P 0 to 9999 0 to 9999

*1 In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can also be used as the address of a

program number.

- 144 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

*2 When address I, J, K, or R is used to specify the radius for

circular interpolation, the specifiable range is as follows:
Increment system Input in mm Input in inch
IS-A ±999999999.99 mm ±99999999.999 inch
IS-B ±999999999.999 mm ±99999999.9999 inch
IS-C ±99999999.9999 mm ±9999999.99999 inch
IS-D ±9999999.99999 mm ±999999.999999 inch
IS-E ±999999.999999 mm ±99999.9999999 inch

*3 For inch input/millimeter machines, the maximum specifiable

range of dimension words is as follows:
Maximum
Increment system
specifiable range
IS-A ±39370.078 inch
IS-B ±39370.0787 inch
IS-C ±3937.00787 inch
IS-D ±393.700787 inch
IS-E ±39.3700787 inch

*4 A maximum specifiable value for addresses M, S, T, and B is

99999999. Note that, however, values longer than the
permissible number of digits set in parameters cannot be
specified. The values and uses for some codes are limited by
parameter setting. (For example, some M codes are not buffered.)
For details, refer to the parameter manual.

- 145 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.8 PROGRAM FILE NAME

Desired file names can be given to part programs in program memory.

File names can be set as follows:
• File names are up to 32 characters long.
• The following characters can be used in file names:
Alphabetical characters (uppercase and lowercase letters),
numeric characters, and the symbols below:
−+_.
Because "." and ".." are reserved file names, they cannot be used.

Similarly, an arbitrary folder name can also be assigned to a folder

(other than the initial folders) for storing programs.

File names are associated with program numbers as explained below.

When the file name of a program consists of "O" plus a numeric with
the following limitation, the program can be handled also by program
number.
• The numeric must be a leading zero suppressed value from 1 to
99999999.
When the file name of a program does not have the above format, the
program cannot be handled by program number.
When a file name consisting of "O" plus a numeric does not satisfy the
above limitation, the file cannot be created.

Example)
File names that can be treated as program numbers
O123 Program number 123
O1 Program number 1
O3000 Program number 3000
O99999999 Program number 99999999
File names that cannot be treated as program numbers
ABC
o123
O123.4

NOTE
1 File names must each be unique in the same
folder.
2 When the file name of a program is not treated as a
program number, the program is restricted as
follows:
• The program cannot be specified by program
number.
• Information output by program number is
impossible..

- 146 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.9 SEQUENCE NUMBER

At the start of a block in a program, an 8-digit sequence number can
be specified after address N. The sequence numbers of the program
being executed are displayed on the screen at all times. The sequence
number search function can be used to search for a sequence number
in a program.

5.10 ABSOLUTE PROGRAMMING / INCREMENTAL

PROGRAMMING
There are two ways to programming travels of the each axis; the
absolute programming, and the incremental programming. In the
absolute programming, coordinate value of the end position is
programmed. The incremental programming is used to program the
amount of each axis movement.
G90 and G91 are used to command absolute or incremental
programming, respectively.

Format
G90 IP_ ; Absolute programming
G91 IP_ ; Incremental programming

T
When G code system A is used on the lathe system, an
absolute/incremental programming is not identified by a G90/G91
command but by an address word.

Absolute Incremental
Move command axis
programming programming
X axis X U
Z axis Z W
Y axis Y V
C axis C H
A axis A None
B axis B None

- 147 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.11 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET

CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. The decimal
point can basically be used for a command value with a unit such as
for distance, angle, time, or speed, and the position of the decimal
point represents mm, inch, deg, or sec.
There are two types of decimal point programming: decimal point
programming and pocket calculator type decimal point programming.
When pocket calculator type decimal point programming is used, a
value without decimal point is considered to be specified in mm, inch,
deg, or sec. When standard type decimal point programming is used,
such a value is considered to be specified in least input increments.
Select either pocket calculator type decimal point programming or
standard type decimal point programming by using the parameter.
Values can be specified both with and without decimal point in a
single program.

Pocket calculator type Standard type decimal

Program command
decimal point programming point programming
X1000 1mm
1000mm
Command value Unit : Least input
Unit :mm
without decimal point increment (0.001mm)
X1000.0
1000mm 1000mm
Command value with
Unit :mm Unit :mm
decimal point

- 148 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.12 INPUT UNIT 10 TIME MULTIPLY

By parameter setting, a least input increment 10 times greater than a
least command increment can be set as indicated in the table below.

Table 5.12 (a) Least input increments 10 times greater than least
command increments
Increment system Least input increment Least command increment
0.01 mm 0.001 mm
IS-B 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch
0.01 deg 0.001 deg
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
IS-C 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm
IS-D 0.00001 inch 0.000001 inch
0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg
0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm
IS-E 0.000001 inch 0.0000001 inch
0.00001 deg 0.000001 deg

NOTE
When the increment system is IS-A or pocket
calculator type decimal point input is used, a least
input increment 10 times greater than a least
command increment cannot be set.

- 149 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.13 DIAMETER PROGRAMMING / RADIUS PROGRAMMING

When turning is performed, the cross section of a workpiece is usually
a circle. The size of a circle may be specified by its diameter or radius.
When the diameter is specified, it is called diameter programming and
when the radius is specified, it is called radius programming.
Whether to use radius programming or diameter programming can be
chosen for each axis by parameter setting.

X axis
A
B R2
D1 D2 R1

Z axis

D1 , D2 : Diameter programming
R1 , R2 : Radius programming

5.14 DIAMETER/RADIUS DYNAMIC SWITCHING

Whether radius programming or diameter programming is used to

specify the travel distance for each axis can be uniquely determined
by using a parameter. However, there may be cases where some
coordinates or program items for an axis in diameter programming
mode should preferably be handled in radius programming mode.
This function enables the user to switch between diameter
programming and radius programming by using a signal. The user
can thus handle coordinates, program items, and other settings for an
axis in diameter programming mode as those in radius programming
mode.

- 150 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.15 PLANE SELECTION

A plane to be used for circular interpolation, plane to be used for
cutter compensation, plane to be used for coordinate system rotation,
and plane perpendicular to hole machining can be selected using G
codes.

G code Selected plane

G17 Xp-Yp plane Xp : X axis or an axis parallel to it
G18 Zp-Xp plane Yp : Y axis or an axis parallel to it
Zp : Z-axis or an axis parallel to it
G19 Yp-Zp plane

Xp, Yp, Zp are determined by the axis address appeared in the block
in which G17, G18 or G19 is commanded.
Parameter is used to specify that an optional axis be parallel to the
each axis of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes as the basic three axes.
The movement instruction is irrelevant to the plane selection.

Example
- Example 1
When X and U are axes parallel to each other, Y and V are axes
parallel to each other, and Z and W are axes parallel to each other
G17 X_ Y_ .................XY plane
G17 U_ Y_ .................UY plane
G18 X_ W_ ................WX plane
G18 U_ W_ ................WU plane

- Example 2
In a block where none of G17, G18, and G19 is specified, the plane
remains unchanged.
G18 X_ Z_ ................ZX plane
X_ Y_...........................The plane remains unchanged (ZX plane).

- Example 3
If a block specifies G17, G18, or G19 but has no axis address
specified, the omission of the addresses of three basic axes is assumed.
G17 ............................XY plane
G17 X_.......................XY plane
G17 U_.......................UY plane

- 151 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.16 ROTARY AXIS SPECIFICATION

By parameter setting, a controlled axis can be set as a rotary axis that
operates according to a command based on an angular displacement.
Two types of rotary axes are available for selection by parameter
setting as indicated below.

Rotary axis (A type) Rotary axis (B type)

(1) Inch/metric conversion is not (1) Inch/metric conversion is not
done. done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are (2) Machine coordinate values,
rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute absolute coordinate values, and
coordinate values and relative relative coordinate values are
coordinate values are rounded linear axis type. (Is not rounded
or not rounded by parameters. in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation (3) Stored pitch error compensation
is the rotary axis type. is linear axis type
(4) Automatic reference position (4) Cannot be used with the rotary
return (G28, G30) is done in the axis roll-over function and the
reference position return index table indexing function (M
direction and the move amount series).
does not exceed one rotation.

5.17 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER

The absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values on a

rotary axis are rounded to coordinates within one rotation at all times.
This function can prevent a coordinate overflow from occurring.
For an incremental command, a command value itself serves as a
travel distance.
For an absolute command, a command value is rounded to within one
rotation, and a rounded coordinate represents an end point. In this
case, whether the direction of movement follows the sign of a
command value or the shortcut direction with a shorter travel distance
is used can be selected by parameter setting.

- 152 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.18 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND

M
The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates
(radius and angle). Use G15, G16 for polar coordinates command.

Format
G16; Polar coordinate system command starts
G15; Polar coordinate system command cancel

Explanation
Plane selection of the polar coordinates is done same as plane
selection in circular interpolation, using G17, G18, G19.
Command radius in the first axis of the selected plane, and angle in
the second axis. For example, when the X-Y plane is selected,
command radius with address X, and angle with address Y. The plus
direction of the angle is counter clockwise direction of the selected
plane first axis + direction, and the minus direction the clockwise
direction.
Both radius and angle can be commanded in either absolute or
incremental programming (G90, G91).
If a radius value is specified in the absolute mode, the polar coordinate
center is the origin of the workpiece coordinate system (or the origin
of a local coordinate system if set.) If a radius value is specified in the
incremental mode, the polar coordinate center is the current position.

Example
Both hole cycle
Y
- The polar coordinate center is the origin
of the workpiece coordinate system.
- The plane is the X-Y plane.

150°

30°
270° X

100mm

N1 G17 G90 G16 ; Polar coordinate command, X-Y plane

N2 G81 X100.0 Y30.0 Z-20.0 R-5.0 F200.0 ;
100mm radius, 30° angle
N3 Y150.0 ; 100mm radius, 150° angle
N4 Y270.0 ; 100mm radius, 270° angle
N5 G15 G80 ; Polar coordinate command cancel

- 153 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.19 COORDINATE SYSTEM

By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to
the position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a
coordinate system.

Coordinates are specified in one of following three coordinate

systems:
• Machine coordinate system
• Workpiece coordinate system
• Local coordinate system

As required, specify the position that the tool must reach, by using
coordinates in a coordinate system.

5.19.1 Machine Coordinate System

The machine coordinate system is a coordinate system whose origin is
a machine-specific point used as a machine reference. A coordinate
system in which the reference position becomes the parameter-preset
coordinate value when manual reference position return is performed,
is set. With G53 command, the machine coordinate system is selected
and the axis is able to be moved in rapid traverse to the position
expressed by the machine coordinates.

Format
G53 IP_ ;

5.19.2 Workpiece Coordinate System

A coordinate system in which the zero point is set to a fixed point on
the workpiece, to make programming simple.
A workpiece coordinate system may be set by using the following
three methods:
• Using G92 (G50 when G code system A is used on the lathe
system)
A workpiece coordinate system is established using the numeric
value programmed after G92.
• Automatic setting
A workpiece coordinate system is automatically established upon
a manual reference position return, as specified in a parameter.
• Using G54 to G59
Six workpiece coordinate systems must be set from the MDI
panel in advance. The workpiece coordinate system to be used is
selected by specifying a code selected from G54 to G59.

- 154 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.19.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System

By using the following program command, a workpiece coordinate
system can be set so that the current tool position is at a specified
position.

Format
G92 IP_ ;
(G50 when G code system A is used on the lathe system)

Example
- Example 1
As shown below, place the tool tip at the start point of the program,
and specify G92 at the start of the program.
For milling machining For lathe turning
X
Z

375.1
Start
23.0 point

φ128.7
Z
X
0 25.2 Origin

G92 X25.2 Z23.0 ; G92 X128.7 Z375.1 ; (diameter programming)

- Example 2
Set the reference position on the tool holder or turret as shown in the
figure below, then specify G92 at the beginning of the program. By
specifying an absolute programming in this condition, the reference
position is moved to a specified position. To move the tool tip to a
specified position, compensate the distance between the reference
position and the tool tip by using tool length compensation.
For milling machining For lathe turning
Reference
Z position X
700.0

1200.0 Start point =

reference
position
φ1200.0

X
0 600.0
G92 X1200.0 Z700.0 ;
G92 X60.0 Z1200.0 ; (diameter programming)
Setting the start point at a given Setting the start position at a given
reference position on the tool holder reference position on the turret

- 155 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

When a new workpiece coordinate system is created by specifying

G92, it is determined so that a given point on the tool has a given
coordinate value. So, there is no need to be concerned with old
workpiece coordinate systems. Particularly when the start point for
machining is determined based on the workpiece, the G92 command
is useful. In this case, a desired coordinate system can newly be
created even if an old workpiece coordinate system is invalid.

5.19.2.2 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

When manual reference position return is performed, a workpiece
coordinate system can be set automatically so that the current tool
position at the reference position becomes a desired position which is
set using a parameter in advance. This functions as if G92IP__; were
specified at the reference position.
This function can be used when the workpiece coordinate system
function is not provided.

- 156 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.19.2.3 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System

Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set. Set the distance between
the machine zero point and the origin of each of the six workpiece
coordinate systems (workpiece origin offset value) in advance. There
are two setting methods.

• Using the MDI

• Using a program
Setting based on programmable data input (G10L2Pp)
Setting based on custom macros

With a command from G54 to G59, one of six coordinate systems can
be selected.
Workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 are established correctly when a
reference position return operation has been performed after power-up.
G54 is selected after the power is turned on.

All of the six workpiece coordinate systems can be shifted by a

specified amount (common workpiece origin offset value). An
external workpiece origin offset value can be set through the MDI
panel.

Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate system 1 coordinate system 2 coordinate system 3 coordinate system 4
(G54) (G55) (G56) (G57)

ZOFS2 ZOFS3
ZOFS4
ZOFS1
Workpiece coordinate
ZOFS5 system 5 (G58)

EXOFS

Machine zero point ZOFS6 Workpiece coordinate

system 6 (G59)
EXOFS : External workpiece origin offset value
ZOFS1 to ZOFS6 : Workpiece origin offset value

Fig. 5.19 (a) Workpiece coordinate system

Format
G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1
G55 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3
IP_ ;
G57 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5
G59 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6

- 157 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.19.3 Local Coordinate System

With G52 commanded, the local coordinate system with the
commanded position as zero point can be set. Once the local
coordinate system is set, values specified in subsequent move
commands are regarded as coordinate values on that coordinate
system. Coordinates once set is valid till a new G52 is commanded.
This is used when, for example, programming of a part of the
workpiece becomes easier if there is a zero point besides the
workpiece coordinates zero point.

IP_ (Local coordinate system)

(G54: Workpiece coordinate system 1)

G55 IP_ (Local coordinate system)

G56
G57
G58 (G59: Workpiece coordinate
system 6)

(Machine coordinate system)

Machine coordinate system zero point

Reference position

Fig. 5.19 (a) Local coordinate system

Format
G52 IP_ ; Setting the local coordinate system
G52 IP 0 ; Canceling of the local coordinate system

Explanation
When local coordinate system is set, local coordinate systems 1 to 6,
corresponding to workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 is set. Distance
between zero points are all the same preset value.

- 158 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.20 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET

The workpiece coordinate system with its zero point away by the
workpiece origin offset value from the machine coordinate system
zero point is set by returning the tool to the reference position by a
manual operation. Also, when the absolute position detector is
provided, the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set by
reading the machine coordinate value from the detector when power
on without performing manual reference position return operation.
The set workpiece coordinate system may shift by any of the
following commands or operation:

• Manual intervention performed when the manual absolute signal

is off
• Move command executed in the machine lock state
• Movement by handle interruption
• Operation using the mirror image function
• Shifting the workpiece coordinate system by setting the local
coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system

By G code specification or MDI operation, a workpiece coordinate

system shifted by an operation above can be preset to a workpiece
coordinate system offset from the machine zero point by a workpiece
origin offset as in the case of manual reference position return.

Format
G92.1 IP 0;
IP 0 : Specifies axis addresses subject to the workpiece
coordinate system preset operation. Axes that are not
specified are not subject to the preset operation.

- 159 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.21 ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PAIR

Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems based on G54 to G59
(standard workpiece coordinate systems), up to 48 or 300 additional
workpiece coordinate systems can be used optionally.
As with the workpiece coordinate system based on G54 to G59, the
following workpiece origin offset setting and modification methods
are available:
• MDI-based method
• Program-based method
Setting based on programmable data input (G10L2Pp)
Setting based on custom macros

Format
G54.1 Pn ;
n = 1 to 48 or 1 to 300 (number of the additional workpiece
coordinate system)

5.22 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT

T
When the coordinate system actually set by the G50 command or the
automatic system setting deviates from the programmed workpiece
system, the set coordinate system can be shifted.
Set the desired shift amount in the workpiece coordinate system shift
memory.

X
x X-Z : Coordinate system in programming
x-z : Current set coordinate system with shift amount 0
(coordinate system to be modified by shifting)

O’
z
Shift
Z
O

Set the shift amount from O' to O in the workpiece coordinate system shift memory.

- 160 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.23 DIRECT INPUT OF WORKPIECE ORGIN OFFSET VALUE

MEASURED
By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate
system from a programmed workpiece coordinate system, the
workpiece origin offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a
command value matches the actual measurement.

5.24 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF

Whether the travel distance of the tool manually moved is to be added
to the absolute coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system can be
selected using an input signal from the PMC.
If the manual absolute signal is turned on, the travel distance of the
tool manually moved is added to the absolute coordinates.
If the manual absolute signal is turned off, the travel distance of the
tool manually moved is ignored and is not added to the absolute
coordinates. So, by the travel distance of the tool manually moved, the
workpiece coordinate system can be shifted.

- 161 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.25 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION PROGRAMMING

T
Angles of straight lines, chamfering values, corner R values, and other
dimensional values on machining drawings can be programmed by
directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamfering and corner R
can be inserted between straight lines having an arbitrary angle.

Format
The straight line angle, chamfering value, or corner R must be
specified with a comma as follows:
,A_ : Angle
,C_ : Chamfering
,R_ : Corner R

NOTE
When A or C is not used as an axis name, the line
angle, chamfering value, or corner R can be
specified in the parameter without comma as
follows:
A_
C_
R_

- 162 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.26 G CODE SYSTEM

5.26.1 G Code for Lathe System

T
With the CNC for the lathe system, the G codes listed below are
available. Three types of G code systems are usable: A, B, and C. A G
code system can be selected by parameter setting.
In this manual, G code system B is used for the descriptions of the
preparatory functions below.

Table 5.26.1 G code list

G code system
Group Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G02.2 G02.2 G02.2 Involute interpolation CW
01
G02.3 G02.3 G02.3 Exponential interpolation CW
G02.4 G02.4 G02.4 Three-dimensional circular interpolation CW
G03.2 G03.2 G03.2 Involute interpolation CCW
G03.3 G03.3 G03.3 Exponential interpolation CCW
G03.4 G03.4 G03.4 Three-dimensional circular interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
AI contour control (high-precision contour control compatible
G05 G05 G05 00
command)
G05.1 G05.1 G05.1 AI contour control / Nano smoothing / Smooth interpolation
G06.2 G06.2 G06.2 01 NURBS interpolation
G07 G07 G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
G08 G08 G08 00 Advanced preview control
G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G113) (G113) (G113)
G15 G15 G15 Polar coordinate command cancel
24
G16 G16 G16 Polar coordinate command
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off

- 163 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Table 5.26.1 G code list

G code system
Group Function
A B C
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
G29 G29 G29 Movement from reference position
00
G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 Floating reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Threading
G34 G34 G34 Variable lead threading
G35 G35 G35 Circular threading CW
Circular threading CCW (When the parameter G36 (No.
G36 G36 G36 01
3405#3) is set to 1)
G38 G38 G38 Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : preserve vector
Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : corner circular
G39 G39 G39
interpolation
G40 G40 G40 Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : cancel
G41 G41 G41 Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : left
G42 G42 G42 Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : right
G41.2 G41.2 G41.2 07 Cutter compensation for 5-axis machining : left
Cutter compensation for 5-axis machining :
G41.3 G41.3 G41.3
(leading edge offset)
G42.2 G42.2 G42.2 Cutter compensation for 5-axis machining : right
G43 G43 G43 Tool length compensation +
G44 G44 G44 Tool length compensation -
G43.1 G43.1 G43.1 Tool length compensation in tool axis direction
G43.4 G43.4 G43.4 Tool center point control (type 1)
G43.5 G43.5 G43.5 23 Tool center point control (type 2)
G43.7 G43.7 G43.7
Tool offset (lathe system ATC type)
(G44.7) (G44.7) (G44.7)
G49 G49 G49
Tool length compensation cancel
(G49.1) (G49.1) (G49.1)
Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum
G50 G92 G92
00 spindle speed
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
- G50 G50 Scaling cancel
18
- G51 G51 Scaling
G50.1 G50.1 G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 G51.1 G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2
Polygon turning cancel
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygon turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 G53 G53 00 Machine coordinate system setting
G53.1 G53.1 G53.1 Tool axis direction control

- 164 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

Table 5.26.1 G code list

G code system
Group Function
A B C
G54 G54 G54
Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
(G54.1) (G54.1) (G54.1)
G55 G55 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 G56 G56 14 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
G57 G57 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 G58 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59 G59 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
G60 G60 G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G62 G62 G62 Automatic corner override mode
15
G63 G63 G63 Tapping mode
G64 G64 G64 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro call
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 G68 G68 04 Mirror image on for double turret or balance cutting mode
Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional coordinate
G68.1 G68.1 G68.1
17 conversion mode on
G68.2 G68.2 G68.2 Feature coordinate system selection
G69 G69 G69 04 Mirror image off for double turret or balance cutting mode cancel
Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate
G69.1 G69.1 G69.1 17
conversion mode off
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Outer/inner surface rough machining cycle
G72 G72 G74 End face rough machining cycle
G73 G73 G75 Closed loop cutting cycle
G74 G74 G76 00 End face cutting-off cycle
G75 G75 G77 Outer/inner cutting-off cycle
G76 G76 G78 Multiple repetitive threading cycle
G72.1 G72.1 G72.1 Figure copy (rotation copy)
G72.2 G72.2 G72.2 Figure copy (linear copy)
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle cancel for drilling
G81 G81 G81 Spot drilling (Series 15-T format)
G82 G82 G82 Counter boring (Series 15-T format)
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G83.1 G83.1 G83.1 High-speed peck drilling cycle (Series 15-T format)
G83.5 G83.5 G83.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G83.6 G83.6 G83.6 Peck drilling cycle
G84 G84 G84 10 Cycle for face tapping
G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (Series 15-T format)
G85 G85 G85 Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G87.5 G87.5 G87.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G87.6 G87.6 G87.6 Peck drilling cycle
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring

- 165 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Table 5.26.1 G code list

G code system
Group Function
A B C
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Threading cycle
G94 G79 G24 End face turning cycle
G91.1 G91.1 G91.1 00 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G93 G93 G93 Inverse time feed
G98 G94 G94 05 Feed per minute
G99 G95 G95 Feed per revolution
- G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
- G91 G91 Incremental programming
- G98 G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level
11
- G99 G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level

- 166 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.26.2 G Code System for Machining Center

M
With the CNC for the machining center system, the G codes listed
below are available.
Table 5.26.2 G code list
G code Group Function
G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 01 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G02.2, G03.2 Involute interpolation CW/CCW
G02.3, G03.3 Exponential interpolation CW/CCW
G02.4, G03.4 Three-dimensional coordinate conversion CW/CCW
G04 Dwell
G05 AI contour control (high-precision contour control compatible command)
00
G05.1 AI contour control / Nano smoothing / Smooth interpolation
G05.4 HRV3 on/off
G06.2 01 NURBS interpolation
G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation
G08 AI contour control (advanced preview control compatible command)
00
G09 Exact stop
G10 Programmable data input
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G15 Polar coordinates command cancel
17
G16 Polar coordinates command
G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 (G70) Input in inch
06
G21 (G71) Input in mm
G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Automatic return to reference position
G29 Movement from reference position
00
G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G30.1 Floating reference position return
G31 Skip function
G33 Threading
G34 Variable lead threading
01
G35 Circular threading CW
G36 Circular threading CCW
G37 Automatic tool length measurement
G38 00 Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : preserve vector
G39 Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : corner circular interpolation

- 167 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Table 5.26.2 G code list

G code Group Function
Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : cancel
G40
Three-dimensional cutter compensation : cancel
Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : left
G41
Three-dimensional cutter compensation : left
G41.2 07 Cutter compensation for 5-axis machining : left
G41.3 Cutter compensation for 5-axis machining : (leading edge offset)
Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : right
G42
Three-dimensional cutter compensation : right
G42.2 Cutter compensation for 5-axis machining : right
G43 Tool length compensation +
G44 Tool length compensation -
G43.1 08 Tool length compensation in tool axis direction
G43.4 Tool center point control (type 1)
G43.5 Tool center point control (type 2)
G45 Tool offset increase
G46 Tool offset decrease
00
G47 Tool offset double increase
G48 Tool offset double decrease
G49 (G49.1) 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel
11
G51 Scaling
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G50.2 Polygon turning cancel
31
G51.2 Polygon turning
G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 00 Machine coordinate system setting
G53.1 Tool axis direction control
G54 (G54.1) Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
14
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override
15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode on
G69 16 Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode off
G68.2 Feature coordinate system selection
G72.1 Figure copy (rotation copy)
00
G72.2 Figure copy (linear copy)

- 168 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

Table 5.26.2 G code list

G code Group Function
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Left-handed tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
G80 Canned cycle cancel
G81 Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 09 Tapping cycle
G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle
G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 Incremental programming
G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
G92 00 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed
G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G93 Inverse time feed
G94 05 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per revolution
G96 Constant surface speed control
13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level
10
G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level
G107 00 Cylindrical interpolation
G112 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G113 Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel

- 169 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.27 CHAMFERING AND CORNER R

T
A chamfer or corner R are can be inserted between two blocks which
intersect at a right angle as follows.

Format
- Chamfering
Plane selection 1st axis → Plane selection 2nd axis
(G17 plane : XP → YP, G18 plane : ZP → XP, G19 plane : YP → ZP)
Format
±j ;
G17 plane : G01 XP(U) J(C)±
±i ;
G18 plane : G01 ZP(W) I(C)±
±k ;
G19 plane : G01 YP(V) K(C)±
Description of symbols Tool movement
XP(U)_ Specifies movement from
Plane selection 2nd axis +
direction
YP(V)_ point a to point b with an c
ZP(W)_
)
absolute or incremental
programming in the figure a i,j,k
d 45°
on the right. b

)
45°
Start
XP is the X-axis (basic i,j,k
point
axis) or its parallel axis, c
YP is the Y-axis (basic Plane selection 2nd
axis - direction
axis) or its parallel axis,
and ZP is the Z-axis
(basic axis) or its parallel Movements are made from a to d
axis. to c.
(In the plane selection 2nd axis +
±i
I(C)± Specify the distance direction if the I, J, K, or C
between points b and c command specifies +, or in the
±j
J(C)± in the right-hand figure plane selection 2nd axis - direction
K(C)±±k with address J, J, K, or if I, J, K, or C command specifies -)
C followed by a sign.
(When bit 4 (CCR) of
parameter No. 3405 is
set to 0, use I, J, or K.
When the bit is set to1,
use C.)

- 170 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

- Chamfering
Plane selection 2nd axis → Plane selection 1st axis
(G17 plane : YP → XP, G18 plane : XP → ZP, G19 plane : ZP → YP)
Format
±i ;
G17 plane : G01 YP(V) I(C)±
G18 plane : G01 XP(U) K(C)±±k ;
G19 plane : G01 ZP(W) J(C)±±j ;
Description of symbols Tool movement

XP(U)_ Specifies movement from Movements are made from a to d to c.

point a to point b with an (In the plane selection 1st axis +
YP(V)_
absolute or incremental direction if the I, J, K, or C command
ZP(W)_ programming in the figure specifies +, or in the plane selection 1st
on the right. axis - direction if I, J, K, or C command
XP is the X-axis (basic specifies -)
axis) or its parallel axis, a Start point
YP is the Y-axis (basic
axis) or its parallel axis,
and ZP is the Z-axis
(basic axis) or its parallel
axis.
d

±i
I(C)± Specify the distance 45° 45°
between points b and c
±j
J(C)± in the right-hand figure Plane Plane
)
)
c b c
K(C)±±k with address J, J, K, or selection i,j,k i,j,k selection
1st axis - 1st axis +
C followed by a sign. direction direction
(When bit 4 (CCR) of
parameter No. 3405 is
set to 0, use I, J, or K.
When the bit is set to1,
use C.)

- 171 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Corner R
Plane selection 1st axis → Plane selection 2nd axis
(G17 plane : XP → YP, G18 plane : ZP → XP, G19 plane : YP → ZP)
Format
±r ;
G17 plane : G01 XP(U) R±
±r ;
G18 plane : G01 ZP(W) R±
±r ;
G19 plane : G01 YP(V) R±
Description of symbols Tool movement

XP(U)_ Specifies movement from Plane selection 2nd axis

point a to point b with an + direction
YP(V)_ r
absolute or incremental c
ZP(W)_ programming in the figure a
on the right. d
b
XP is the X-axis (basic Start point
axis) or its parallel axis,
r c
YP is the Y-axis (basic
axis) or its parallel axis, Plane selection 2nd axis -
direction
and ZP is the Z-axis
(basic axis) or its parallel Movements are made from a to d to c.
axis. (In the plane selection 2nd axis +
direction if the R command specifies +r,
±r
R± or in the plane selection 2nd axis -
Specify the radius of an
direction if the R command specifies -r)
arc connecting points d
and c in the right-hand
figure with address R
followed by a sign.

- 172 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

- Corner R
Plane selection 2nd axis → Plane selection 1st axis
(G17 plane : YP → XP, G18 plane : XP → ZP, G19 plane : ZP → YP)
Format
±r ;
G17 plane : G01 YP(V) R±
±r ;
G18 plane : G01 XP(U) R±
±r ;
G19 plane : G01 ZP(W) R±
Description of symbols Tool movement

XP(U)_ Specifies movement from Movements are made from a to d to c.

YP(V)_ point a to point b with an (In the plane selection 1st axis +
absolute or incremental direction if the R command specifies +r,
ZP(W)_ programming in the figure or in the plane selection 1st axis -
on the right. direction if the R command specifies -r)
XP is the X-axis (basic
axis) or its parallel axis, a Start point

YP is the Y-axis (basic

axis) or its parallel axis,
and ZP is the Z-axis
(basic axis) or its parallel
axis. d
r r

±r
R± Specify the radius of an
arc connecting points d Plane c b c Plane
and c in the right-hand selection selection
1st axis - 1st axis +
figure with address R direction direction
followed by a sign.

- 173 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.28 OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AD CORNER R

M
Chamfering and corner R blocks can be inserted automatically
between the following:
• Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
• Between linear interpolation and circular interpolation blocks
• Between circular interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
• Between circular interpolation and circular interpolation blocks

- Chamfering
When the above specification is added to the end of a block that
specifies linear interpolation (G01) or circular interpolation (G02 or
G03), a chamfering block is inserted.
,C_
After C, specify the distance from the hypothetical corner intersection
to the start and end points. The hypothetical corner point is the corner
point that would exist if chamfering were not performed.

<1> G91 G01 X100.0 ,C10.0 ;

<2> X100.0 Y100.0 ;

Inserted chamfering block

C
Hypothetical corner intersection

- Corner R
When the above specification is added to the end of a block that
specifies linear interpolation (G01) or circular interpolation (G02 or
G03), a corner R block is inserted.
,R_
After R, specify the radius for corner R.

<1> G91 G01 X100.0 ,R10.0 ;

<2> X100.0 Y100.0 ;
Center of a circle with radius R

R Inserted corner R
block

- 174 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.29 PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT

By executing programs specified in the formats after a G10 command,
various types of data as indicated in the table below can be set.

Data Format
Pitch error compensation G10 L50
Workpiece origin offset value G10 L2
Tool compensation value (M series) G10 L10/L11/L12/L13
Tool compensation value (T series) G10 L10/L11
Tool management data G10 L75
Cartridge management table G10 L76
Customize data G10 L77 P1
Name of tool life status G10 L77 P2
Data input mode cancel G11

5.29.1 Setting the Pitch Error Compensation Data

By using a programmed command, pitch error compensation data can
be set.
This function can be used, for example, to modify pitch error
compensation data at the time of attachment replacement.

Format
G10L50 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
setting
N_R_ ; Pitch error compensation data entry
N_P_R_ ; For axis type parameters
:
G11 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
cancel
N_ : Compensation position number for pitch errors
compensation +10,000
R_ : Pitch error compensation data

- 175 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.29.2 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value

By specifying a G10 command, a workpiece origin offset modification
can be made. When G10 is specified in the absolute mode (G90), a
specified workpiece origin offset becomes a new workpiece origin
offset. When G10 is specified in the incremental mode (G91), a
specified workpiece origin offset added to the currently set workpiece
origin offset becomes a new workpiece origin offset.

Format
G10 L2 Pp IP_ ;
p=0 : External workpiece origin offset value
p=1 to 6 : Workpiece origin offset value correspond to
workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6
IP_ : For an absolute command, workpiece origin offset for
each axis.
For an incremental command, value to be added to
the set workpiece origin offset for each axis (the result
of addition becomes the new workpiece origin offset).

- 176 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.29.3 Setting the Tool Compensation Offset Value

M
By specifying a G10 command, a tool compensation value
setting/modification can be made.
When G10 is specified in the absolute mode (G90), a specified value
becomes a new tool compensation value.
When G10 is specified in the incremental mode (G91), a specified
value added to the currently set tool compensation value becomes a
new tool compensation value.

Format
• For tool compensation memory A
G10 L11 P_ R_ Q_ ;
P_ : Tool compensation number
R_ : Tool compensation value
Q_ : Imaginary tool nose number

• For tool compensation memory B

G10 L_ P_ R_ Q_ ;
L_ : Type of compensation memory
L10 : Geometry compensation value
L11 : Wear compensation value
P_ : Tool compensation number
R_ : Tool compensation value
Q_ : Imaginary tool nose number

• For tool compensation memory C

G10 L_ P_ R_ Q_ ;
L_ : Type of compensation memory
L10 : Geometry compensation value
corresponding to an H code
L11 : Wear compensation value
corresponding to an H code
L12 : Geometry compensation value
corresponding to a D code
L13 : Wear compensation corresponding
to a D code
P_ : Tool compensation number
R_ : Tool compensation value
Q_ : Imaginary tool nose number

- 177 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

NOTE
1 Address R follows the increment system for tool
offset values.
2 If L is omitted for compatibility with the conventional
CNC format, or L1 is specified, the same operation
as when L11 is specified is performed.
3 Set a imaginary tool nose number when the cutter
compensation function is specified and a imaginary
tool nose direction is used. The cutter
compensation function is an optional function.

- 178 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

T
By specifying a G10 command, a tool compensation value
setting/modification can be made.
If G code system B or C is used, a specified value becomes a new tool
compensation value when G10 is specified in the absolute mode (G90).
When G10 is specified in the incremental mode (G91), a specified
value added to the currently set tool compensation value becomes a
new tool compensation value. However, address R is handled as an
absolute command, and address C is handled as an incremental
command, regardless of the setting of G90/G91.

Format
• For G code system A
G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ ;
or
G10 P_ U_ W_ C_ Q_ V_ ;
P_ : Tool compensation number
0 : Workpiece coordinate system shift command
Offset number : Tool compensation value or tool wear
compensation value command
10000 + offset number : Tool geometry compensation value
command
20000 + offset number : Second geometry tool
compensation value command
X_ : X axis compensation value (absolute value)
U_ : X axis compensation value (incremental value)
Z_ : Z axis compensation value (absolute value)
W_ : Z axis compensation value (incremental value)
R_ : Tool nose radius compensation value (absolute value)
C_ : Tool nose radius compensation value (incremental
value)
Y_ : Y axis compensation value (absolute value)
V_ : Y axis compensation value (incremental value)
Q_ : Imaginary tool nose number

• For G code system B/C

G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ ;
X_ :
X axis compensation value
Z_ :
Z axis compensation value
R_ :
Tool nose radius compensation value (absolute value)
C_ :
Tool nose radius compensation value (incremental
value)
Y_ : Y axis compensation value
Q_ : Imaginary tool nose number

- 179 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

When the Series 15 program format is valid, the following format can
be used in addition to the formats above:
G10 L_ P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ ; (G code system A/B/C)
or
G10 L_ P_ U_ W_ C_ Q_ V_ ; (G code system A)
L_ : Type of tool compensation memory
L10 : Geometry compensation value
L11 : Wear compensation value
P_ : Tool compensation number

NOTE
1 Addresses X, Z, R, Y, U, W, C, and V follow the
increment system of tool offset values.
When a second tool geometry compensation value
is specified, addresses R, C, and Q cannot be
specified.
2 Address C used for a tool nose radius
compensation value is valid only when an axis
named C is used.
3 Set a tool nose radius compensation value or
imaginary tool nose number when the cutter
compensation function or the tool nose radius
compensation function is used.
Cutter or tool nose radius compensation function is
optional function.
4 Set a Y axis compensation value when the Y-axis
offset function is used.
Y-axis offset function is optional function.
5 Set a tool geometry compensation value when the
tool geometry/wear compensation function is used.
Tool geometry/wear compensation function is
optional function.
6 Set a second geometry tool compensation value
when the second geometry tool compensation
function is used.
Second geometry tool compensation function is
optional function.
7 For compatibility with the conventional models,
addresses U, W, and V are handled as incremental
commands for X, Z, and Y axis compensation
values, respectively, when G code system B or C is
used.

- 180 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.29.4 Setting the Tool Management Data

5.29.4.1 Registering new tool management data

Tool management data can be registered. When data is output to an
external device from the tool management data screen, this format is
used.
The specification of those items that are not registered may be omitted.

Format
G10 L75 P1;
N_ ; Tool management data number specification
T_ C_ L_ I_ B_ Q_ H_ D_ S_ F_ J_ K_ ;
P0 R_ ; Customization data 0
P1 R_ ; Customization data 1
P2 R_ ; Customization data 2
P3 R_ ; Customization data 3
P4 R_ ; Customization data 4
N_ ; Tool management data number
:
G11;

N_ Tool management data No. 1 to 64 (1 to 240, 1 to 1000)

T_ Tool type No. (T) 0 to 99,999,999
C_ Tool life counter 0 to 99,999,999
L_ Maximum tool life 0 to 99,999,999
I_ Noticed life 0 to 99,999,999
B_ Tool life state 0 to 4
Q_ Tool information Bit format (8 bits)
H_ Tool length compensation No. (H) 0 to 999 (M series)
D_ Cutter compensation No. (D) 0 to 999 (M series)
S_ Spindle speed (S) 0 to 99,999
F_ Cutting feedrate (F) 0 to 99,999,999
J_ Tool geometry compensation No. (G) 0 to 999 (T series)
K_ Tool geometry compensation No. (W) 0 to 999 (T series)
P_ Customization data No. 0 to 4 (0 to 20, 0 to 40)
R_ Customization data value -99,999,999 to 99,999,999

Specify customization data in the following format:

P (customization-number) R (value)

Use the bit format only when specifying the customization data 0 (P0).
Specify other data in the binary format. The specification of
customization data that need not be set may be omitted.

- 181 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.29.4.2 Modifying tool management data

Tool management data can be modified.
The specification of those items that are not modified may be omitted.

Format
G10 L75 P2 ;
N_ ;
T_ C_ L_ I_ B_ Q_ H_ D_ S_ F_ J_ K_ ;
P_ R_ ;
N_ ;
:
G11 ;

5.29.4.3 Deleting tool management data

The data of a specified data number can be deleted from tool
management data.
The cartridge management table data corresponding to a deleted tool
management data number is also deleted. (The tool management data
number in the cartridge management table is cleared to 0.)

Format
G10 L75 P3 ;
N_ ;
N_ ;
:
N_ ;
G11 ;

- 182 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.29.4.4 Registering new cartridge management table data

A tool management data number can be registered with a free pot in
the cartridge management table.

Format
G10 L76 P1 ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
G11 ;

For a spindle position table and standby position table, only cartridge
number data is specified.

5.29.4.5 Modifying the cartridge management table

Tool management data numbers in the cartridge management table
can be modified.

Format
G10 L76 P2 ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number R tool-management-data-number ;
G11 ;

For a spindle position table and standby position table, only cartridge
number data is specified.

- 183 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.29.4.6 Deleting cartridge management table data

Tool management data numbers can be deleted from the cartridge
management table.

Format
G10 L76 P3 ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number ;
N cartridge-number P pot-number ;
G11 ;

For a spindle position table and standby position table, only cartridge
number data is specified.

5.29.4.7 Naming customization data

The display name of customization data (0 to 40) can be set.

Format
G10 L77 P1 ;
N_ ;
P_ R_ ;
P_ R_ ;
;
N_ ;
P_ R_ ;
P_ R_ ;
G11 ;

N_: Customization data No. (0 to 40)

P_: Character No. (1 to 16)
R_: Character code (ANK or shifted JIS)
- When a shifted JIS code is used, an area for
two characters is used.
- Specify 0 to clear data.

• A set display name can be checked on the tool management data

screen only.
• When no name is registered, a name such as the default
"Customize 3" is displayed.
• A name consisting of up to 16 characters is displayed. For a
name shorter than 16 characters, register 0 in the empty area.
Those characters that are registered immediately before 0 are
displayed.
• To clear data, set 0 as a character code.
• No character code data check is made.

- 184 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.29.4.8 Naming tool life states

The display name of a tool life state (0 to 4) can be set.

Format
G10 L77 P2 ;
N_ ;
P_ R_ ;
P_ R_ ;
N_ ;
P_ R_ ;
P_ R_ ;
G11 ;

N_: Tool life state (0 to 4)

P_: Character No. (1 to 12)
R_: Character code (ANK or shifted JIS)
- When a shifted JIS code is used, an area for
two characters is used.
- Specify 0 to clear data.

• A set display name can be checked on the tool management data

screen only.
• If no name is registered, a default such as "Remaining" and
"Unremaining" is displayed.
• A name consisting of up to 12 characters is displayed. For a
name shorter than 12 characters, register 0 in the empty area.
Those characters that are registered immediately before 0 are
displayed.
• To clear data, set 0 as a character code.
• No character code data check is made.
• The defaults are as follows:
- 0: Invalid
- 1: Remaining
- 2: Remaining
- 3: Unremaining
- 4: Broken

- 185 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.30 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT

By programming, the values of parameters can be set.
This function can be used for applications such as modification to a
maximum cutting feedrate or cutting time constant due to a machining
condition change.
This function is used for the maximum cutting feedrate or cutting time
constants are changed to meet changing machining conditions.

Format
G10L52 ; Parameter entry mode setting
N_R_ ; For parameters other than the axis type
N_P_R_ ; For axis type parameters
:
G11 ; Parameter entry mode cancel
N_ : Parameter number
R_ : Parameter setting value (Leading zeros can be
omitted.)
P_ : Axis number 1 to maximum controlled axis number (to
be specified when an axis type parameter or spindle
type parameter is specified)

NOTE
Some parameters cannot be set, when this
command is used.

- 186 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.31 SUB PROGRAM CALL

If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern,
such a sequence or pattern can be stored as a sub program in memory
to simplify the program. M98 is used to call a sub program, and M99
is used to return from a sub program. Up to ten levels of sub
programs can be nested.
Main program Sub program Sub program Sub program Sub program
O0001 ; O0010 ; O0020 ; O0090 ; O0100 ;

M98P0010 ; M98P0020 ; M98P0030 ; . . . . . . M98P0100 ;

M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;

(One-level nesting) (Two-level nesting) (Nine-level nesting) (Ten-level nesting)

Format
- Sub program configuration
One sub program

Oxxxx ; Sub program number or sub program file

: name (or the colon (:) optionally in the
: case of ISO)
M99; Program end

M99 need not constitute a separate block as indicated

below.

Example) X100.0Y100.0M99;

- 187 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Sub program call

- When a sub program with a 4-digit or shorter program
number is called
M98 Pxxxx xxxx ;

Sub program number

Number of times the sub program is called repeatedly

- When a sub program with a 5-digit or longer program

number is called
M98 Pxxxxxxxx Lxxxxxxxx ;

Sub program number

Number of times the sub program is called repeatedly

- When a sub program is called by file name

M98 <xxxx> Lxxxxxxxx ;

Sub program file name

Number of times the sub program is called repeatedly

NOTE
1 When a sub program with a sub program number shorter
than 4 digits is called, the length of the sub program number
must be adjusted to 4 digits by adding 0(s) to the beginning
of the program number.
Example)
P100100: Call sub program No. 100 ten times.
P50001: Call sub program No. 1 five times.
2 If the number of times the sub program is called repeatedly
is omitted when a sub program with a 4-digit or shorter
program number is called, the sub program is called just
once.
In this case, it is not necessary to adjust the sub program
number length to 4 digits as described in Item 1 above.
3 When calling a sub program with a 4-digit or shorter program
number, do not specify address L in the same block.
4 When calling a sub program with a 5-digit or longer program
number, do not omit the specification of the number of
repeats.
5 When calling a sub program by file name, be sure to specify
the file name immediately after M98.

- Return from a sub program

M99 ;
M99 need not be specified in a block that specifies no other
commands.

- 188 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.32 CUSTOM MACRO

A function covering a group of instructions is stored in the memory
like the sub program. The stored function is represented by one
instruction and is executed by simply writing the represented
instruction. The group of instructions registered is called the custom
macro body, and the representative instruction, the custom macro
instruction.

Ordinary program
Custom macro body

A group of
Custom macro instruction instructions for a
certain function

The programmer need not remember all the instructions in the custom
macro body. He needs only to remember the representative, custom
macro instruction.
The greatest feature in custom macro is that variables can be used in
the custom macro body. Operation between the variables can be done,
and actual values can be set in the variables by custom macro
instructions.

Custom macro body

O9011 ;

G65 P9011 A10 I5

X#1 Z#4 ;

Variables, #1, #4
Call custom macro body can be used
instead of unknown
9011, and set variables move amount.
#1=10, #4=5.

- 189 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Example

r b
a

Bolt hole circle as shown above can be programmed easily. Program a

custom macro body of a bolt hole circle; once the custom macro body
is stored, operation can be performed as if the CNC itself has a bolt
hole circle function. The programmer need only to remember the
following command, and the bolt hole circle can be called any time.

- Format
G65 Pp Rr Aa Bb Kk ;
p : Macro number of the bolt hole circle
r : Radius
a : Initial angle
b : Angle between holes
k : Number of holes

With this function, the CNC can be graded up by the user himself.
Custom macro bodies may be offered to the users by the machine tool
builder, but the users still can make custom macro himself.
The following functions can be used for programming the custom
macro body.

Explanation
- Use of Variable
Variables : #i (i=1, 2, 3, . . . )
Quotation of variables : F#33 (#33: speed expressed by variables)

Various operation can be done between variables and constants.

The following operands, and functions can be used:
+ (sum), - (difference), * (product), / (quotient), OR (logical sum),
XOR (exclusive logical sum), AND (logical product), SIN (sine),
ASIN (arc sine), COS (cosine), ACOS (arc cosine), TAN (tangent),
ATAN (arc tangent), SQRT (square roots), ABS (absolute value), BIN
(conversion from BCD to binary), BCD (conversion from binary to
BCD), FIX (truncation below decimal point), FUP (raise fractions
below decimal point), ROUND (round), LN (natural logarithm), EXP
(exponential function), POW (power), ADP (decimal point addition)
Example) #5=SIN [[#2+#4]*3.14+#4]*ABS[#10]

- 190 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

- Control command
Program flow in the custom macro body is controlled by the following
command.

• If [<conditional expression>] GOTO n (n = sequence

number)
When <conditional expression> is satisfied, the next execution is
done from block with sequence number n.
When <conditional expression> is not satisfied, the next block is
executed.
When the [<IF conditional expression>] is committed, it executes
from block with n unconditionally.
The following <conditional expressions> are available:
#j EQ #k whether #j = #k
#j NE #k whether #j ≠ #k
#j GT #k whether #j > #k
#j LT #k whether #j < #k
#j GE #k whether #j ≥ #k
#j LE #k whether #j ≤ #k

• IF [<conditional expression>] THEN macro statement

If the specified conditional expression is satisfied, a
predetermined macro statement is executed. Only a single macro
statement is executed.

• WHILE (<conditional expression>) DO m (m = 1, 2, 3)

:
END m
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks from DO m
to END m is repeated.
When <conditional expression> is no more satisfied, it is
executed from the block next to END m block.
Example)
#120=1
WHILE [#120 LE 10] DO 1 ;

Repeated 10 times.
#120=#120+1 ;

END

- 191 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Format of custom macro body

The format is the same as the sub program.
O Macro number ;

Custom macro body

M99

- Custom macro instruction

• Simple call
G65 P (macro number) L (times to repeat) <argument
assignment> ;
A value is set to a variable by <argument assignment>.
Write the actual value after the address.
Example)
A5.0 E3.2 M13.4
There is a regulation on which address (A - Z) corresponds
to which variable number.

• Modal call (calling a move command)

G66 P (macro number) L (times to repeat) <argument
assignment> ;
Each time a move command is executed, the specified custom
macro body is called. This can be canceled by G67.
This function is useful when drilling cycles are programmed as
custom macro bodies.

• Modal call (calling each block)

G66.1 P (macro number) L (times to repeat) <argument
assignment> ;
This type of call unconditionally calls a custom macro body
specified in each command block of an NC command. This state
is canceled by G67.

• Macro call using G code

The macro can also be called by the parameter-set G codes.
Instead of commanding:
N_ G65 Pxxxx <argument assignment> ;
macro can be called just by commanding:
N_ Gyy <argument assignment> ;
G code (Gyy) for calling the macro, and macro program number
(Pxxxx) to be called, are coupled together and set as parameter.

- 192 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

• Macro call using M code

Custom macros can be called by pre-determined M codes which
are set by parameters.
The following command
N_ G65 Pxxxx <Argument assignment> ;
is equivalent to the following command:
N_ Myy <Argument assignment> ;
The correspondence between M codes (Myy) and program
number (Pxxxx) of a macro shall be set by a parameter.
M codes are not sent out the same as the sub program call using
M code.

• Sub program call using M code

An M code can be set by parameter to call a sub program.
Instead of commanding:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ 0 M98 Pxxxx ; ,
the same operation can be performed simply by commanding:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ 0 Myy ;.
As for M98, M codes are not transmitted.
The M code (Myy) for calling the sub program and the sub
program number (Pxxxx) to be called are coupled together and
set by parameter.

• Sub program call using T code

By setting parameter, sub program can be called by T codes.
When commanded:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . Tt ;
the same operation is done as when commanded:
#149=t ;
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . M98 P9000 ;
The T code t is stored as arguments of common variable #149.

• Sub program call using S code

By setting parameter, sub program can be called by S codes.
When commanded:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . Ss ;
the same operation is done as when commanded:
#147=s ;
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . M98 P9029 ;
The S code s is stored as arguments of common variable #147.

• Sub program call using second auxiliary function code

By setting parameter, sub program can be called by second
auxiliary function codes (B). When commanded:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . Bb ;
the same operation is done as when commanded:
#146=b ;
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . M98 P9028 ;
The B code b is stored as arguments of common variable #146.

- 193 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

• Sub program call using specific address

By setting parameter, sub program can be called by specific
addresses (A). When commanded:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . Ab ;
the same operation is done as when commanded:
#146=b ;
N_ G_ X_ Y_ . . . M98 P9004 ;
The A address b is stored as arguments of common variable #146.
However, a restriction is imposed on the codes that can be set in
specific addresses.

- Types of variables
Variables are divided into local variables, common variables, and
system variables, according to their variable numbers. Each type has
different use and nature.

• Local variables #1 to #33

Local variables are variables used locally in the macro.
Accordingly, in case of multiples calls (calling macro B from
macro A), the local variable used in macro A is never destroyed
by being used in macro B.

• Common variables #100 - #149, #500 - #549

Compared with local variables used locally in a macro, common
variables are common throughout the main program, each sub
program called from the main program, and each macro. The
common variable #1 used in a certain macro is the same as the
common variable #i used in other macros. Therefore, a common
variable #1 calculated in a macro can be used in any other
macros.
Common variables basically have the read/write attribute. By
parameter setting, however, the common variable with a
specified variable number can be protected (to make the common
variable read-only). The system does not define common
variable applications. Instead, the user can freely use common
variables.
Common variables #100 to #149 are cleared when the power is
turned off. The values of common variables #500 to #549 are
preserved even when the power is turned off.

NOTE
With the option for custom macro common variable
addition, the common variables can be extended to
#100 to #199 and #500 to #999.
In this case, common variables #100 to #199 are
cleared when the power is turned off. The values
of common variables #500 to #999 are preserved
even when the power is turned off.

- 194 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

• System variables
A variable with a certain variable number has a certain value. If
the variable number is changed, the certain value is also changed.
The certain value are the following:
- 128 DI points (for read only)
- 128 DO points (for output only)
- Tool compensation value, workpiece origin offset value,
and workpiece coordinate system value
- Position information (current position, skip position, block
end position, etc.)
- Modal information (F code, G code for each group, etc.)
- Alarm message (Set alarm number and alarm message, and
the CNC is set in an alarm status. The alarm number and
message is displayed.)
- A date (year, month, day) and time (hour, minute, second)
are indicated.
- Clock (Time can be known. A time can also be preset.)
- Single block stop, auxiliary function end wait hold
- Feed hold, Feedrate override, Exact stop inhibition
- The number of machining parts is indicated. It can be preset.

- External output commands

Value of variables or characters can be output to external devices via
the reader/puncher interface with custom macro command. Results in
measurement is output using custom macro.

- Limitation
• Usable variables
See "Types of variables".
• Usable variable values
Maximum : ±10308
Minimum : ±10-308
• Constants usable in <expression>
Maximum : ±999999999999
Minimum : ±0.00000000001
Decimal point allowed
• Arithmetic precision
15-digit decimal number
• Macro call nesting
Maximum 5 folds.
• Repeated ID numbers
1 to 3
• [ ] nesting
Maximum 5 folds.
• Sub program call nesting
15 folds (including macro call nesting)

- 195 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.33 ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES

Optionally, 600 common variables consisting of #100 to #199 and
#500 to #999 can be used. Common variables #100 to #199 are
cleared when the power is turned off. The values of common
variables #500 to #999 are preserved even when the power is turned
off.

5.34 CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES BETWEEN

EACH PATH
In a multi-path system, some custom macro common variables or all
custom macro common variables can be made common to all paths by
parameter setting.

Example)
When macro variable numbers 100 to 119 are made common to
path 1 and path 2

Macro variables Macro variables

for path 1 for path 2
Macro variable number 100

Common area 50 macro 50 macro

variables variables

Macro variable number 119

- 196 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO

When a program is being executed, another program can be called by
inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine.
This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro
function.

Format
M96 Pxxxxxxxx ; Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt

Explanation
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to
call a program during execution of an arbitrary block of another
program. This allows programs to be operated to match situations
which vary from time to time.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the
abnormality is started by an external signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another
machining operation without the cancellation of the current
operation.
(3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read.
Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of
the interruption type custom macro function.
Example)
When M96 Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program
operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input
to execute the program specified by Pxxxx in following figure.
When the interrupt signal (UINT, marked with an asterisk (*) in
figure) is input during execution of the interrupt program or after
M97, it is ignored.

M96 Pxxxxxxxx;

Interrupt signal
(UINT) * O xxxxxxxx;

Interrupt signal
(UINT) **

M99 (Pxxxxxxxx) ;
Nxxxxxxxx ;

M97 ; Interrupt signal

(UINT) *

- 197 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.36 CANNED CYCLE

T
There are three canned cycles : the outer diameter/internal diameter
cutting canned cycle (G90), the threading canned cycle (G92), and the
end face turning canned cycle (G94).

5.36.1 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Cutting Cycle

Format
- Straight cutting cycle
X axis
(R)....Rapid traverse
Z (F) ....Cutting feed
W
4(R)
A
3(F) 2(F) 1(R) U/2
A’
X/2
Z axis

G77 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ; (G90 with G code system A)

X_,Z_ : Coordinates of the cutting end point (point A' in the
above figure) in the direction of the length
U_,W_ : Travel distance to the cutting end point (point A' in
the above figure) in the direction of the length
F_ : Cutting feedrate

- 198 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

- Taper cutting cycle

X a xis
(R ) ....R a pid travers e
4 (R ) (F ) ....C u tting fe ed
A
3 (F )
U /2 1 (R )
A’
2(F)
R
X /2 W
Z
Z axis

G77 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ; (G90 with G code system A)

X_,Z_ : Coordinates of the cutting end point (point A' in the
above figure) in the direction of the length
U_,W_ : Travel distance to the cutting end point (point A' in
the above figure) in the direction of the length
R_ : Taper amount (R in the above figure)
F_ : Cutting feedrate

- 199 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.36.2 Threading Cycle

Format
- Straight threading cycle
X axis
Z W

3(R) 4(R) A
2(F) 1(R) U/2
A’
X/2
Z axis
(R) ... Rapid traverse
(F).... Cutting feed

Approx.
(The chamfered angle in the left figure is 45
45°
degrees or less because of the delay in the
r servo system.)

Detailed chamfered thread

G78 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ Q_ ; (G90 with G code system A)

X_,Z_ : Coordinates of the cutting end point (point A' in the
above figure) in the direction of the length
U_,W_ : Travel distance to the cutting end point (point A' in
the above figure) in the direction of the length
Q_ : Angle for shifting the threading start angle
(Increment: 0.001 degrees,
Valid setting range: 0 to 360 degrees)
F_ : Thread lead (L in the above figure)

- 200 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

- Taper threading cycle

X axis

Z W

A
4(R)
U/2 (R) ....Rapid traverse
3(R) 1(R) (F) ....Cutting feed
A’

2(F)
R
X/2

Z axis

(The chamfered angle in the left figure

is 45 degrees or less because of the
Approx. 45°
delay in the servo system.)

Detailed chamfered thread

G78 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ Q_ ; (G90 with G code system A)

X_,Z_ : Coordinates of the cutting end point (point A' in the
above figure) in the direction of the length
U_,W_ : Travel distance to the cutting end point (point A' in the
above figure) in the direction of the length
Q_ : Angle for shifting the threading start angle
(Increment: 0.001 degrees,
Valid setting range: 0 to 360 degrees)
R_ : Taper amount (R in the above figure)
F_ : Thread lead (L in the above figure)

- 201 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.36.3 End Face Turning Cycle

Format
- Face cutting cycle
X a xis

1 (R ) (R ) .... R a p id tra ve rs e
A (F ) .... C u ttin g fe e d

2 (F ) 4 (R )
U /2

A’ 3 (F )

X /2 W
Z axis

G79 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ; (G90 with G code system A)

X_,Z_ : Coordinates of the cutting end point (point A' in the
above figure) in the direction of the end face
U_,W_ : Travel distance to the cutting end point (point A' in
the above figure) in the direction of the end face
F_ : Cutting feedrate

- 202 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

- Taper cutting cycle

X axis

1(R)
A
(R) ... Rapid traverse
2(F) 4(R) (F) ... Cutting feed
U/2

A’ 3(F)

X/2 R W
Z axis
Z

G79 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ; (G90 with G code system A)

X_,Z_ : Coordinates of the cutting end point (point A' in the
above figure) in the direction of the end face
U_,W_ : Travel distance to the cutting end point (point A' in
the above figure) in the direction of the end face
R_ : Taper amount (R in the above figure)
F_ : Cutting feedrate

- 203 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.37 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE

T
This function is canned cycles to make CNC programming easy. For
instance, the data of the target figure (finishing shape). describes the
tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the
threading is available.

5.37.1 Stock Removal in Turning

There are two types of stock removals in turning : Type I and II.

Format
ZpXp plane
G71 U(∆ ∆d) R(e) ;
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆ ∆u) W(∆ ∆w) F(f ) S(s ) T(t ) ;
N (ns) ;
The move command between A and B is specified in the
... blocks from sequence number ns to nf.
N (nf) ;

∆d : Depth of cut
The cutting direction depends on the direction AA'.
e : Escaping amount
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of
target figure (finishing shape)
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of
target figure (finishing shape)
∆u : Distance of the finishing allowance in the direction of
the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
∆w : Distance of the finishing allowance in the direction of
the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane)
f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in
the cycle is ignored, and the F, S, or T function in this
G71 block is effective.

- 204 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

Explanation
- Type I
(R) C
B
A
(R) ∆d
(F)
45° e
(F)

Target figure

∆u/2
A’
+X

(F): Cutting feed ∆W

e: Escaping amount
+Z (R): Rapid traverse

- Type II
(R)
(F) C
(R) A
B ∆d
(R)

(F)
∆d
(F)

Target figure ∆u/2

A’
+X

(F): Cutting feed ∆W

+Z (R): Rapid traverse

When the target figure of A → A’ → B is programmed, cutting is

performed with a depth of cut of ∆d per cut, leaving the finishing
allowances ∆u/2 and ∆w. After the last cut is performed in the plane
second axis direction (X-axis direction in the case of the ZX plane),
rough finishing is performed along the target figure. Upon completion
of rough finishing, the block that follows the sequence block specified
by Q is executed.

- 205 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Selection of type I or II
When the target figure has pockets, be sure to use type II.

A’

Z No pockets are allowed.

Escaping operation after rough cutting in the direction of the first axis
on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane) differs between types I and II.
With type I, the tool escapes to the direction of 45 degrees. With type
II, the tool cuts the workpiece along the target figure. When the target
figure has no pockets, determine the desired escaping operation and
select type I or II.

- Selecting type I or II
In the start block for the target figure (sequence number ns), select
type I or II.
(1) When type I is selected
Specify the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane).
Do not specify the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX
plane).
(2) When type II is selected
Specify the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
and first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane).
When you want to use type II without moving the tool along the
first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane), specify the
incremental programming with travel distance 0 (W0 for the ZX
plane).
Example)
Type I Type II
G71 10.0 R5.0 ; G71 10.0 R5.0 ;
G71 P100 Q200....; G71 P100 Q200....;
N100 X(U)_ ; N100 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
: :
: :
N200..............; N200..............;

- 206 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.37.2 Stock Removal in Facing

This cycle is the same as G71 except that cutting is performed by an
operation parallel to the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX
plane).

Format
ZpXp plane
G72 W(∆ ∆d) R(e) ;
G72 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆ ∆u) W(∆ ∆w) F(f ) S(s ) T(t ) ;
N (ns) ;
The move command between A and B is specified in the
...
blocks from sequence number ns to nf.
N (nf) ;

∆d : Depth of cut
The cutting direction depends on the direction AA'.
e : Escaping amount
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of
target figure (finishing shape)
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of
target figure (finishing shape)
∆u : Distance of the finishing allowance in the direction of the
second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
∆w : Distance of the finishing allowance in the direction of the
first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane)
f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks ns to nf in
the cycle is ignored, and the F, S, or T function in this
G72 block is effective.

Explanation
∆d
(F): Cutting feed
C (R): Rapid traverse
A'
A
Tool path
(F)

e (R)

(R) 45°

Target figure

(F)
+X ∆u/2
B
+Z ∆w

- 207 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

When a target figure passing through A, A', and B in this order is

given by a program, the specified area is removed by ∆d (depth of cut),
with the finishing allowance specified by ∆u/2 and ∆w left.

- Selection of type I or II
For G72, there are types I and II.
When the target figure has pockets, be sure to use type II.
Escaping operation after rough cutting in the direction of the second
axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane) differs between types I and
II. With type I, the tool escapes to the direction of 45 degrees. With
type II, the tool cuts the workpiece along the target figure. When the
target figure has no pockets, determine the desired escaping operation
and select type I or II.

- Selecting type I or II
In the start block for the target figure (sequence number ns), select
type I or II.
(1) When type I is selected
Specify the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane). Do
not specify the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX
plane).
(2) When type II is selected
Specify the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
and first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane).
When you want to use type II without moving the tool along the
second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane), specify the
incremental programming with travel distance 0 (U0 for the ZX
plane).
Example)
Type I Type II
G72 10.0 R5.0 ; G72 10.0 R5.0 ;
G72 P100 Q200....; G72 P100 Q200....;
N100 Z(W)_ ; N100 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
:
:
N200..............; N200..............;

- Differences from G71 (Type I)

G72 differs from G71 in the following points:
(1) G72 cuts the workpiece with moving the tool in parallel with the
second axis on the plane (X-axis on the ZX plane).
(2) In the start block in the program for a target figure (block with
sequence number ns), only the first axis on the plane (Z-axis (W-
axis) for the ZX plane) must be specified.

- 208 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

- Differences from G71 (Type II)

G72 differs from G71 in the following points:
(1) G72 cuts the workpiece with moving the tool in parallel with the
second axis on the plane (X-axis on the ZX plane).
(2) The figure need not show monotone increase or decrease in the
direction of the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane)
and it may have concaves (pockets). The figure must show
monotone change in the direction of the second axis on the plane
(X-axis for the ZX plane), however.
(3) When a position parallel to the second axis on the plane (X-axis
for the ZX plane) is specified in a block in the program for the
target figure, it is assumed to be at the bottom of a pocket.
(4) After all rough cutting terminates along the second axis on the
plane (X-axis for the ZX plane), the tool temporarily returns to
the start point. Then, rough cutting as finishing is performed.

- 209 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.37.3 Pattern Repeating

This function permits cutting a fixed pattern repeatedly, with a pattern
being displaced bit by bit. By this cutting cycle, it is possible to
efficiently cut working whose rough shape has already been made by
a rough machining, forging or casting method, etc.

Format
ZpXp plane
G73 W(∆ ∆k) U(∆
∆i) R(d) ;
G73 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆ ∆u) W(∆ ∆w) F(f ) S(s ) T(t ) ;
N (ns) ;
The move command between A and B is specified in the
...
blocks from sequence number ns to nf.
N (nf) ;

∆i : Distance of escape in the direction of the second axis

on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
∆k : Distance of escape in the direction of the first axis on
the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane)
d : The number of division (This value is the same as the
repetitive count for rough cutting.)
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the program of
target figure (finishing shape)
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the program of
target figure (finishing shape)
∆u : Distance of the finishing allowance in the direction of
the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
∆w : Distance of the finishing allowance in the direction of
the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane)
f, s, t : Any F, S, and T function contained in the blocks
between sequence number "ns" and "nf" are ignored,
and the F, S, and T functions in this G73 block are
effective.

- 210 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

Explanation

∆k+∆w
D
∆w
∆i+∆u/2
C ∆u/2
A
(R)
(R)
B
(F)

∆u/2
A'

+X ∆w
Target figure (F): Cutting feed
(R): Rapid traverse
+Z

When a target figure passing through A, A', and B in this order is

given by a program, rough cutting is performed the specified number
of times, with the finishing allowance specified by ∆u/2 and ∆w left.

- 211 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.37.4 Finishing Cycle

After rough cutting by G71, G72 or G73, the following command
permits finishing.

Format
G70 P(ns) Q(nf) ;
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the
program of target figure (finishing shape)
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the
program of target figure (finishing shape)

Explanation
The blocks with sequence numbers ns to nf in the program for a target
figure are executed for finishing. The F, S, T, M, and second auxiliary
functions specified in the G71, G72, or G73 block are ignored and the
F, S, T, M, and second auxiliary functions specified in the blocks with
sequence numbers ns to nf are effective.
When cycle operation terminates, the tool is returned to the start point
in rapid traverse and the next G70 cycle block is read.

- 212 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.37.5 End Face Peck Drilling Cycle

The operation shown in the figure below is performed according to the
command described below. This function enables chip breaking in
outer diameter cutting. If the second axis on the plane (X-axis (U-
axis) for the ZX plane) and address P are omitted, operation is
performed only along the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX
plane), that is, a peck drilling cycle is performed.

Format
∆k' ∆k ∆k ∆k ∆k [0 < ∆k’ ≤ ∆k]

∆d A

∆i
C
(R) (R)
(F) (F) (F)
(F) (F) U/2
(R) (R) (R) (R) ∆i

[0 < ∆i’ ≤ ∆i]

∆i’

X
Z W B

+X
(R) ... Rapid traverse
e (F) ... Cutting feed
+Z

G74R (e) ;
∆i) Q(∆
G74X(U)_ Z(W)_ P(∆ ∆k) R(∆
∆d) F (f ) ;
e : Return amount
X_,Z_ : Coordinate of the second axis on the plane (X-axis
for the ZX plane) at point B and
Coordinate of the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for
the ZX plane) at point C
U_,W_ : Travel distance along the second axis on the plane
(U for the ZX plane) from point A to B
Travel distance along the first axis on the plane (W
for the ZX plane) from point A to C
∆i : Travel distance in the direction of the second axis on
the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
∆k : Depth of cut in the direction of the first axis on the
plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane)
∆d : Escaping amount of the tool at the cutting bottom
f : Feedrate

- 213 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.37.6 Outer Diameter / Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle

The operation shown in the figure below is performed according to the
command described below. This cycle is equivalent to G74 except
that the second axis on the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane) changes
places with the first axis on the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane). This
cycle enables chip breaking in end facing. It also enables grooving
during outer diameter cutting and cutting off (when the Z-axis (W-
axis) and Q are omitted for the first axis on the plane).
Format
C (R) A
(R)

(F) ∆i

(R) e

(F)
∆i
(R)

U/2
(F) ∆i

(R)

(F)
∆i

(R)

(F) ∆i’
B
∆d
∆k
+X X
Z W
(R) ... Rapid traverse
+Z (F) ... Cutting feed

G75R (e) ;
∆i) Q(∆
G75X(U)_ Z(W)_ P(∆ ∆k) R(∆
∆d) F (f ) ;
e : Return amount
X_,Y_,Z_ : Coordinate of the second axis on the plane (X-
axis for the ZX plane) at point B and
Coordinate of the first axis on the plane (Z-axis
for the ZX plane) at point C
(U_,V_,W_) : Travel distance along the second axis on the
plane (U for the ZX plane) from point A to B
Travel distance along the first axis on the plane
(W for the ZX plane) from point A to C
∆i : Depth of cut in the direction of the second axis on
the plane (X-axis for the ZX plane)
∆k : Travel distance in the direction of the first axis on
the plane (Z-axis for the ZX plane)
∆d : Escaping amount of the tool at the cutting bottom
f : Feedrate
- 214 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.37.7 Multiple Threading Cycle

The threading cycle with a constant depth of cut using a one-side
cutter as shown in the figure below is executed according the
command described below.

Format
E (R) A

(R) (R)

U/2
B
(F)
∆d

D
X i k

r C

Z W

+X

+Z

∆dmin) R(d ) ;
G76 P(m) (r) (a) Q(∆
∆d) F (L ) ;
G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R(i ) P(k ) Q(∆
m : Repetitive count in finishing (1 to 99)
r : Chamfering amount (0 to 99)
a : Angle of tool nose
One of six kinds of angle, 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29°, and 0°,
can be selected, and specified by 2-digit number.
m, r, and a are specified by address P at the same time.
(Example) When m=2, r=1.2L, a=60°, specify as shown below
(L is lead of thread).
P 02 12 60
a
r
m
∆dmin : Minimum cutting depth
d : Finishing allowance
X_, Z_ : Coordinates of the cutting end point (point D in the
figure) in the direction of the length
U_, W_ : Travel distance to the cutting end point (point D in
the figure) in the direction of the length
i : Taper amount (If i = 0, ordinary straight threading
can be made.)
k : Height of thread
∆d : Depth of cut in 1st cut
L : Lead of thread

- 215 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Tool nose

a ∆d
∆d√n
1st
2nd k
3rd
nth

Fig. 5.37.7 (a) Detail of cutting

- 216 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.38 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING

M
The canned cycles for drilling are functions for performing machining
operations such as boring, drilling, and tapping with a more simplified
command.

The table below indicates the relationships between positioning planes

and drilling axes.
G code Positioning plane Drilling axis
G17 Xp-Yp plane Zp
G18 Zp-Xp plane Yp
G19 Yp-Zp plane Xp
Xp: X axis or an axis parallel to the X axis
Yp: Y axis or an axis parallel to the Y axis
Zp: Z axis or an axis parallel to the Z axis

The following canned cycles for drilling are available:

Drilling Operation at the Retraction
G code Application
(-Z direction) bottom of a hole (+Z direction)
High-speed
Intermittent
G73 - Rapid traverse peck drilling
feed
cycle
Dwell → Left-hand
G74 Feed Feed
Spindle CW tapping cycle
Spindle Fine boring
G76 Feed Rapid traverse
orientation cycle
G80 - - - Cancel
Drilling cycle,
G81 Feed - Rapid traverse spot drilling
cycle
Drilling cycle,
G82 Feed Dwell Rapid traverse counter boring
cycle
Intermittent Peck drilling
G83 - Rapid traverse
feed cycle
Dwell →
G84 Feed Feed Tapping cycle
Spindle CCW
G85 Feed - Feed Boring cycle
G86 Feed Spindle stop Rapid traverse Boring cycle
Back boring
G87 Feed Spindle CW Rapid traverse
cycle
Dwell →
G88 Feed Manual Boring cycle
Spindle stop
G89 Feed Dwell Feed Boring cycle

- 217 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

T
When the canned cycles for drilling are used, a machining operation
specified using several blocks can be specified using a single block
including a G function, making programming much simpler.

The table below indicates the relationships between positioning axes

and drilling axes.
G code Positioning axis Drilling axis
G83, G84, G85 X axis, C axis Z axis
G87, G88, G89 Z axis, C axis X axis

The following canned cycles for drilling are available:

Operation at
Drilling
G code Drilling the bottom Retraction Application
axis
of a hole
G80 Cancel
Intermittent
Rapid Front drilling
G83 Z axis feed Dwell
traverse cycle
Feed
Dwell →
Front tapping
G84 Z axis Feed Spindle Feed
cycle
CCW
Front boring
G85 Z axis Feed Dwell Feed
cycle
Intermittent
Rapid Side drilling
G87 X axis feed Dwell
traverse cycle
Feed
Dwell →
Side tapping
G88 X axis Feed Spindle Feed
cycle
CCW
Side boring
G89 X axis Feed Dwell Feed
cycle

- 218 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.39 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY R PROGRAMMING

In the case of circular interpolation command, the distance between an
arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified
using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.
In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180°
are considered. When an arc exceeding 180° is commanded, the radius
must be specified with a negative value. If Xp, Yp, and Zp are all
omitted, if the end point is located at the same position as the start
point and when R is used, an arc of 0° is programmed
G02R_ ; (The cutter does not move.)

Example)
For arc <1> (less than 180°)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y55.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc <2> (greater than 180°)
G91 G02 X60.0 Y55.0 R-50.0 F300.0 ;

<2>
r=50mm

End point

<1>

Start point
r=50mm
Y

- 219 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.40 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET

T
By applying mirror image to the X-axis with a G code, a machining
program for the opposite tool post can be created for symmetric
cutting as if the program were created in the coordinate system on the
same side.

Format
G68 : Double turret mirror image on
G69 : Mirror image cancel

Explanation
When G68 is designated, the coordinate system is shifted to the
double turret side, and the X-axis sign is reversed from the
programmed command to perform symmetrical cutting.
To use this function, set the distance between the two tool posts to a
parameter.

Example
X

Offset value of tool

post A

<3> Tool post A

60

120
<1> Z
φ80 φ40
180

φ120
<2> 120

Offset value of tool

post B

Tool post B

X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position tool post A at <1>

G68 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B
(120mm), and turn mirror image on.
X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position tool post B at <2>
G69 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A,
and cancel mirror image.
X120.0 Z60.0 T0101 ; Position tool post A at <3>

NOTE
A diameter value is specified for the X-axis.

- 220 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.41 AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE

When G62 is commanded during cutter compensation, cutting feed
rate is automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per
unit time of the corner is thus controlled not to increase. This G62 is
valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G64 (cutting mode), or G63 (tapping
mode) is commanded.

- 221 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.42 SCALING
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).
The magnification rate can be specified in the program.
Unless specified in the program, the magnification rate specified in
the parameter is applied.
Two types of scaling are available, one in which the same
magnification rate is applied to each axis and the other in which
different magnification rates are applied to different axes. Which type
to use is determined by parameter setting.

Format
- Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification
G51 IP_ P_ ;Scaling start
: Scaling is effective.
: (Scaling mode)
G50 ; Scaling cancel
IP_ : Absolute programming for center coordinate value of
scaling
P_ : Scaling magnification

- Scaling of each axis

G51 IP_ I_ J_ K_ ; Scaling start
: Scaling is effective.
: (Scaling mode)
G50 ; Scaling cancel
IP_ : Absolute programming for center coordinate value
of scaling
I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y, and Z
axes) respectively

CAUTION
1 Specify G51 in a separate block.
2 After the figure is enlarged or reduced, specify G50
to cancel the scaling mode.

NOTE
This function is available when the G code system
B or C is set.

- 222 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

Explanation
- Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification
A move command in the scaling mode is scaled by the magnification
specified by P_, with the point specified by X_Y_Z_ used as the
center.

P4
P3

P4’ P3’
P0

P1’ P2’

P1 P2
0 X

P0 : Scaling center
P1 to P4 : Programmed figure
P1’ to P4’ : Scaled figure

- Scaling of each axis

A move command in the scaling mode is scaled by the magnification
for each axis specified by I_J_K_, with the point specified by
X_Y_Z_ used as the center. If I, J, and K are not specified, scaling is
performed by a parameter-set magnification.
Also when a negative magnification is specified, a mirror image is
applied. The axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains
the scaling center.

a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis

c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis
Y axis o : Scaling center

Programmed figure

d
Scaled figure

c
O

a X axis

- 223 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Scaling center
Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center
coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block are assumed those of an
absolute position.
If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed
when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center.

- 224 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.43 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION

A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it
becomes possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation
command when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated
from the programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is
a pattern comprising some identical shapes in the positions rotated
from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the
program can be reduced by preparing a sub program of the shape and
calling it after rotation.
Y

Angle of rotation

Center of rotation

X
0

Format
For M series
G17
G18 G68 α_ β_ R_ ; Start rotation of a coordinate system.
G19
: Coordinate system rotation mode
G69 ; Coordinate system rotation cancel command
For T series
G17
G18 G68.1 α_ β_ R_ ; Start rotation of a coordinate system.
G19
: Coordinate system rotation mode
G69.1 ; Coordinate system rotation cancel command
G17 (G18 or G19) : Select the plane in which contains the figure to be rotated.
α, β : Specify two coordinates (from among X, Y, and Z) of the rotation center that
match G17, G18, and G19. The values specified as the coordinates of the
rotation center must always be absolute values.
R : Specifies the rotation angle as an absolute value. Counterclockwise rotation
is assumed to be positive. However, setting parameter enables the use of
an incremental value.
Unit : 0.001 deg
Valid data range : -360,000 to +360,000

- 225 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Explanation
Once this function is specified, a subsequent command is rotated
about the center specified by α_ β_ by the angle specified by R_.
The rotation plane (G17, G18, G19) selected when G68 (G68.1) was
specified is used. G17, G18, or G19 may not be specified in the block
including G68 (G68.1), but must not be specified in the coordinate
system rotation mode.
If α_ β_ is omitted, the position where G68 (G68.1) was specified
becomes the center of rotation.

- Relationship with three-dimensional coordinate conversion

Both coordinate system rotation and three-dimensional coordinate
conversion use the same G codes. The G code with I, J, and K is
processed as a command for three-dimensional coordinate conversion.
The G code without I, J, and K is processed as a command for two-
dimensional coordinate system rotation.

- 226 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.44 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION

Coordinate conversion about an axis can be carried out if the center of
rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement are
specified. This function is very useful in three-dimensional machining
by a die-sinking machine or similar machine. For example, by
executing a program created on the XY plane after applying three-
dimensional coordinate conversion, machining can be performed on
an arbitrary plane in a three-dimensional space.
By specifying rigid tapping in the three-dimensional coordinate
conversion mode, tapping operation can be performed in the angle
direction specified by the three-dimensional coordinate conversion
command (three-dimensional rigid tapping).
Z

X Three-dimensional coordinate conversion

Z Y

Fig. 5.44 (a) Image of three-dimensional coordinate conversion

Format
For M series
G68 XpX1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rαα; Starting three-dimensional coordinate conversion
:
: Three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode
G69 ; Canceling three-dimensional coordinate conversion
For T series
α;
G68.1 XpX1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rα Starting three-dimensional coordinate conversion
:
: Three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode
G69.1 ; Canceling three-dimensional coordinate conversion
Xp, Yp, Zp : Center of rotation (absolute coordinates) on the X, Y, and Z axis or parallel
axes
I, J, K : Direction of the axis of rotation
R : Angular displacement

Example)
Three-dimensional coordinate conversion can be executed twice.
N1 G68 Xp x1 Yp y1 Zp z1 I i1 J j1 K k1 R α ;
N2 G68 Xp x2 Yp y2 Zp z2 I i2 J j2 K k2 R β ;
:
Nn G69 ;

- 227 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.45 TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND

When a figure such as a hole or pocket is cut on a plane tilted relative

to the reference surface of the workpiece, this function defines a
coordinate system (referred to a "feature coordinate system") tied to
the plane. By specifying a position in such a coordinate system, a
program can be created more easily.
A feature coordinate system is defined on a workpiece coordinate
system.
See the figure below for the relationship between a feature coordinate
system and workpiece coordinate system.

Feature coordinate
system (G68.2)

Workpiece coordinate system (G54)

Machine coordinate system

This function is applicable to the following machine configurations.

(See above figure.)
<1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation
axes
<2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table rotation
axes
<3> Mixed-type machine controlled with one tool rotation axis and
one rotary axis
The function can also be used for a machine configuration in which
the rotary axis for controlling the tool does not intersect the rotary axis
for controlling the table.

Format
- Feature coordinate system setting
α Jβ
G68.2 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Iα β Kγγ ; Feature coordinate
: system setting
G69 ; Cancels the feature
coordinate system setting.
X, Y, Z : Feature coordinate system origin
I, J, K : Euler's angle for determining the orientation of the
feature coordinate system

- Tool axis direction control

G53.1 ; Controls the tool axis direction.

- 228 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

The G68.2 command causes the programming coordinate system to

switch to the feature coordinate system. The commands in all
subsequent blocks are assumed to be specified in the feature
coordinate system until G69 appears.
If G68.2 specifies the relationship between the feature coordinate
system and the workpiece coordinate system, tool axis direction
control command G53.1 automatically specifies the +Z direction of
the feature coordinate system as the tool axis direction even if no
angle is specified for the rotary axis.

- 229 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.46 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE

Mirror image can be commanded on each axis by programming.
Ordinary mirror image (commanded by remote switch or setting)
comes after the programmable mirror image is applied.

Format
- Setting of programmable mirror image
Following format is commanded and mirror image is commanded to
each axis (as if mirror was set on the axis).
G51.1 IP_;

- Programmable mirror image cancel

Following format is commanded and the programmable mirror image
is canceled.
G50.1 IP_;

CAUTION
If mirror image is specified only for one axis on the
specified plane, the operation of the commands is
as follows:
• Arc command:
The rotation direction is reversed.
• Cutter compensation:
The offset direction is reversed.
• Coordinate system rotation:
The rotation angle is reversed.

When shape of the workpiece is symmetric to an axis, a program for

machining the whole part can be prepared by programming a part of
the workpiece using programmable mirror image and sub program.

Axis of symmetry
Main program
Y (X=50) N10 G00 G90 ;
(2) (1) N20 M98 P9000 ;
100 N30 G51.1 X50.0 ;
N40 M98 P9000 ;
N50 G51.1 Y50.0 ;
N60 M98 P9000 ;
N70 G50.1 X0 ;
60
Axis of symmetry (Y=50) (Cancel only X axis)
50 N80 M98 P9000 ;
40 N90 G50.1 Y0 ;

Sub program
O9000 ;
G00 G90 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
0 G01 X100.0 F100 ;
(3) (4) G01 Y100.0 ;
0 40 50 60 100 X G01 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
M99 ;

- 230 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.47 FIGURE COPY

Machining can be repeated after moving or rotating the figure using a
sub program.

Format
- Rotational copy

Xp-Yp plane (specified by G17) : G72.1 P_ L_ Xp_ Yp_ R_ ;

Zp-Xp plane (specified by G18) : G72.1 P_ L_ Zp_ Xp_ R_ ;
Yp-Zp plane (specified by G19) : G72.1 P_ L_ Yp_ Zp_ R _;
P :Sub program number
L :Number of times the operation is repeated
Xp :Center of rotation on the Xp axis
(Xp : X-axis or an axis parallel to the X-axis)
Yp :Center of rotation on the Yp axis
(Yp: Y-axis or an axis parallel to the Y-axis)
Zp :Center of rotation on the Zp axis
(Zp: Z-axis or an axis parallel to the Z-axis)
R :Angular displacement
(A positive value indicates a counterclockwise angular
displacement. Specify an incremental value.)
Specify a plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19) to
select the plane on which the rotational copy is made.

P4 P3
Start point

P5 P2
P0
P6 12 P1
X

Main program Sub program

O1000 ; O2000 G03 X_ Y_ R30.0 ; (P2)

N10 G92 X40.0 Y50.0 ; N100 G01 X_ Y_ ; (P3)

N20 G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; (P0) N200 G03 X_ Y_ R10.0 ; (P4)
N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P1) N300 G01 X_ Y_ ; (P5)
N40 G72.1 P2000 L3 X0 Y0 R120.0 ; N400 G03 X_ Y_ R30.0 ; (P6)
N50 G40 G01 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ; (P0) N500 M99;
N60 G00 X40.0 Y50.0 ;
N70 M30 ;

Fig. 5.47 (a) Example of rotation copy

- 231 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Linear copy
Xp-Yp plane (specified by G17) :
G72.2 P_ L_ I_ J_ ;
Zp-Xp plane (specified by G18) :
G72.2 P_ L_ K_ I_ ;
Yp-Zp plane (specified by G19) :
G72.2 P_ L_ J_ K_;
P :Sub program number
L :Number of times the operation is repeated
I :Shift along the Xp axis
J :Shift along the Yp axis
K :Shift along the Zp axis
Specify a plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19) to
select the plane on which the linear copy is made.

P4 P5

Start P2
P6 P7
point P1
P3
X
P0 70 70 70 P8

Main program Sub program

O1000 ; O2000 G90 G01 X_ ; (P3)
N10 G92 X-20.0 Y0 ; N100 Y_ ; (P4)
N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ; N200 G02 X_ I_ ; (P5)
N30 G01 G17 G41 X20. Y0. D01 F10 ; (P0) N300 G01 Y_ ; (P6)
N40 Y20. ; (P1) N400 X_ ; (P7)
N50 X30. ; (P2) N500 M99 ;
N60 G72.2 P2000 L3 I70.0 J0 ;
N70 X_ Y_ ; (P8)
N80 X0 ;
N90 G00 G40 X-20.0 Y0 ;
N100 M30 ;

Fig. 5.47 (b) Example of linear copy

NOTE
In a sub program for rotational copy, rotational
copy cannot be specified again. Similarly, in a sub
program for linear copy, linear copy cannot be
specified again.
However, in a sub program for rotational copy,
linear copy can be specified. Similarly, in a sub
program for linear copy, rotational copy can be
specified.

- 232 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.48 PROGRAM FORMAT FOR Series15

By setting a setting parameter, the following functions programmed in
the Series 15 program format can be executed by memory operation:

M
• Sub program call (M98)
• Canned cycle for drilling (G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89)

T
• Sub program call (M98)
• Canned cycle (G77, G78, G79)
(G90, G92, G94 with G code system A)
• Multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71 to G76)
• Canned cycle for drilling (G80 to G85)

NOTE
Address and specifiable value range
The ordinary program format restriction is imposed
on the specifiable value range for basic addresses
used. If a value beyond the allowable range is
specified, an alarm is issued. Moreover, the usable
addresses may be limited.

- 233 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.49 MACRO EXECUTOR

Some NC programs such as programs created using custom macros
need not be modified once created. Others such as machining
programs differ depending on the machining target.
This function can convert a custom macro program created by the
machine tool builder to an executable macro program, load the
executable macro program (P-CODE macro) into F-ROM (Flash
ROM module), and execute it.
The function which converts a custom macro program to an
executable macro program is called the macro compiler. The function
which reads and executes a P-CODE macro is called the macro
executor.

Features
• The execution speed is high because a custom macro program is
loaded after converted to an executable so that the machining
time can be reduced and the machining precision can be
improved.
• Any custom macro is not destroyed because it is loaded into F-
ROM so that reliability is improved.
• A program converted to execution format is not displayed on the
program screen, so that the know-how possessed by each
machine tool builder can be protected.
• An execution format macro program is registered in the F-ROM,
so that the program storage space can be efficiently used.
• The user can call the execution format macro program with an
easy call procedure without being conscious of the registered
program.
• An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or
selecting screens by the soft key. The machine tool builder can
extend the control function by using such functions as machining
program creation and edit control, reader/puncher interface
control, and PMC data read/write functions.

- 234 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 5.PROGRAM INPUT

5.50 C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR

The C language executor function is used to customize screen display
and implement a mechanism for user-specific operation as with the
macro executor function. Instead of macro statements, application
programs for display and operation can be created using the general C
language.

Features
- Low-cost customization
No special additional hardware is needed to run the C language
executor and application programs (*). All available display units are
supported. User applications can be included in the current CNC
system.

NOTE
(*) To execute the C language executor and
application programs, the size of the flash
ROM/DRAM may need to be increased.

- Application development on a personal computer

Application programs can be developed using an ordinary personal
computer. Program development, from program creation and editing
to compilation/linkage, can also be performed on a personal computer.
And, to a certain extent, debugging is also possible on the personal
computer.

- High compatibility with C language application programs for personal computers

The function library provided by the C language executor has
excellent compatibility with the ANSI standards and MS-C. Therefore,
application programs for ordinary personal computers can be
transported to the CNC, except when they are dependent on particular
hardware.

- Integration of CNC software and applications

An application program created by the machine tool builder is
executed as one task of the CNC software. The application program
can display its own screens in place of existing CNC screens. In
addition, the application program can read and write CNC system data
via libraries provided by the C language executor. This enables
operation of the application program to be integrated with CNC
software.

- Using the C language executor with the macro executor

The C language executor can be used with the macro executor. The
screen display portion of a macro program already created by the
machine tool builder can be replaced with a program coded in C. This
can prevent existing software resources from becoming useless.

- 235 -
5.PROGRAM INPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

5.51 CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE

The required size of custom software to be used with the macro
executor and C language executor can be selected from the following:

256 K / 512K / 1M / 2M / 3M / 4M / 5M / 6M (Unit : byte)

When a multi-path system is used, the total size required for all paths
needs to be selected.

- 236 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

6 AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE

SPEED FUNCTION

- 237 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

6.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

When a numeral is specified following address M, code signal and a
strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals
to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. However, up
to three M codes can be specified.
The maximum number of digits can be specified by parameter setting.

The following M codes have special meanings.

• M02, M30 : End of program
• M00 : Program stop
• M01 : Optional stop
M98, M99, M198, the M code for calling a sub program (set by a
parameter), the M code for calling a custom macro (set by a
parameter), and the M codes for turning an interrupt macro on and off
(M96 and M97, or parameter-set M codes) are processed internally by
the CNC, so no signal is output for these M codes.

6.2 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTION

If a value with a maximum of eight digits is specified after address B,

the code signal and strobe signal are transferred for calculation of the
rotation axis. The code signal is retained until the next B code is
specified.
Only one B code can be specified for each block. When the maximum
number of digits and decimal point programming are specified by
parameter.
In addition, the address used for specifying the second auxiliary
function can be changed to an address other than address B (address A,
C, U, V, or W) by setting parameter.

NOTE
In lathe systems, addresses U, V, and W can be
used only with G code system B or C.

- 238 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

6.3 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK

The auxiliary function lock signal disables execution of a specified M,
S, T, or B function. This means that the code signal and strobe signal
are not output.
This function is used together with the machine lock function at the
time of program checking.
Even in the auxiliary function lock state, M00, M01, M02, M30, M98,
M99, and M198 (sub program call function) are executed. The M code
for calling a sub program (set by a parameter) and the M code for
calling a custom macro (set by a parameter) are also executed.

- 239 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

6.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE

The communication of execution command signal (strobe signal) and
completion signal is the M/S/T/B function were simplified to realize a
high-speed execution of M/S/T/B function.
The time required for cutting can be minimized by speeding up the
execution time of M/S/T/B function.

The description below uses the auxiliary functions (M code

commands) as an example. The same description applies to the
spindle speed function (S code), tool function (T code) and 2nd
auxiliary function (B code).
(1) Assume that the following program is given:
Mxx;
Myy;
(2) In response to an M command, the CNC system sends out the
code signals M00 to M31.
The CNC system inverts the logical level of the strobe signal MF,
that is, from "0"to "1", or from "1" to "0".
(3) The CNC system inverts the strobe signal, then when the logical
level of the auxiliary function completion signal MFIN becomes
the same as the strobe signal, the CNC assumes the completion
of PMC sequence.
With the usual method, the operation is assumed to be completed
when a falling edge ("1" to "0") of the M/S/T/B completion
signal FIN is received after a rising edge ("0" to "1") of the FIN
signal is detected. This new system, on the other hand, assumes
the operation has been completed upon detection of only one
transition of the completion signal.
In addition , the usual system uses only one completion signal
(FIN) common to the M/S/T/B functions. This new system uses a
different completion signal for each of the M, S, T, and B
functions; the completion signals for the M, S, T, and B functions
are MFIN, SFIN, TFIN, and BFIN, respectively.

- 240 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

The Fig. 6.4 (a) below shows the timing chart of these signals with the
new system. For comparison, Fig. 6.4 (b) shows the timing chart of
the conventional system.

Next block
Code signals
Mxx Myy

Strobe signal MF

PMC side operation

Auxiliary function
completion signal MFIN
Fig. 6.4 (a) Timing chart of the high-speed system

Next block
Code signals
Mxx Myy

Strobe signal MF

PMC side operation

Completion signal FIN

Fig. 6.4 (b) Timing chart of the usual system

NOTE
1 Which system, the usual system or high-speed
system, is to be used for transferring the strobe
signal and completion signal can be specified by
parameter setting.
2 The usual system used just one completion signal
(FIN), which is common to the M, S, T, and B
functions. In the high-speed system, a separate
completion signal is provided for each of the M, S,
T, and B functions.

- 241 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

6.5 WAITING FUNCTION

Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the
other during machining. When an M code for waiting is specified in a
block for one path during automatic operation, the other path waits for
the same M code to be specified before staring the execution of the
next block.
A range of M codes used as M codes for waiting is to be set in the
parameters beforehand. Waiting can be ignored using a signal.

Example)
When M codes for waiting are set to M101 to M103

(1) M101 P12 ;

Path 1 Path 2 Path 3
(making paths 1 and 2 wait for
each other)
O0100; O0200; O0300; When the waiting ignore signal
G50 X Z ; G50 X Z ; G50 X Z ; for path 2 is set to 0, paths 1
G00 X Z T0101; G00 X Z T0202; G00 X Z T0303; and 2 wait for each other.
M03 S1000; M03 S2000; M102 P123;...........(2) Because the signal is set to 1,
: M101 P12; ............ (1)
however, paths 1 and 2 ignore
the M code for waiting and
: G01 X Z F ;
immediately execute the next
M101 P12; ............ (1) : block.
<<Waiting (M102)>>
G01 X Z F ; : (2) M102 P123 ;
: M102 P123; .......... (2) (making paths 1, 2, and 3 wait
: M103 P123; .......... (3) for one another)
M102 P123; .......... (2) : In this example, path 3 waits for
processing on paths 1 and 2 to
: G00 X Z ; terminate. Because the
M103 P123; .......... (3) : : waiting ignore signal for path 2
: : is set to 1, however, path 3
<<Waiting (M103)>>
: M103 P123;...........(3) assumes that waiting is
: completed when processing on
G01 X Z F ; : path 1 terminates, and
G00 X Z ; executes the next block.
: : : (3) M103 P123 ;
(making paths 1, 2, and 3 wait
for one another)
In this example, paths 1 and 2
wait for processing on path 3 to
terminate. Because the
waiting ignore signal for path 2
is set to 1, however, path 2
does not wait for processing on
path 3 to terminate and
executes the next block, but
path 1 waits for path 3.

CAUTION
1 Be sure to specify a waiting M code in an independent block.
2 Unlike other M codes, waiting M codes are not output to PMCs.
3 If you want to independently operate one path only, you need not delete that
waiting M code. Using the waiting invalidation signal, you can invalidate the waiting
M code specified in the machining program. For details, refer to the manual issued
by the machine tool builder.

- 242 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

6.6 MULTIPLE COMMAND OF AUXILIARY FUNCTION

So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. Parameter
setting makes it possible to specify up to three M codes in one block at
the same time.
Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to
the machine. This means that compared with the conventional method
of a single M command in a single block, a shorter cycle time can be
realized in machining.

(Example)
Multiple M commands in a single
One M command in a single block
block
M40; M40M50M60;
M50; G28G91X0Y0Z0;
M60; :
G28G91X0Y0Z0; :
: :

- 243 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

6.7 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT)

A numeric value following address S specifies the spindle speed.
The specified value is output to the PMC in the form of 32-bit binary
code. The code is maintained until another S is specified. In addition,
the maximum number of input digits can be specified with a
parameter.

6.8 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT

The speed of the serial interface spindle is controlled.
Specify the spindle speed with up to five digits immediately after
address S. A speed command is output to the spindle motor according
to the specified spindle speed. During constant surface speed control,
a speed command is output so that it matches the spindle speed
reached after constant surface speed control.

- 244 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

6.9 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL

When a surface speed (in m/min or feet/min) is specified with an S
code (a numeric value following S), the spindle speed is controlled so
that the surface speed is kept constant with respect to the change in
tool position.

With a machine having (or using) no position coder, feed per

revolution is usually impossible. However, parameter setting makes it
possible to specify feed per revolution by using spindle commands
including a constant surface speed control command. (Without
position coder constant surface speed control)

Format
G96 S_ : Constant surface speed control mode
S_ : Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)
G97 S_ : Constant surface speed control cancel mode
S_ : Spindle speed (min-1)

Constant surface speed control command G96 is a modal G code.

Once G96 is specified, the system enters the constant surface speed
control mode (G96 mode) and assumes the specified S value to be the
surface speed.

The axis on which the calculation for constant surface speed control is
based can be set with a parameter or by using the following command:

G96 P_ ;
P0 : Axis set in the parameter
P1 : 1st axis to Pn : n-th axis (n is the axis number in the path.)

The maximum spindle speed can also be set by using the following
command:

G92 S_ ;
S_ : Maximum spindle speed (min-1)

6.10 SPINDLE OVERRIDE

To the spindle speed specified by S code, an override from 0 to 254%
can be applied (in steps of 1%).

- 245 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

6.11 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT

Actual spindle speed calculated by the return signal of the position
coder on the spindle is output in 16-bit binary code.

6.12 SPINDLE ORIENTATION

You can perform spindle orientation simply by mounting a position
coder on the spindle. Stoppers or pins for physically stopping the
spindle at a specified position are not necessary. A spindle can be
instantly oriented, even when rotating at high-speed, thereby greatly
reducing the orientation time.

6.13 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION

Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for
low speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special
spindle motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates
stable output characteristics over a wide range.

6.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

In a machine having two or more spindles (such as a multi-path lathe),
this function controls more than one spindle synchronously.
When a workpiece is switched between two spindles during spindle
rotation, or when the spindle speeds of two spindles are accelerated or
decelerated while the spindles are holding a workpiece, the spindles
can be rotated at the same speed. (Spindle speed synchronization)
When a non-standard workpiece is switched, the rotations of the two
spindles can be made in phase with each other (matching of angular
displacement). (Phase synchronization)

- 246 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

6.15 SPINDLE SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

Spindles can be synchronized with each other for control.
Two spindles can be combined, one as a master spindle and the other
as a slave spindle, so that Cs contouring control, rigid tapping, spindle
positioning, and normal spindle rotation control can also be used with
the slave spindle under control by the master spindle.
A master spindle and slave spindle to be placed under simple spindle
synchronous control can be freely selected from the first to fourth
spindles.
Multiple combinations of a master spindle and slave spindle can be
placed under simple spindle synchronous control.
This function can be used with serial spindles.

Unlike spindle synchronous control, simple spindle synchronous

control does not guarantee spindle operation synchronization between
a master spindle and slave spindle. Moreover, applicable spindle
functions differ.

The major differences from spindle synchronous control are indicated

below.

Spindle simple
Spindle synchronous
Function synchronous
control
control
O(Synchronization /
Spindle ∆(Same speed
phase matching is
rotation control command is used.)
Combination possible.)
with other Cs contour
O X
spindle control
functions Rigid tapping O X
Spindle
O X
positioning
Synchronization of multiple
O O
combinations
Synchronization of multiple
O O
slave spindles
Parking function O X

- 247 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

6.16 MULTI SPINDLE CONTROL

In addition to the first spindle, the second to fourth spindles can be
controlled using an S command from the CNC.
Spindle commands are specified using a single S command as
conventionally done. A spindle is selected depending on the signal
from the PMC or the address P command.
Gear change between two stages can be made for the second, third,
and fourth spindles in the same manner as for the first spindle.
Parameter setting makes it possible to set a maximum spindle speed
for each spindle and clamp the speed of each spindle at the
corresponding maximum spindle speed.
The position coder interfaces for the second to fourth spindles can be
selected and added.
The first to fourth position coders are selected by signals from the
PMC.

There are three types of multi spindle control methods: a method that
can use the SIND (spindle motor speed control by the PMC) function
only for the first spindle (TYPE-A), a method that can use the SIND
function for the four spindles independently (TYPE-B), and a method
that is equivalent to TYPE-B and can use address P to select the
spindle to be controlled by the S command.
These methods can be selected by parameter setting.

An S command is sent as a speed command to each spindle selected,

using a spindle selection signals. Each spindle rotates at the specified
speed. If a spindle is not sent a spindle selection signal, it continues to
rotate at its previous speed. This allows the spindles to rotate at
different speeds at the same time.
Signals are provided to stop the corresponding spindles, so
unnecessary spindles can be kept stopped.

- When multi spindle control is disabled

Only the first spindle can be controlled using the S command even if
more than one spindle is present.

S command Spindle 1

Spindle 2

Spindle 3

Spindle 4

- 248 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

- Multi-spindle control (TYPE-A)

When the first spindle is selected with the SWS1 signal, the SIND
signal is used to determine whether the spindle analog voltage is
controlled by the PMC or CNC; then signals R01I to R12I are used to
set that spindle’s analog voltage. These signals do not affect the
second to fourth spindles.
The PMC-based polarity (rotation direction) control signals SGN and
SSIN will function for any spindle selected by SWS1 to SWS4.

Keep 1 Spindle 1

Keep 2 Spindle 2
S command

Keep 3 Spindle 3

Keep 4 Spindle 4

- Multi-spindle control (TYPE-B)

Each spindle has its own SIND, SSIN and SGN signals.
Each of these signals functions regardless of selection state of the
spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS4).
When either the spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS4) or the
SIND signal for the first, second, third, or fourth spindle is set to "1",
the polarity control signals SSIN, SGN will function.

Keep 1 Spindle 1

Keep 2 Spindle 2

S command

Keep 3 Spindle 3

Keep 4 Spindle 4

- 249 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Multi spindle control: when a spindle is selected by address P

This control method is basically the same as TYPE-B. The first,
second, third, and fourth spindles each have their own SIND, SSIN,
and SGN signals. A spindle is selected by the P command instead of
the spindle selection signals (SWS1 to SWS4). The relationship
between the P code and the selected spindle is set in parameter No.
3781.
Polarity (rotation direction) control signals SSIN and SGN for each
spindle are valid only for the spindle selected by the P command or
for the spindle of which SIND signal is 1.

P command

Keep 1 Spindle 1

Keep 2 Spindle 2

S command

Keep 3 Spindle 3

Keep 4 Spindle 4

In case of multi-path control, the P code becomes valid in all paths.

For example, suppose that the P code to select the first spindle of path
2 is set to 21. When the following is specified in path 1:
S1000 P21;
Then, 1000 is specified for the first spindle in path 2. Therefore, the
same P code cannot be used even in different paths.

- Extended spindle name

Usually, S is used as commands for spindles. If the parameter settings
and the conditions listed below are all satisfied, extended spindle
names can be used. Extended spindle names can consist of up to three
characters beginning with S as the first spindle name character, and
use of an extended spindle name allows a command to be executed for
a specific spindle.
• The serial spindle function is enabled.
• The multi spindle function is enabled.

- 250 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

6.17 SPINDLE POSITIONING

The workpiece mounted on the spindle can be positioned at a certain
angle by moving the spindle attached to the spindle motor by the
certain angle. This function is called the spindle positioning function.
During turning, use of this function allows machining such as drilling
at any position on the circumference of the workpiece.
The spindle position is detected by the position coder attached to the
spindle.
Whether to use the spindle for spindle positioning (spindle positioning
mode) or to use the spindle for spindle rotation (spindle rotation
mode) is command by special M code (set by parameters).

- Movement command
G00 C_ ; (C_ is an arbitrary axis address.)
The spindle is positioned to the commanded position by rapid traverse.
Absolute (G90) and incremental (G91) command, as well as decimal
point input is possible.

- Increment system
Least input increment : 0.001deg
360 × N
Detection unit : deg
4096
N represents the gear ratio of the spindle to position coder. (1, 2, 4,
8, . . . )

- 251 -
6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

6.18 RIGID TAPPING

In tapping, the feed amount of drilling axis for one rotation of spindle
should be equal to the pitch of screw of tapper. Namely, the following
conditions must be satisfied in the best tapping:

P=F/S
where P : Pitch of screw of tapper (mm)
F : Feed rate of drilling axis (mm/min)
S : Spindle speed (min-1)

The rotation of spindle and feed of Z axis are independently controlled

in the tapping cycle G74/G84 (machining center system), G84/G88
(lathe system). Therefore, the above conditions may not always be
satisfied. Especially at the hole bottom, both the rotation of spindle
and feed of drilling axis reduce the speed and stop. After that, they
move in the inverse direction while increasing the speed. However,
the above conditions may not be satisfied in general since each
acceleration/deceleration is performed independently. Therefore, in
general, the feed is compensated by mounting a spring to the inside of
holder of tapper to improve the accuracy of tap cutting.
The rotation of spindle and feed of drilling axis are controlled so that
they are always synchronous each other in the rigid tapping cycle.
Namely, in other than rigid tapping, control for speed only is
performed. In the rigid tapping however, position control is also
performed during the rotation of spindle, that is, the rotation of spindle
and feed of drilling axis are controlled as linear interpolation of two
axes.
This allows the following condition to be satisfied also during
acceleration/deceleration at the hole bottom and a tapping of improved
accuracy to be made.
P = F/S

Rigid tapping can be performed by executing any of the following

commands:
• M29 Sxxxxx before tapping command G74/G84 or G84/G88
• M29 Sxxxxx in the same block as tapping command G74/G84 or
G84/G88
• G74/G84 or G84/G88 as rigid tapping G code (Whether
G74/G84 is used as rigid tapping G code or ordinary tapping G
code can be selected with a parameter.)

- 252 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 6.AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

6.19 RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE

After a programmed command for rigid tapping is executed in MDI
mode to form the rigid tapping mode, then switching to the handle
mode is made, rigid tapping can be performed by moving the tapping
axis with the manual handle.

In the programmed command to form the rigid tapping mode, the

tapping axis must be specified. In this case, a value for preventing the
tapping axis from operating must be specified.
Example)
M29 S100 ;
G91 G84 Z0 F1000 ;

The rotation direction of the spindle is determined by the specified

tapping cycle G code and parameter.

6.20 ARBITRARY POSITION REFERENCE SETTING FOR Cs

AXIS FUNCTION
When a reference position return command (G28 or a manual
reference position return) is executed for the first time since a serial
spindle is placed in the Cs contour control mode, an arbitrary position
can be set as the reference position by parameter setting.
In this case, the system performs reference position return, assuming
that the current position is the reference position, so the system does
not move the spindle to position it to the reference position.

Because the reference position return operation does not involve

positioning to the spindle position specific to the spindle, this function
can reduce the cycle time.

- 253 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7 TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL

COMPENSATION FUNCTION

- 254 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.1 TOOL FUNCTION

A tool can be selected by specifying a tool number of up to eight
digits immediately after address T.
When a T code is specified, the code signal corresponding to the tool
number and the strobe signal are sent to the machine to select a tool.
This code signal is maintained until another T code is specified.
Just one T code can be specified per block. The maximum number of
digits can be specified by parameter setting.

T
In lathe systems, part of the numeric following the T code is used also
as a tool offset number specifying a value such as a tool offset value.
An offset number may be specified by the lowest one digit, lowest two
digits, or lowest three digits of the numeric following the T code as
shown below.
The number of the digits of the offset number can be selected by
parameter setting.

- Specifying an offset number with the lowest one digit

T
↑ ↑
Tool number Compensation number

- Specifying an offset number with the lowest two digits

T
↑ ↑
Tool number Compensation number

- Specifying an offset number with the lowest three digits

T
↑ ↑
Tool number Compensation number

Specifying an offset number means selecting the corresponding offset

value and also means starting tool offset.
When 0 is specified as the offset number, tool offset is canceled.

- 255 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.2 TOOL OFFSET PAIRS

The number of tool offset pairs used in the entire system can be
selected from the list shown below.
In a multi-path system, the number of tool offset pairs used in each
path can be set by a parameter. The number of tool offset pairs used
in the entire system must not exceed the number selected from the
following table.

Table 7.2 (a) Tool offset pairs

No. of offset pairs Standard / option
32 Standard
64 Option
99 Option
200 Option
400 Option
499 Option
999 Option
2000 Option

- 256 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.3 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY

M
One of the tool compensation memory A/B/C can be selected
according to the configuration of offset amount.

Explanation
- Tool compensation memory A
There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and
wear compensation memory in tool compensation memory A.
Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset together is set
as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter
compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).
Setting example of tool compensation memory A
Compensation value Common to D and H
Offset number
(geometry + wear) codes
001 10.000 For D code
002 20.000 For D code
003 100.000 For H code
: : :

- Tool compensation memory B

Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is
separate in tool compensation memory B. Geometry compensation
and wear compensation can thus be set separately. There is no
difference between cutter compensation (D code) and tool length
compensation (H code).
Setting example of tool compensation memory B
Offset For geometry For wear Common to D and H
number compensation compensation codes
001 10.100 0.100 For D code
002 20.200 0.200 For D code
003 100.000 0.100 For H code
: : : :

- Tool compensation memory C

Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is
separate in tool compensation memory C. Geometry compensation
and wear compensation can thus be set separately. Separate memories
are prepared for cutter compensation (for D code) and for tool length
compensation (for H code).
Setting example of tool compensation memory C
D code H code
Offset
For geometry For wear For geometry For wear
number
compensation compensation compensation compensation
001 10.000 0.100 100.000 0.100
002 20.000 0.200 200.000 0.300
: : : : :

- 257 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Tool offset
When the tool offset function is used, data that can be set in tool
compensation memory is the compensation values for the X- and Z-
axes.

- Tool nose radius compensation

When the cutter or tool nose radius compensation function is provided,
compensation value R and imaginary tool nose direction T are added
to the tool compensation memory setting items.

- Y-axis offset
When Y-axis offset is provided, the Y-axis offset setting screen is
added. Data that can be set in Y-axis offset memory is the
compensation value for the Y-axis.

- Second geometry tool offset

For compensation for the difference in tool mounting position or in
selected position, second geometry tool offset can be provided in
addition to tool offset. Data that can be set for second geometry tool
offset is the compensation values for the X-, Z-, and Y-axes.

- Interference check for each path

A contact inhibition area for the interference check for each path can
be set for each tool number. The data to be set for the contact
inhibition area is X, Z, I, and K coordinates. These data items are not
tool compensation values, but the number of sets varies depending on
the number of tool compensation pairs.

- Tool geometry / wear compensation

The tool compensation memory configuration differs depending on
whether the tool geometry and wear compensation functions are
provided or not. The following data items in tool compensation
memory are affected:
1. X- and Z-axis compensation values in tool offset
2. Compensation value R when tool nose radius compensation is
provided
3. Y-axis compensation value when Y-axis offset is provided
When the tool geometry and wear compensation functions are not
provided, there is no distinction between geometry compensation
memory and wear compensation memory. Therefore, a sum of the
geometry compensation value and wear compensation value is set in
compensation memory.
When the tool geometry and wear compensation functions are
provided, geometry compensation memory and wear compensation
memory are prepared separately. Therefore, geometry compensation
values and wear compensation values can be set separately.

- 258 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.4 COMMON COMPENSATION MEMORY BETWEEN EACH

PATH
In multi-path systems, part or all of tool compensation memory
provided for each path can be shared among multiple paths by
parameter setting.

Example)
Sharing tool compensation numbers 1 to 20 between path 1 and
path 2
Machining center Lathe system tool
system tool compensation for path 2
compensation for path 1
Tool
compensation
number 1

Common 30 tool 50 tool

area compen- compen-
Tool sation sation
compensation values values
number 20

- 259 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.5 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION

M
When the difference between the tool length assumed at the time of
programming and the tool length of the tool actually used for
machining is set in offset memory, the difference in tool length can be
corrected without modifying the program.
G43 and G44 specify the offset direction, and a number following the
tool length compensation specification address (H code) specifies the
tool length compensation amount set in the offset memory.

Tool assumed at Actual tool

programming

Set this difference as

tool length
compensation amount

Format

Type Format Description

Tool length G43 Z_ H_ ;
compensation A G44 Z_ H_ ;
G43 : Positive offset
G17 G43 Z_ H_ ; G44 : Negative offset
G17 G44 Z_ H_ ; G17 : XY plane selection
Tool length G18 G43 Y_ H_ ; G18 : ZX plane selection
compensation B G18 G44 Y_ H_ ; G19 : YZ plane selection
G19 G43 X_ H_ ; α : Address of a specified axis
G19 G44 X_ H_ ; H : Address for specifying the
Tool length G43 α_H_ ; tool length compensation
compensation C G44 α_H_ ; value
X, Y, Z : Offset move command
Tool length
G49 ; or H0 ;
compensation cancel

- 260 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

Explanation
One of the following three methods is available, depending on the
type of axis that can be subject to tool length compensation:
• Tool length compensation A
Compensates for the difference in tool length along the basic Z-
axis.
• Tool length compensation B
Compensates for the difference in tool length in the direction
normal to a selected plane.
• Tool length compensation C
Compensates for the difference in tool length along a specified
axis.
One of the above methods can be selected by parameter setting.

- Direction of the offset

When G43 is specified, the tool length compensation value (stored in
offset memory) specified with the H code is added to the coordinates
of the end position specified by a command in the program. When
G44 is specified, the same value is subtracted from the coordinates of
the end position. The resulting coordinates indicate the end position
after compensation, regardless of whether the absolute or incremental
mode is selected.
When the specification of an axis is omitted, a movement is made by
the tool length compensation value.
G43 and G44 are modal G codes. They are valid until another G code
belonging to the same group is used.

- Specification of the tool length compensation value

The tool length compensation value assigned to the number (offset
number) specified in the H code is selected from offset memory and
added to or subtracted from the moving command in the program.
A tool length compensation value is to be set in the offset memory
corresponding to an offset number.

- Performing tool length compensation along two or more axes

Tool length compensation B can be executed along two or more axes
when the axes are specified in two or more blocks.
By setting the parameter, cutter compensation C can also can be
executed along two or more axes when the axes are specified in two or
more blocks.

- Tool length compensation cancel

To cancel tool length compensation, specify G49 or H0. After G49 or
H0 is specified, the system immediately cancels the offset mode.

- 261 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.6 TOOL OFFSET

M
The programmed travel distance of the tool can be increased or
decreased by a specified tool offset value or by twice the offset value.
The tool offset function can also be applied to an additional axis.

Workpiece

Tool center path Programmed path

Tool

Format
G45 IP_ D_ ; Increase the travel distance by the tool
offset value
G46 IP_ D_ ; Decrease the travel distance by the tool
offset value
G47 IP_ D_ ; Increase the travel distance by twice the
tool offset value
G48 IP_ D_ ; Decrease the travel distance by twice the
tool offset value
G45 to 48 : One-shot G code for increasing or decreasing
the travel distance
IP_ : Command for moving the tool
D Code for specifying the tool offset value

- 262 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

T
Tool offset is used to compensate for the difference when the tool
actually used differs from the imagined tool used in programming
(usually, standard tool).

Standard tool

Actual tool

Offset amount
on X axis

Offset amount
on Z axis

- 263 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.7 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS

MACHINING
On a 5-axis machine having two rotary axes that turn a tool or table,
this function performs tool length compensation constantly, even in
the middle of a block, and exerts control so that the tool center point
moves along the specified path.
There are three different types of 5-axis machines - <1> those that
rotate the tool only, <2> those that rotate the table only, and <3> those
that rotate both the tool and table.
This function is intended to perform machining on such 5-axis
machines having rotary axes that turn a tool or table as well as three
orthogonal axes (X-, Y-, and Z-axes) by accomplishing tool length
compensation while changing the attitude of the tool. It enables the
tool center point to move along the specified path even if the tool's
direction changes with respect to the workpiece.
A coordinate system used for programming the tool center point
control is called the programming coordinate system.
A coordinate system fixed on the table can be used as the
programming coordinate system, which makes CAM programming
easy.
A workpiece coordinate system fixed on a machine coordinate system
can be employed as the programming coordinate system as well. On a
machine of mixed type or table rotation type, cutter compensation for
5-axis machining is programmed in the workpiece coordinate system.
So, to use cutter compensation for 5-axis machining and tool center
point control at the same time, the workpiece coordinate system must
be used as the programming coordinate system.
In any case, the cutting speed can be controlled easily because the tool
center point moves at a specified speed with respect to the table
(workpiece).
The commands that can be issued during tool center point control are
positioning (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation
(G02, G03), and helical interpolation (G02, G03).

Control
Tool length
point
vector

Tool center
Program-specified
point
path

Fig. 7.7 (a) Path of the tool center point

- 264 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.8 CUTTER COMPENSATION FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING

For machines having multiple rotary axes for freely controlling the
orientation of a tool axis, this function calculates a tool vector from
the positions of these rotary axes. The function then calculates a
compensation vector in a plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to
the tool vector and performs three-dimensional cutter compensation.
This function is classified into two types according to the way of
machining: tool side offset and leading edge offset.

• Tool side offset

This type of cutter compensation performs three-dimensional
compensation in a plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to
the tool vector.

Programmed path
Tool vector (path before compensation)

Cutter compensation vector

Tool center path

(path after
compensation)
Z
Y
Compensation Cutter compensation X
plane amount
Fig. 7.8 (a) Tool side offset

• Leading edge offset (for tool rotation type machine only)

Leading edge offset is a type of cutter compensation used when a
workpiece is machined with the edge of a tool. The tool is
automatically shifted by the amount of cutter compensation on
the line where a plane formed by a tool vector and tool
movement direction meets a plane perpendicular to the tool axis
direction.
Tool vector
Tool used

Reference
tool

Tool center path

(path after
compensation)

Programmed
Cutter path
compensation Cutter compensation
vector amount

Fig. 7.8 (b) Leading edge offset

- 265 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.9 Y-AXIS OFFSET

T
When the Y axis, one of the basic three axes, is used with a lathe
system, this function performs Y axis offset.
If the tool geometry / wear offset options are provided, both tool
geometry offset and tool wear offset are effective to Y axis offset.

NOTE
1 When Y-axis offset is used, the Y-axis must always
be a linear axis.
2 Y-axis offset does not allow direct input of tool
offset values.

- 266 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.10 CUTTER OR TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

- Cutter compensation
Use of this function can offset a programmed tool path by the tool
radius set in the CNC when machining is performed.
When the radius of the tool to be used for machining is measured and
set as the offset value in the CNC, the tool moves along the offset path
to cut a programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool diameter
changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify
the program.
Programmed
path Tool center path

- Tool nose radius compensation

Use of this function can offset a programmed tool path by the tool
nose radius set in the CNC when machining is performed. When a
machining profile is programmed using this function, and the radius of
the tool nose to be used for actual machining is measured and set as
the offset value in the CNC, the tool moves along the offset path to cut
the programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool nose radius
changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify
the program.

Workpiece

Tool center path

Tool nose

Machining profile

To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates
intersections of a straight line and a straight line, an arc and an arc,
and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has
to program a machining profile, therefore the programming can be
done very easily.
- 267 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

Format
G40 : Cutter or tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 : Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : left
G42 : Cutter or tool nose radius compensation : right

Explanation
- Cutter or tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 and G42 are commands to place the system in cutter or tool nose
radius compensation mode. G41 causes offset on the left side of the
tool advance direction, and G42 causes offset on the right side of the
tool advance direction. G40 cancels cutter or tool nose radius
compensation.

G42 X

Workpiece

G41 Z

- Imaginary tool nose (tool nose radius compensation)

The tool nose at position A in following figure does not actually exist.
The imaginary tool nose is required because it is usually more difficult
to set the actual tool nose radius center to the start point than the
imaginary tool nose.
Also when imaginary tool nose is used, the tool nose radius need not
be considered in programming. Programming can be performed in the
same way as when a tool having no tool nose radius is used.

A
Start point
Start point
When programmed using the tool When programmed using the
nose center imaginary tool nose

The position relationship when the tool is set to the start point is
shown in following figure.

- 268 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

The start point or reference position in the tool nose can be set in
offset memory in the same way as the tool nose radius compensation
value.

Tool nose setting points

2 6 1 2 6 1

7 0 5 7 0 5

3 3 8 4

2 6 2 6 1

5 7 0 5

3 8 4 3 8 4

- Specifying a compensation value and imaginary tool nose position (T code, T

series)
A compensation value and imaginary tool nose position can be set in
tool compensation memory.
By specifying an offset number in part of a T code, the cutter or tool
nose radius compensation values and imaginary tool nose position in
the tool compensation memory area corresponding to the offset
number are selected.

- Specifying a compensation value and imaginary tool nose position (D code, M

series)
A compensation value and imaginary tool nose position can be set in
tool compensation memory.
By specifying an offset number in a D code, the cutter or tool nose
radius compensation values and imaginary tool nose position in the
tool compensation memory area corresponding to the offset number
are selected.
An offset number can be specified in a H code by parameter setting.

- Plane selection (G17, G18, G19)

Cutter or tool nose radius compensation can be applied not only to the
XY, ZX, and YZ planes but also axes parallel to X, Y, and Z.
The target plane for cutter or tool nose radius compensation is selected
by specifying G17, G18, or G19.
G17 : Xp-Yp plane (Xp: X axis or its parallel axis)
G18 : Zp-Xp plane (Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis)
G19 : Yp-Zp plane (Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis)
An additional axis can be set as an axis parallel to the X-, Y-, or Z-
axis by parameter setting.

- 269 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Vector retention (G38)

In cutter or tool nose radius compensation, specifying G38 in offset
mode can maintain the compensation vector at the end point of the
previous block without calculation of the intersection.

- Corner circular interpolation (G39)

By specifying G39 in offset mode during cutter or tool nose radius
compensation, corner circular interpolation can be performed. The
radius of the corner circular interpolation equals the compensation
value.

- Interference check
A state in which the tool cuts a workpiece excessively is called
"interference". A check is made to see whether interference occurs as
a result of cutter or tool nose radius compensation.

Programmed path Cutter or tool nose radius center path

Cut Cut
excessively excessively

- 270 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.11 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER COMPENSATION

M
In cutter compensation, two-dimensional offsetting is performed for a
selected plane. In three-dimensional cutter compensation, the tool can
be shifted three-dimensionally when a three-dimensional offset
direction is programmed.

Format
- Start up (Starting three-dimensional cutter compensation)
When the following command is executed in the cutter
compensation cancel mode, the three-dimensional cutter
compensation mode is set:
G41 Xp_Yp_Zp_ I_ J_ K_D_ ;
Xp : X-axis or a parallel axis
Yp : Y-axis or a parallel axis
Zp : Z-axis or a parallel axis
I
J See "Explanation".
K
D : Code for specifying as the cutter compensation value
(1-3 digits) (D code)

- Canceling three-dimensional cutter compensation

When the following command is executed in the three-
dimensional cutter compensation mode, the cutter
compensation cancel mode is set:
- When canceling the three-dimensional cutter
compensation mode and tool movement at the same
time
G40 Xp_Yp_Zp_ ;
or
Xp_Yp_Zp_ D00 ;
- When only canceling the vector
G40;
or
D00;

- 271 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

- Selecting offset space

The three-dimensional space where three-dimensional
cutter compensation is to be executed is determined by
the axis addresses specified in the startup block
containing the G41 command. If Xp, Yp, or Zp is
omitted, the corresponding axis, X-, Y-, or Z-axis (the
basic three axis), is assumed.
(Example)
When the U-axis is parallel to the X-axis, the V-axis is
parallel to the Y-axis, and the W-axis is parallel to the Z-
axis
G41 X_I_J_K_D_; XYZ space
G41 U_V_Z_I_J_K_D_; UVZ space
G41 W_I_J_K_D_; XYW space

- 272 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

Explanation
- Three-dimensional cutter compensation vector
In three-dimensional cutter compensation mode, the following three-
dimensional cutter compensation vector is generated at the end of each
block:

Programmed path
Path after three-dimensional cutter compensation
Three-dimensional cutter compensation
vector

G40

G41

The three-dimensional cutter compensation vector is obtained from

the following expressions:
i×r
Vx= (Vector component along the Xp-axis)
p
j×r
Vy= (Vector component along the Yp-axis)
p
k×r
Vz= (Vector component along the Zp-axis)
p
In the above expressions, i, j, and k are the values specified in
addresses I, J, and K in the block. r is the offset value corresponding
to the specified offset number. p is the value obtained from the
following expression:
p = i2 + j 2 + k 2
When the user wants to program the magnitude of a three-dimensional
cutter compensation vector as well as its direction, the value of p in
the expressions of Vx, Vy, and Vz can be set as a constant in
parameter.
If the parameter is set to 0, however, p is determined as follows:
p = i2 + j 2 + k 2

- Specifying I, J, and K
Addresses I, J, and K must all be specified to start three-dimensional
cutter compensation. When even one of the three addresses is omitted,
two-dimensional cutter compensation C is activated. When a block
specified in three-dimensional cutter compensation mode contains
none of addresses I, J, and K, the same vector as the vector generated
in the previous block is generated at the end of the block.

- 273 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.12 CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR CYLINDRICAL

INTERPOLATION
The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the tool
center so that the tool axis always moves along a specified path on the
cylindrical surface, towards the rotary axis (cylindrical axis) of the
workpiece. The cutting point interpolation for cylindrical interpolation
function controls the tool so that the tangent of the tool and the cutting
surface of a contour always passes the rotation center of the workpiece.
This means that the cutting surface of the contour is always
perpendicular to the cylinder. With this function, the figure on the
cutting surface can always be kept constant regardless of the cutter
compensation value of the tool used.

Format
This command is specified in the same way as for the
conventional cylindrical interpolation function.
G07.1 IPr ; Circular interpolation mode on start
(enabling cylindrical interpolation)
:
G07.1 IP0 ; Circular interpolation mode cancel
IP : One rotary axis address
r : Cylinder radius of rotary axis
Specify each of G07.1 IPr; and G07.1 IP0; singly in a block.
G107 can also be specified.

Explanation
- Comparison with conventional circular interpolation
As shown in following figure, the tool is controlled in the offset axis
(Y-axis) direction that is perpendicular to the tool center and
workpiece rotation center.

Rotation Rotation
center Workpiece center

Tool

Y-axis Y-axis

Center of tool

Conventional cylindrical interpolation Cylindrical interpolation with this function

- 274 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.13 TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET AND TOOL WEAR OFFSET

T
Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are possible to divide the
tool offset to the tool geometry offset for compensating the tool shape
or tool mounting position and the tool wear offset for compensating
the tool nose wear. The tool geometry offset value and tool wear
offset value can be set individually. When these values are not
distinguished from each other, the total of the values is set as the tool
offset value.

Point on the program Point on the program

Imaginary tool
X axis
geometry Offset
offset amount
value on X axis
X axis
wear
offset
value
Z axis Z axis
wear geometry Offset
offset offset amount
value value on Z axis

If tool geometry offset and tool If tool geometry offset and tool
wear offset are distinguished wear offset are not
from each other distinguished from each other

- 275 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.14 SECOND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET

T
This function allows use of second geometry tool offset in addition to
tool offset in order to compensate for the difference in tool mounting
position or in selected position. Data that can be set for second
geometry tool offset is the X-, Z-, and Y-axis compensation values.
In contrast to this offset, the ordinary tool geometry offset is called the
first geometry tool offset.
It is possible to apply a tool offset value (tool wear offset + tool
geometry offset) in the reverse direction, using an appropriate signal.
This function may be used if the offset value differs even with a single
tool for a mechanical reason depending on the mounting position
(inside/outside) or the selected position (right/left).

NOTE
1 To use the second geometry tool offset, the
geometry and wear offset options are required.
2 To use the second geometry tool offset for the Y
axis, the Y axis offset option is required.

Format
- When assigning the same number as the tool selection number
to the geometry offset number
M (M code that enables second geometry tool offset) ;
T ;

Tool wear offset number

First geometry tool offset number or
first + second geometry tool offset numbers

- When assigning the same number as the wear offset number to

the geometry offset number
M (M code that enables second geometry tool offset) ;
T ;

Tool wear offset number + first geometry tool offset

number or wear + first + second geometry tool offset
numbers

- 276 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.15 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

The tool management function totally manages tool information
including information about tool offset and tool life.

A tool type number is specified with a T code. The tool type number
is any number the user can define freely. With tool type numbers,
tools can be grouped by various conditions such as life, compensation
value, and cutting conditions. When each type is assumed to have a
single tool, tool type numbers are equivalent to unique tool numbers.

For each tool, an information storage area is prepared in the CNC.

This area contains information such as a tool type number, tool life,
tool status (such as a breakage condition), tool compensation number,
spindle speed, cutting feedrate, and freely-definable customize data.
Such data is called tool management data.
A cartridge management table that links cartridge information and tool
management data is provided so that the CNC can manage the
cartridges of the machine and tool change operations. In addition,
areas for managing the tools in the spindle and tool standby positions
are prepared.

When a tool type number is specified using a T code command, a tool

that has the tool type number and the shortest life is searched for, and
the cartridge number and pot number of the location where the tool is
stored are output to the PMC. Then, a tool change operation using the
cartridge number and pot number is enabled by the PMC ladder
sequence.

Tool information in the CNC is managed by the tool management data

and cartridge management table (including the spindle management
table and standby position table).

NOTE
1 There are three options for this function: options
for up to 64 pairs, for 240 pairs, and for 1000 pairs.
Select one of the options according to the number
of tool management data pairs used.
2 Although customize data 0 to 4 are normally used,
expanded customize data 5 to 20 or 5 to 40 are
made available by using an option.

- 277 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.16 TOOL OFFSET VALUE COUNTER INPUT

T
A value displayed as a relative coordinate position can be set as an
offset value in tool compensation memory by using a soft key.
First, display the offset value screen. This screen also displays the
relative coordinate position. Next, select a reference tool, and
manually set it at the fixed point on the machine. Reset the relative
coordinates displayed on the screen to zero. Then, manually set the
tool to be measured at the same fixed point on the machine. At this
time, the relative coordinate position shows the difference between the
reference tool and the tool to be measured, and this value can be set as
the offset value.

7.17 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

M
The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset
memory as an offset value by a soft key.
Switch to the offset value display screen on the screen. Relative
positions are also displayed on this screen. Then select the reference
tool and set it at the fixed point on the machine by manual operation.
Reset the displayed relative position to zero. Set the tool for
measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by manual
operation. The relative position display at this point shows difference
between the reference tool and the tool measured and the relative
position display value is then set as offset amounts.

Reference
tool

This difference is set

as offset amount.

Fixed point

- 278 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.18 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

M
Difference between the coordinate value of tool when tool end has
reached the measuring position and coordinate value of the measuring
position is automatically measured, calculated, and added to the
currently set tool offset amount by CNC system. The machine must be
equipped with measuring devices, for example touch sensor, so that a
signal is sent when the tool end has reached the measuring position.

Format
G92 IP_ ; Sets the workpiece coordinate system.
(It can be set with G54 to G59.)
Hxx ; Specifies an offset number for tool length
compensation.
G90 G37 IP_ ; Absolute programming
G37 is valid only in the block in which it is specified.
IP_ indicates the X-, Y-, Z-, or fourth axis.

Explanation

A (Start point)
Rapid traverse Measurement position is commanded with G37

B (Deceleration position)

Measurement feedrate

C (Measurement position)
The tool stops when the approach end signal goe

0 X

Compensation value = (Current compensation value)

+ [(approach end signal detection position) - (coordinate value set by G37)]

When G37 is specified, the tool moves from the start point to
deceleration position by rapid traverse, then from the deceleration
position the tool decelerates to a parameter-set measurement federate
and moves until the approach end signal is issued from the measuring
device. That is, the tool movement stops when the tool tip has reached
the measurement position.
The difference between the coordinate value of the tool when it
reaches the measurement position and the coordinate value specified
in G37 is added to the tool length compensation value currently used.

- 279 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.19 TOOL LENGTH / WORKPIECE ZERO POINT

MEASUREMENT

M
Two functions have been provided to measure the tool length:
The automatic tool length measurement function automatically
measures the tool length at a programmed command (G37); The tool
length measurement function measures the tool length after the target
tool is manually moved until it touches the workpiece top surface or
other reference position. In addition to the two conventional functions,
tool length/workpiece zero point measurement has been provided to
simplify the procedure of tool length measurement. This function
facilitates the machining setup, resulting in a reduced machining setup
time. The function also makes it easy to measure the workpiece origin
offset.
With this function, the operator can program a T/M code or reference
position return by specifying a manual numerical command on the
tool length offset measurement screen.

- 280 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.20 AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET

T
Difference between the coordinate value of tool when tool end has
reached the measuring position and coordinate value of the measuring
position is automatically measured, calculated, and added to the
currently set tool offset amount by CNC system. The machine must be
equipped with measuring devices, for example touch sensor, so that a
signal is sent when the tool end has reached the measuring position.

Format
G36 X_ ; or G37 Z_ ;
G36 and G37 are effective only in the block in which these
commands are specified.
X_, Z_ : Absolute programming

Explanation
Execution of above command moves the tool at the rapid traverse rate
toward the measurement position, lowers the feedrate halfway, then
continues to move it until the approach end signal from the measuring
instrument is issued.
When the tool tip reaches the measurement position, the measuring
instrument outputs the measurement position reach signal to the CNC
which stops the tool.
The difference between the coordinate value of the tool when the
measurement position is reached and the coordinate value specified by
G36 or G37 is added to the currently used tool offset value.

- 281 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.21 DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED

T
This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a
workpiece diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI
keyboard.
First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or in the cross direction
manually. When a button on the machine operator’s panel is pressed
upon completion of the cutting, the workpiece coordinate value at that
time is recorded. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and
measure the diameter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction
or distance from the standard face if it was on the facing. (The
standard face is made as Z = 0.) When the measured value is entered
into the offset number desired plus 100, NC inputs the difference
between the input measured value and the coordinate value recorded
in NC, as the offset value of the offset number.
The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique
of directly inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is
used when the coordinate system planned in the program does not
match with the coordinate system set by the G92 command or by the
automatic coordinate system setting.
The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except
a difference of using the standard tool.

7.22 DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B

T
By installing the touch sensor and by manually making the tool
contact the touch sensor, it is possible to set the offset amount of that
tool automatically in the tool offset amount memory. It is also possible
to set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount automatically.

- 282 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

7.23 ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET

M
The rotary table dynamic fixture offset function saves the operator the
trouble of re-setting the workpiece coordinate system when the rotary
table rotates before cutting is started. With this function the operator
simply sets the position of a workpiece placed at a certain position on
the rotary table as a reference fixture offset. If the rotary table rotates,
the system automatically obtains a current fixture offset from the
angular displacement of the rotary table and creates a suitable
workpiece coordinate system. After the reference fixture offset is set,
the workpiece coordinate system is prepared dynamically, wherever
the rotary table is located.
The origin of the workpiece coordinate system is obtained by adding
the fixture offset to the offset from the workpiece reference point.

Y
Y
Y

X
X

F0
F
θ
θ0
X
Center of
rotary axis
C

Z
W

W : Workpiece origin offset value

θ0 : Reference angle
Machine coordinate F0 : Reference fixture offset value
zero point θ : Angle of rotary axis
F : Fixture offset value

Format
G54.2 Pn ;
n: Reference fixture offset value number (1 to 8)
When n = 0 is specified, fixture offset is canceled.

- 283 -
7.TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

7.24 CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH MANUAL

MOVE
In the following cases, this function allows a specified offset value
(tool length compensation value, cutter compensation value, or
workpiece origin offset value) to be changed by automatically adding
the amount of movement made along an axis by manual feed to the
value having the currently valid offset number or the workpiece
coordinate system.
• Performing rough machining and semifinish machining with one
tool
• Fine-tuning a tool length compensation or cutter compensation
value
• Fine-tuning the workpiece origin offset value that was set at the
setup time

Tool compensation value

Tool after change Tool before change

When, for example, the tip of a tool is broken, so the tool has to be
replaced with another one, these tools are different in length. In this
case, by performing a manual feed over a certain distance, the tool
compensation value is automatically added to adjust the tool length.

- 284 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION

8 ACCURACY COMPENSASION
FUNCTION

- 285 -
8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

8.1 BACKLASH COMPENSATION

Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a
compensation value in parameter, in detection units from 0 to ±9999
pulses for each axis.

8.2 BACKLASH COMPENSATION FOR EACH RAPID

TRAVERSE AND CUTTING FEED
Since different backlash compensation values can be used for cutting
feed and rapid traverse, the machining precision is improved.
Let the measured backlash amount at the time of cutting feed be A and
the measured backlash amount at rapid traverse be B. Then, the
output backlash compensation value varies according to the change in
feed (cutting feed and rapid traverse) and the change in movement
direction as listed in the following table:

Change in feed
Cutting feed Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Cutting feed
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Cutting feed Rapid traverse Cutting feed Rapid traverse
Change in
movement direction
Movement in same direction 0 0 ±α ±(-α)
Movement in opposite directions ±A ±B ±(B+α) ±(B+α)
• α= (A-B) / 2
• Signs (+ and –) indicate directions.

Stop in cutting feed

A →
Cutting
feed

Stop in rapid traverse

α α
B →
Cutting
feed

α : Excess of machine movement

- 286 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION

8.3 SMOOTH BACKLASH COMPENSATION

In ordinary backlash compensation, backlash compensation pulses are
all output at a position where the axis movement direction is inverted.

(Direction Axis movement

inverted) direction

Total backlash compensation value after

inversion of direction

Backlash
compensation
value

0
Travel distance after inversion of direction

Fig. 8.3 (a) Ordinary backlash compensation

In smooth backlash compensation, backlash compensation pulses are

output according to the distance from the position where the axis
movement direction is inverted, so fine backlash compensation can be
performed according to the machine characteristics.

(Direction Axis movement

inverted) direction

Total backlash compensation value after

inversion of direction

B2

B1

0
L1 L2
Travel distance after inversion of direction

B2 : Backlash compensation value

B1 : Compensation value in the 1st smooth backlash compensation stage
L1 : Distance for starting the 2nd smooth backlash compensation stage
L2 : Distance for ending the 2nd smooth backlash compensation stage

Fig. 8.3 (b) Smooth backlash compensation

- 287 -
8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

8.4 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

The errors caused by machine position, as pitch error of the feed
screw, can be compensated. This function is for better machining
precision.
As the offset data are stored in the memory as parameters,
compensations of dogs and settings can be omitted.
Offset intervals are set constant by parameters (per axis).

The total number of compensation points is as follows:

Total compensation points = 1536 points
Distribution to each axis can be determined arbitrarily (by parameter
setting). The number of compensation pulses at each position is as
follows:
Compensation pulses = (-128 to +127) × (magnification)
The compensation pulse unit is the same as the detection unit.
Magnification: 0 to 100, parameter setting (for each axis)

- 288 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION

8.5 INTERPOLATION TYPE PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

In stored pitch error compensation, the pitch error compensation pulse
at each pitch error compensation point is output in the interval
between that point and the next compensation point, as shown in the
figure below.

ε1
ε3
ε2

P0: Machine zero point P1 P2 P3

Pitch error compensation

point interval

(Setting the parameter)

ε1, ε2, ε3: Pitch error compensation amounts
P1, P2, P3: Pitch error compensation points

Fig. 8.5 (a) Stored pitch error compensation

In interpolation type pitch error compensation, the compensation

amount at each error compensation point is divided into pulses in the
interval between that point and the next point on the travel axis and
output, as shown in the figure below.

ε1 ε2 ε3

P0: Machine zero point P1 P2 P3

Pitch error compensation

point interval

(Setting the parameter)

ε1, ε2, ε3: Pitch error compensation amounts
P1, P2, P3: Pitch error compensation points

Fig. 8.5 (b) Interpolation type pitch error compensation

- 289 -
8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

8.6 BI-DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

In bi-directional pitch error compensation, different pitch error
compensation amounts can be set for travel in the positive direction
and that in the negative direction, so that pitch error compensation can
be performed differently in the two directions, in contrast to stored
pitch error compensation, which does not distinguish between the
directions of travel. In addition, when the direction of travel is
reversed, the compensation amount is automatically calculated from
the pitch error compensation data to perform compensation in the
same way as in backlash compensation. This reduces the difference
between the paths in the positive and negative directions.

8.7 EXTENDED BI-DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR

COMPENSATION
In bi-directional pitch error compensation, it is possible to use 0 to
1535, 3000 to 4535 points as the compensation points. By using this
function, the compensation points are extended and it is possible to
use 0 to 2559, 3000 to 5559 points as the compensation points.

8.8 PERIODICAL SECONDARY PITCH ERROR

COMPENSATION
When a rotary table is rotated using a gear, there are two cycles of the
occurrence of pitch errors: One cycle is the same as that of the rotation
of the rotary table while the other is the same as that of the rotation of
the gear for rotating the rotary table. To compensate for pitch errors of
these types, the compensation for the pitch error due to the rotation of
the gear is superimposed on the compensation for the pitch error per
rotation of the rotary table.

- 290 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION

8.9 INCLINATION COMPENSATION

By compensating for those errors in tools such as feed screws that
depend on the position of the machine system in detection units,
machining precision can be improved and mechanical life can be
prolonged. Compensation is performed along an approximate straight
line formed with a parameter-specified compensation point and a
compensation amount related to it.

Three approximate straight lines are formed with four parameter-

specified compensation points and compensation amounts related to
the respective compensation points. Inclination compensation is
carried out along these approximate straight lines at pitch error
compensation intervals. The inclination compensation amount is
added to the pitch error compensation amount.
0 1 2 3 60 61 126 127
<2>
... ...

<1> <3> <4>

Pitch error compensation point

c
a
γ
α
... ...
β ε

b Output of inclination compensation amount

To perform inclination compensation, stored pitch error compensation

must be set for the axis subject to compensation.
(1) Number of the most distant pitch error compensation point on the
- side
(2) Pitch error compensation point interval
(3) Number of the pitch error compensation point of the reference
position
(4) Number of the most distant pitch error compensation point on the
+ side
Inclination compensation parameters must be set.
a,b,c,d : Compensation point numbers.
α,β,γ,ε : Compensation amounts at compensation points a, b, c, and d
In above figure, a, b, c, and d are 1, 3, 60, and 126, respectively.
Unlike stored pitch error compensation, whose amount is set up for an
individual compensation point, an amount of inclination compensation
is calculated for individual compensation points by setting up four
typical points and compensation amounts for them.
Example)
In above figure, the compensation amounts at the individual
compensation points located between points a and b are (β-α)/(b-a).
- 291 -
8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

8.10 STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION

For a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightness
between axes may affect the machining accuracy. For this reason,
when an axis moves, other axes are compensated in detection units to
improve straightness. This improvement results in better machining
accuracy. As a moving axis (set in a parameter) moves, compensation
is applied to the compensation axis (set in a parameter) during pitch
error compensation for the moving axis.

- Pitch error compensation points on moving axis and compensation value

0 1 2 3 60 61 126 127
... ...

Stored pitch error compensation points on moving axis

c
a
γ
α
... ...
ε
β
d
b
Output timing of stored pitch error compensation of moving axis and output compensation pulses
a , b , c , d: Compensation position numbers of the moving axis (This number is originally a pitch error compensation
position number.)
α, β, γ, ε : Compensation amount for the compensation position number (Amount of compensation for compensation
axis)
From the current position of the moving axis, the compensation
amount for the corresponding compensation axis is calculated.
Compensation for the compensation axis is performed at the timing of
the output of pitch error compensation of the moving axis.
In the above figure, while the moving axis moves from compensation
point a to compensation point b, the compensation amount (β-α)/(b-a)
is output for the compensation axis at the output timing of pitch error
compensation of the moving axis.

NOTE
1 The straightness compensation function can be used after a moving axis and its
compensation axis have returned to the reference position.
2 To add the straightness compensation function option, the stored pitch error
compensation option is needed.
3 Straightness compensation data is superposed on stored pitch error compensation
data and output. Straightness compensation is performed at pitch error
compensation intervals.
4 Straightness compensation does not allow the moving axis to be used as a
compensation axis. To implement such compensation, use inclination
compensation.
- 292 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION

8.11 INTERPOLATION TYPE STRAIGHTNESS

COMPENSATION
The following two functions are available:
<1> Straightness compensation 128 points
<2> Interpolation type straightness compensation

8.11.1 Straightness Compensation 128 Points

In conventional straightness compensation, compensation data is set
for four compensation points with parameters to obtain compensation
data along an approximate straight line connecting the four points and
perform compensation based on the data.
This function allows data for up to 128 equally spaced compensation
points to be set in the same way as for ordinary pitch error
compensation.
By this function, fine compensation is also available for ”straightness
compensation.”
This function also allows up to six combinations of movement and
compensation axes for straightness compensation.

8.11.2 Interpolation Type Straightness Compensation

In conventional straightness compensation, for each interval between
pitch error compensation points set by parameters, the amount of all
straightness compensation at the compensation point is output and
compensation is performed.
This function equally divides the amount of compensation for each
interval between pitch error compensation points for compensation
data set using 128 straightness compensation points and outputs it as a
compensation pulse.

NOTE
To add the interpolation type straightness
compensation option, the stored pitch error
compensation option is also required.

- 293 -
8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

8.12 THREE-DIMENSIONAL ERROR COMPENSATION

In ordinary pitch error compensation, compensation is applied to a
specified compensation axis according to the positional information of
that axis. For example, pitch error compensation for the X-axis is
performed based on the X-axis positional information.
In three-dimensional error compensation, compensation is performed
for the current position for up to three compensation axes by
calculating compensation data (for three axes) from the compensation
amounts at eight periphery compensation points based on the internal
ratio in a compensation area (rectangular parallelepiped) including the
current position.

- Compensation calculation
P8 P7

P
P5 P6

P4 P3

P1
x P2

Let three compensation axes be X, Y, and Z (basic three axes), and the
coordinates of the current position be P(Px,Py,Pz).
Suppose a compensation space (rectangular parallelepiped) of which
vertexes are P1, P2, …, and P8. Also, let the compensation values for
the axes at each vertex be Cnx, Cny, and Cnz (n: 1 to 8).
Here, let the internal ratio of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes at P be x,y,z.
Cx, which is the compensation amount for the X-axis at P, is then
obtained for compensation as follows:
Cx = C1x ⋅ (1 − x )(1 − y )(1 − z ) + C 2 x ⋅ x (1 − y )(1 − z )
+ C 3x ⋅ xy (1 − z ) + C 4 x ⋅ (1 − x ) y (1 − z )
+ C 5 x ⋅ (1 − x )(1 − y ) z + C 6 x ⋅ x (1 − y ) z
+ C 7 x ⋅ xyz + C 8 x ⋅ (1 − x ) yz
Similarly, the compensation amounts for the Y-axis and Z-axis, which
are Cy and Cz, are also obtained for compensation.

- Changing a compensation amount by G10

The programmable parameter input function (G10) can also be used to
change data such as compensation data and compensation
magnification data from the part program during machining. This
function is useful for thermal growth compensation and so on.

- Number of compensation points

Up to 15625 compensation points (up to 25 points for each axis) can
be given.

- 294 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 8.ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION

8.13 THERMAL GROWTH COMPENSATION ALONG TOOL

VECTOR
When a five-axis machine having two rotation axes is used,
compensation for thermal expansion or shrinkage of the tool can be
applied along the tool vector specified with the rotation axes.
This function compensates for the thermal tool displacement set along
the tool vector by setting the displacement as the input signal from the
PMC or another unit.

Thermal
distribution

A
A

After thermal
shrinkage

Before
thermal C C
shrinkage Z

C
A
Y
X

Fig. 8.13 (a) Displacement in thermal growth compensation along tool

vector due to thermal shrinkage

- 295 -
9.EDITING OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

9 EDITING OPERATION

- 296 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 9.EDITING OPERATION

9.1 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF

REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS
The following lists the part program storage sizes and the numbers of
programs that can be registered for these storage sizes.

Number of Number of
Part Number of
registerable registerable
program registerable
programs programs
storage size programs
expansion 1 expansion 2
64Kbyte
63 120 120
(160m)
128Kbyte
63 250 250
(320m)
256Kbyte
63 500 500
(640m)
512Kbyte
63 1000 1000
(1280m)
1Mbyte
63 1000 2000
(2560m)
2Mbyte
63 1000 4000
(5120m)
4Mbyte
63 1000 4000
(10240m)
8Mbyte
63 1000 4000
(20480m)

NOTE
The number of registerable programs includes the
number of folders.

- 297 -
9.EDITING OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

9.2 PROGRAM EDITING

Following program editing operations are possible.

1 Creating new programs

2 Deleting programs
• Deleting one program
• Deleting specified programs at a time
• Deleting all programs in a folder at a time

3 Copying and moving programs

Copying and moving programs from a folder to folder

4 Editing a word
• Inserting a word or block
• Overwriting a word
• Replacing a word or address
• Deleting a word or block
• Copying, deleting, and pasting a specified range

Editing characters
• Inserting characters
• Overwriting characters
• Replacing a character string
• Deleting characters
• Copying, deleting, and pasting a specified range

6 Search
• Searching for a program
• Searching for a word or address
• Repeating search

7 Rearranging program memory contents

An NC program on program memory is first stored in a
continuous storage area. Editing the NC program divides the NC
program storage area into several separate blocks, and as editing
is repeated, these blocks are further divided into smaller blocks.
When the NC program is divided into small blocks, the memory
operation processing speed may decrease, or the program
memory space used may increase excessively. So, program
memory must be rearranged to store the program in a continuous
area again.

- 298 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 9.EDITING OPERATION

9.3 PROGRAM PROTECT

The following functions are provided to protect programs:

1 Protection by edit/display disable attribute

This function sets an edit or display disable attribute for
programs and folders to disable editing or display of the contents
of the programs and folders. When editing or display of a
program is disabled, external output of the program is also
disabled.

2 Protection by parameter
By using a password parameter and a keyword parameter, this
function provides a lock for a parameter that protects programs
with program Nos. O9000 to O9999, and programs and folders
with the edit or display disable attribute.
When locked (the password ≠ the keyword), the parameter for
protection cannot be set to 0. In this case, program protection for
programs with program Nos. O9000 to O9999, and programs and
folders with the edit or display disable attribute cannot be
released unless the keyword is set correctly.
The values set in both the password and keyword parameters are
not indicated. The lock is released by setting the keyword
parameter to the same value as the value set in advance in the
password parameter. When 0 is indicated in the password
parameter, the password parameter is not yet set.

3 Key and program encryption

See "KEY AND PROGRAM ENCRYPTION" in the next
section.

9.4 KEY AND PROGRM ENCRYPTION

Program contents can be protected by setting parameters for

encryption and for the program security range.

1 When the password and security range parameters are specified,

the display, editing, and input/output operations are disabled for
the programs within the security range.
2 The programs in the security range can be encrypted before being
output. Once encrypted, the programs cannot be decrypted. In
addition, encrypted programs can be input directly.

- 299 -
9.EDITING OPERATION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

9.5 EXTENDED PART PROGRAM EDITING

The following operations, which were enabled by the conventional
extended part program editing function, can now be performed
without the optional function:

• Replacement of words and addresses

• Cut and paste of words and characters
• Cancellation of edit operations
• Copy and move of programs

- 300 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10 SETTING AND DISPLAY

In the subsequent explanation in this chapter, the screen descriptions
are provided based on a 10.4" LCD of the 12-soft-key type.

- 301 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.1 STATUS DISPLAY

The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program
editing state are displayed on the bottom right on the screen allowing
the operator to readily understand the operation condition of the
system.
If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does
not accept the operation and a warning message is displayed. This
prevents invalid data setting and input/output errors.

Explanation

(9) DATA IS OUT OF RANGE

(1)

(2) (3) (4) (6) (7) (8)

(5) : (10) :
(5) is displayed in the (10) is displayed at the
area for (3) and (4). position where (8) is
now displayed.
Fig. 10.1 (a) Positions of status display items

(1) Current mode

(2) Automatic operation status
(3) Axis moving status/dwell status
(4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed
(5) Emergency stop or reset status
(6) Alarm status
(7) Current time
(8) Program editing status
(9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation
(10) Path name

10.2 CLOCK FUNCTION

Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display

screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day.
The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The
time will be told through the window at PMC side.

- 302 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.3 CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

The current position and the remaining distance in the relative,
workpiece, and machine coordinate systems are displayed.

Fig. 10.3 (a) Current position (absolute coordinate) screen

Fig. 10.3 (b) Current position (relative coordinate) screen

- 303 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.4 PROGRAM DISPLAY

The contents of a program being edited or executed are displayed.
In addition, a list of the file names of programs registered in program
memory is displayed. The list screen displays the memory size used,
the remaining memory size, and the size and date of update for each
program are indicated.

Fig. 10.4 (a) Screen displaying a program being executed

Fig. 10.4 (b) Screen displaying a program being edited

- 304 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

Fig. 10.4 (c) Program folder screen

- 305 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.5 PARAMETER SETTING AND DISPALY

Parameter settings are displayed.

Fig. 10.5 (a) Parameter screen

- 306 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.6 ALARM DISPLAY

The currently issued alarm number and a brief description of the alarm
are displayed.

Fig. 10.6 (a) Alarm screen

- 307 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.7 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY

Information about up to 60 alarms including the latest alarm that have
been issued in the CNC is stored and displayed on the screen.
The following information is displayed for each alarm:
(1) Date and time of alarm issuance
(2) Alarm type
(3) Alarm number
(4) Alarm message (This item may not appear for some alarms.)

Fig. 10.7 (a) Alarm history screen

10.8 OPERATOR MESSAGE HISTORY DISPLAY

A history of operator messages can be stored. The stored history can

be referenced on the operator message history screen.

- 308 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.9 OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY

A history of events such as operations performed by the operator,

alarms issued, and external operator messages can be recorded and
referenced, and history data can be output.
The following data is recorded as history data:
(1) MDI key operations performed by the operator
(2) On/off status transition of I/O signals (X, Y, G, and F)
(3) Alarms issued
(4) Time stamp (date and time)
(5) External operator message

Recorded data can be referenced on the operation history screen.

In addition to display of history data, search, erasure, and output to
external I/O devices can be performed for history data. While this
screen is being displayed, no history data is recorded.

Fig. 10.9 (a) Operation history screen

- 309 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.10 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY

On the current position screen, operation times (run time and cycle
time) and the number of machined parts are displayed. (Area indicated
by )

Fig. 10.10 (a) Current position screen

The cumulative value of automatic operation time, the cumulative

value of cutting time, and timer values that can be set freely can be
modified and preset by MDI.

Fig. 10.10 (b) Setting (timer) screen

- 310 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.11 ACTUAL CUTTING FEEDRATE DISPLAY

The actual machine federate per minute can be indicated on the
current position screen and program check screen by parameter setting.
(Area indicated by )

Fig. 10.11 (a) Current position screen

Fig. 10.11 (b) Program check screen

- 311 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.12 DISPLAY OF SPINDLE SPEED AND T CODE AT ALL

SCREENS
The spindle speed calculated from feedback pulses from the position
coder mounted on the spindle and a T code specified by program
execution can always displayed by parameter setting.

NOTE
For a machining center system, the threading and
synchronous cutting options are required to display
the actual spindle speed.

10.13 DIRECTORY DISPLAY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE

A list of file names in an external I/O device can be displayed on the

screen (directory display).
File names that can be displayed in the directory are up to 17
characters long.

When a part program stored in program memory is written to an

external I/O device, a program number can be assigned as the file
name. When data other than part programs is written, a name specific
to the data can be assigned.

10.14 OPTIONAL PATH NAME DISPLAY

An arbitrary character string can be displayed as a path name
indicated in the status display field by parameter setting. Up to seven
characters including numerical, alphabetical, and katakana characters
and symbols can be displayed.

- 312 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.15 OPERATING MONITOR SCREEN

Load values (torque values) of spindle and servo motors are displayed
in the bar graph form on the screen.
In the bar graph display, the latest sampling values are indicated. By
setting the rated load value of the motor corresponding to each load
meter in a parameter in advance, the load meter shows 100% when the
load value equals the rated load value.

Fig. 10.15 (a) Operating monitor screen

- 313 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.16 SERVO SETTING SCREEN

Necessary parameters for basic servo motor tuning and the status
monitor are displayed for each axis.

10.16.1 Servo Setting Screen

This screen summarizes necessary parameters for initial standard
setting of servo motors. Parameter setting is also possible on this
screen.

Fig. 10.16.1 (a) Servo parameter setting screen

- 314 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.16.2 Servo Motor Tuning Screen

This screen summarizes necessary parameters for basic servo motor
tuning and the status monitor for each axis.

Fig. 10.16.2 (a) Servo motor tuning screen

- 315 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.17 SPINDLE SETTING SCREEN

Spindle-related parameters are set and displayed. Data other than
parameters can also be displayed. Spindle setting, spindle tuning, and
spindle monitor screens are provided.

10.17.1 Spindle Setting Screen

This screen summarizes necessary parameters for initial spindle
setting.
Parameters can also be set.

Fig. 10.17.1 (a) Spindle setting screen

- 316 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.17.2 Spindle Tuning Screen

This screen summarizes necessary parameters for basic spindle tuning
and the status monitor.

Fig. 10.17.2 (a) Spindle tuning screen

10.17.3 Spindle Monitor Screen

This screen summarizes spindle information.

Fig. 10.17.3 (a) Spindle monitor screen

- 317 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.18 SERVO WAVEFORM DISPLAY

Servo data (including the error amount, torque amount, and the
number of distributed pulses) and the waveforms of signals transferred
between the CNC and PMC can be displayed.

Fig. 10.18 (a) Wave for diagnosis screen

- 318 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.19 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN

On the maintenance information screen, a history of maintenance
operations can be recorded.
The following operations can be performed:
• Input of alphabetical characters by MDI (En-size kana characters
can be input only in Japanese display mode.)
• Reference of the record screen by line-by-line scroll
• Input/output of maintenance information after editing
• Write and save in FLASH-ROM
• Display of em-size code (Shift-JIS) (Input is enabled for read
only.)

- 319 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.20 SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL

The functions of switches on the machine operator's panel are made
available by using the MDI panel. This means that functions such as a
mode selection and selection of jog feedrate override can be made by
operating the MDI panel, so corresponding switches on the machine
operator's panel need not be used.
This function is enabled only when the software operator's panel
screen is displayed. The user can make selection operations by
moving the cursor by using the cursor keys while checking the screen.
The following functions can be performed:
A : Mode selection
B : Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse
C : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of
manual pulse magnification
D : Jog federate, federate override, rapid traverse override
E : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
F : Protect key
G : Feed hold
H : General purpose switch
A parameter that enables and disables MDI operations is provided for
each of operation groups A to G indicated above.

Fig. 10.20 (a) Software operator's panel screen (1/2)

- 320 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

Fig. 10.20 (b) Software operator's panel screen (2/2)

10.21 SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL PURPOSE

SWITCH
This function allows the user to assign arbitrary signals to general
purpose switches 1 to 8 on the software operator's panel.
In software operator's panel general purpose switch expansion, general
purpose switches 1 to 16 can be used.

- 321 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.22 MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY

The following 15 languages are prepared as the display languages.
(For languages other than English, options are required.)
English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese
(traditional), Chinese (simplified), Korean, Portuguese, Polish, Dutch,
Swedish, Hungarian, and Czech
When a desired language is selected and set on the language screen,
the display language can be changed immediately.

Fig. 10.22 (a) Language screen

10.23 DATA PROTECTION KEY

To protect various types of data in the CNC, data protection keys can
be provided for the machine. Depending on the type of the data to be
protected, the following four input signals are provided:
• KEY1
Enables input of tool offset values and workpiece origin offset
values.
• KEY2
Enables input of settings.
• KEY3
Enables program registration and editing.
• KEY4
Enables input of PMC data.

- 322 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.24 PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS

Eight operation levels can be set for CNC operations, and eight protect
levels can be set for various types of CNC data.
When CNC data is modified or output externally, the operation level
and protect level are compared to determine whether to allow the
modification or external output.

Fig. 10.24 (a) Operation level setting screen

Fig. 10.24 (b) Protect level setting screen

- 323 -
10.SETTING AND DISPLAY NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

10.25 PARAMETER SET SUPPORTING SCREEN

The parameter set supporting screen allows parameter setting and
tuning for the following purposes:
1 Displaying a list of the least required parameters for machine
startup so that the machine can be started easily
2 Displaying a servo tuning screen, spindle tuning screen, and
machining parameter tuning screen to allow smooth tuning

On this screen, the following items can be set and tuned:

Support of startup
• System setting
• Axis setting
• FSSB (amplifier)
• FSSB (axis)
• Servo setting
• Spindle setting
• Miscellany

Support of tuning
• Servo tuning
• Spindle tuning
• AICC tuning

Fig. 10.25 (a) Menu screen for parameter tuning

- 324 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 10.SETTING AND DISPLAY

10.26 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING FUNCTION

In AI contour control, when speed-oriented and precision-oriented
parameter sets are set, and a precision level is set according to the
machining condition such as rough machining or finish machining on
the precision level selection screen or with a programmed command,
parameters that meet the condition can be calculated automatically for
machining.

Fig. 10.26 (a) Precision level selection screen

Fig. 10.26 (b) Machining parameter setting screen

- 325 -
11.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

11 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

- 326 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 11.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

11.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher
interface.

• Program
• Tool compensation value
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
• Custom macro common variable
• Workpiece coordinate system setting data
• Operation history data (output only)
• Tool management data

Usually, the screen is switched according to the type of data to be

input from or output to an external device; for example, a parameter
screen is used for parameter input/output, and a program screen is
used for program input/output. However, a single ALL I/O screen can
be used to input and output programs, parameters, offset data, and
macro variables.

- 327 -
11.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

11.2 FAST DATA SERVER

The fast data server performs machining by storing NC programs in
the built-in ATA flash card.

• Machining programs can be transferred between the personal

computer and data server.
• Memory operation using macro statements and sub programs
called from the ATA flash card can be performed. DNC
operation from the personal computer is also possible.
• Programs stored in the ATA flash card can be edited.

While operation is performed using the data server operation, other

Ethernet functions can be used.

- 328 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 11.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

11.3 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

The external data input function sends data to the CNC from an
external unit such as a machine to perform desired operation.
The external data input function includes the following capabilities:
• External tool compensation
• One touch macro call
• External workpiece number search
• External program number search
• External workpiece coordinate system shift
• External machine zero point shift
• External alarm message
• External operator message
• Assignment of machined parts count and required parts count
data

11.3.1 External Tool Offset

The external tool offset function modifies the tool offset value of an
offset number specified externally by a program.
By input signal specification, an input tool offset value can be checked
to see:
• Whether the tool offset value is an absolute value or incremental
value
• Whether the tool offset value is to be used for geometry
compensation or wear compensation
• Whether the tool offset value is a cutter compensation value or
tool length compensation value
When a machine is equipped with an automatic tool/workpiece
measurement function, the offset value can be corrected by inputting
an error from the correct value into the CNC with this function. The
specifiable external tool offset range is 0 to ±7999 in the least
command increment.

11.3.2 One Touch Macro Call

By pressing a switch on the machine, the following three operations
can be performed with minimum ladder modifications:
• Switching to the MEM mode
• Execution of macro programs stored in memory
• Return to the mode before execution. The program selected
before execution is automatically selected.
This function is enabled only in the reset state. This means that this
function cannot be used during automatic operation (during automatic
operation halt and automatic operation stop periods as well).

- 329 -
11.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

11.3.3 External Workpiece Number Search

By specifying a workpiece number from 01 to 31 through an external
unit such as a machine, the program corresponding to the workpiece
number can be selected.
A workpiece number is used as a program number without
modification. For example, when workpiece number 12 is specified,
program number O0012 is selected.

11.3.4 External Program Number Search

When a program number from 1 to 9999 is externally input into the
CNC, this function selects the program from the CNC memory.
When a machine with a function for automatically loading several
types of workpieces is used, this function can automatically select and
execute a program suitable for a workpiece.
By parameter setting, external program number search operation can
be canceled when the CNC is reset.

11.3.5 External Workpiece Coordinate System Shift

The external workpiece coordinate system shift function shifts a
workpiece coordinate system according to an externally specified shift
amount.
When an input signal is specified, the input shift amount is used as an
external workpiece origin offset to shift the workpiece coordinate
system. This shift amount is not an incremental value but an absolute
value at all times.
The specifiable shift amount range is 0 to ±7999 in the least command
increment.

11.3.6 External Machine Zero Point Shift

The external machine zero point shift function shifts the origin of the
machine coordinate system according to an externally specified shift
amount. This shift amount is not an incremental value but an absolute
value at all times.
The specifiable shift amount range is 0 to ±9999 in the detection unit.
The amount of the machine moved when a shift amount is input is the
difference from the previous shift amount. This function can
compensate for a machine coordinate system shift due to mechanical
displacement.

- 330 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 11.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

11.3.7 External Alarm Message

After placing the CNC in the alarm state by sending an alarm number
externally, this function additionally sends an external alarm message
to the CNC for display on the CNC screen. The alarm state is
canceled also by using external data.
Up to four alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a time. Alarm
numbers from 0 to 999 can be sent. When displaying an alarm
number, the CNC adds 1000 to the alarm number to distinguish from
general alarm numbers. For one alarm number, a message not longer
than 32 characters can be sent.

11.3.8 External Operator Message

This function sends an external operator message to the CNC for
display on the CNC screen.
A message is sent after a message number (0 to 999).
Up to four messages, each not longer than 255 characters, can be
displayed at a time.
Messages for numbers 0 to 99 are displayed together with their
numbers on the screen. When a message number is displayed, 2000 is
added to the message number for distinction.
Messages for numbers 100 to 999 are not displayed together with their
numbers on the screen, but the messages only are displayed on the
screen.
Operator messages are cleared using external data.

11.3.9 Assignment Of Required Parts Count And Machined Parts

Count
Each of the required parts count and machined parts count can be
externally preset to a value in the range 0 to 9999.

- 331 -
11.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

11.4 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT

By using the memory card interface located on the left side of the
LCD display unit, information written on the memory card can be read
into the CNC, or data can be written to the memory card.
The following types of data can be input/output:
• Program
• Offset data
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation data
• Custom macro common variable
• Workpiece coordinate system setting data
• Operation history data
• Tool management data

11.5 SCREEN HARD COPY

The information displayed on the screen of the display unit can be
output as bit-mapped format data to the memory card. Note, however,
that only freeze-screen information can be output.
Bit-mapped format data created with this function can be referenced
using a device such as a personal computer.

11.6 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER

When the servo amplifier unit is used as an additional (slave) axis of

the CNC, the power mate CNC manager enables the display and
setting of data from the CNC. Up to eight slave units can be connected.
The power mate CNC manager supports the following functions:
• Current position display (absolute/machine coordinate)
• Parameter display and setting
• Diagnosis
• System configuration screen
• Alarm

- 332 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 12.INTERFACE FUNCTION

12 INTERFACE FUNCTION

- 333 -
12.INTERFACE FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

12.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET

The 100-Mbps Ethernet is supported as standard. By connecting the
CNC with a personal computer, NC programs can be transferred, the
machine can be controlled, machine operation status can be monitored,
and the machine can be adjusted and maintained.

• NC program transfer using the FTP transfer function

By CNC screen operations, NC programs can be transferred.
The personal computer uses FTP server software, so that NC
programs can be transferred to and from a host computer
operating not in the Windows environment.

• Machine control and monitoring using FOCAS2/Ethernet

By using i CELL and CIMPLICITY, a system for controlling and
monitoring the machine can be created. Moreover, user-specific
application software can be created by directly using the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

• Machine adjustment, maintenance ladder program maintenance,

and servo motor adjustment using FANUC LADDER-III and the
servo guide can be performed online.

12.2 FAST ETHERNET

As an option board, the fast Ethernet board can be installed.

The fast Ethernet supports up to 20 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients
connected to one CNC. (The embedded Ethernet supports up to 5
FOCAS2/Ethernet clients.) This function enables high-speed and
simultaneous data transfer to and from multiple personal computers.
This function is suitable for building a production system that
exchanges information with machining lines and factory host
computers.

- 334 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 13.PMC

13 PMC

- 335 -
13.PMC NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

13.1 FIRST/SECOND/THIRD PMC PATH

Independent sequence programs of each PMC path are executed.
The sequence programs of each PMC path basically have their
independent memory space. The E addresses represent a memory
space shared by the PMC paths and can be used as the interface
among the PMC paths.
When the second or third PMC function is to be specified, the I/O
Link point expansion option described in the next section is required.

1st PMC path 2nd PMC path 3rd PMC path

X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-,

F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-,
M0-, N0-, M0-, N0-, M0-, N0-,
R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-,
T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-,
K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-,
P1-, L1- P1-, L1- P1-, L1-

Shared memory (E0 and up)

Sequence programs and PMC parameters for a PMC path can be

updated and preserved independent of other PMC paths.

NOTE
The first path PMC function is the basic option
function.
The second and third path PMC functions are
option functions.

- 336 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 13.PMC

13.2 I/O Link EXPANSION SECOND/THIRD/FOURTH CHANNEL

The number of DI/DO signal points that can be input/output on the I/O
Link is extended.
With each channel added, the number of DI signals and the number of
DO signals that can be input/output can be extended by 1024
respectively. Each channel can be specified independently.

By combining this function with the multi-path PMC function, a

system can be configured freely as described below.
PMC addresses to and from which signals are transferred on the I/O
Link can be allocated to each channel by parameter setting.

CNC PMC

Machine 1st PMC Channel 1 Operator's panel

control path for machine
group control, etc.

Channel 2 Operator's panel

for machine
control, etc.

2nd PMC Channel 3 Peripheral

path equipment, etc.

Loader 3rd PMC Channel 4 Operator's panel

control path for loader, etc.
group

NOTE
The maximum number of DI/DO points per
channel is 1024 points/1024 points.

- 337 -
13.PMC NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

13.3 NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION

The contents of the extension relay area (E address area) of the PMC
memory are preserved. The contents of the memory are not lost even
when the power to the CNC is turned off.
When the multi-path PMC function is used, the E address area
represents a shared memory space, so that the values of E addresses
updated by all PMC paths are preserved.

NOTE
The values of the E addresses of the PMC for the
dual check safety function are not preserved.

- 338 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 14.OTHERS

14 OTHERS

- 339 -
14.OTHERS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

14.1 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL

14.1.1 NC Ready Signal

This signal is sent to the machine side when CNC power is on and
control becomes possible. Sending of this signal will be stopped when
CNC power is turned off.

14.1.2 Servo Ready Signal

This signal is sent to the machine side when the servo system becomes
operatable. Axes necessary to be braked must be braked when this
signal is not sent.

14.1.3 Automatic Operation Signal

This signal is sent out when it is under automatic operation.

14.1.4 Automatic Operation Start Lamp Signal

This signal is sent out when automatic operation is being activated.

14.1.5 Feed Hold Signal

This signal is sent out when operation is held by feed hold.

14.1.6 Reset Signal

This signal is sent out to show that the CNC has been reset.

14.1.7 NC Alarm Signal

This signal is transmitted when the CNC comes under an alarm status.

- 340 -
B-63942EN/01 NC FUNCTION 14.OTHERS

14.1.8 Distribution End Signal

This signal is sent out when pulse distribution of the M, S, T, or
second auxiliary function has ended, so that they can be used after
move of the commanded block ends.

14.1.9 Rewinding Signal

This signal shows that main program in memory is rewinding.

14.1.10 Inch Input Signal

This signal shows that input is done under inch input mode (G20).

14.1.11 Cutting Signal

This signal shows that the move command is done under cutting.

14.1.12 In-position Signal

This signal shows that an axis is under in-position status. This signal
is output for all axes.

14.1.13 Threading Signal

This signal shows that the machine is under threading mode (G33) or
threading cycle (T series).

14.1.14 Tapping Signal

This signal is output to show that the machine is under tapping mode
(G63) or tapping cycle (G74 or G84 for M series), (G84 or G88 for T
series) in the canned cycle is under operation.

14.1.15 Axis Moving Signal

This signal shows that an axis is moving. This signal is sent out for
each axis.
This move signal can be combined with the interlock signal to
automatically clamp and unclamp the machine, or control on/off of the
lubricating oil.

- 341 -
14.OTHERS NC FUNCTION B-63942EN/01

14.1.16 Axis Moving Direction Signal

This signal is output to show move direction of each axis. This signal
is output for each axis.

14.1.17 Rapid Traverse Signal

This signal shows that the move command is done under rapid
traverse.

14.1.18 Constant Surface Speed Signal

This signal shows that the machine is under constant surface speed
control mode (G96).

14.1.19 DI Status Output Signal

To inform the exterior of the states of software operator’s panel,
which are set via MDI panel, and machine operator’s panel, following
DI state output signals are sent.

• Mode-select check signal

• Single-block check signal
• Manual absolute check signal
• Dry-run check signal
• Machine-lock check signal
• Display-lock check signal
• Auxiliary-function-lock check signal
• Optional block-skip check signal
• Mirror-image check signal

- 342 -
APPENDIX
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX A.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

A
Linear axis
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

- In case of millimeter input, feed screw is millimeter

Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Least command increment
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
(mm)
Max. programmable
±999,999.99 ±999,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999
dimension (mm)
Max. rapid traverse
999,000 999,000 100,000 10,000 1,000
(mm/min)*1
Feedrate range (mm/min)*1 0.01 to 999,000 0.001 to 999,000 0.0001 to 100,000 0.00001 to 10,000 0.000001 to 1,000
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
Incremental feed (mm/step)
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001
Tool compensation amount
0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999 0 to ±9,999.9999 0 to ±9,999.99999 0 to ±999.999999
(mm)*2
Backlash compensation
0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)*3
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999 0 to 99,999.9999 0 to 9,999.99999 0 to 999.999999

- In case of inch input, feed screw is millimeter

Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Least input increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Least command increment
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
(inch)
Max. programmable
±39,370.078 ±39,370.0787 ±3,937.00787 ±393.700787 ±39.3700787
dimension (inch)
Max. rapid traverse
999,000 999,000 100,000 10,000 1,000
(mm/min)*1
Feedrate range (inch/min)*1 0.001 to 96,000 0.0001 to 9,600 0.00001 to 4,000 0.000001 to 400 0.0000001 to 40
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Incremental feed (inch/step)
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
Tool compensation amount
0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999 0 to ±999.99999 0 to ±999.999999 0 to ±99.9999999
(inch)*2
Backlash compensation
0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)*3
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999 0 to 99,999.9999 0 to 9,999.99999 0 to 999.999999

- 345 -
A.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

- In case of inch input, feed screw is inch

Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Least input increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
Least command increment
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
(inch)
Max. programmable
±99,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999 ±99.9999999
dimension (inch)
Max. rapid traverse
96,000 9,600 4,000 400 40
(inch/min)*1
Feedrate range (inch/min)*1 0.001 to 96,000 0.0001 to 9,600 0.00001 to 4,000 0.000001 to 400 0.0000001 to 40
0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Incremental feed (inch/step)
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
Tool compensation amount
0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999 0 to ±999.99999 0 to ±999.999999 0 to ±99.9999999
(inch)*4
Backlash compensation
0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)*3
*4
Dwell (sec) 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999 0 to 99,999.9999 0 to 9,999.99999 0 to 999.999999

- In case of millimeter input, feed screw is inch

Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Least command increment
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
(mm)
Max. programmable
±999,999.99 ±999,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999
dimension (mm)
Max. rapid traverse
96,000 9,600 4,000 400 40
(inch/min)*1
*1
Feedrate range (mm/min) 0.01 to 999,000 0.001 to 999,000 0.0001 to 100,000 0.00001 to 10,000 0.000001 to 1,000
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
Incremental feed (mm/step)
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001
Tool compensation amount
0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999 0 to ±9,999.9999 0 to ±9,999.99999 0 to ±999.999999
(mm)*2
Backlash compensation
0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
amount (pulses)*3
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999 0 to 99,999.9999 0 to 9,999.99999 0 to 999.999999

- 346 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX A.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

- Rotary axis

Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Least input increment (deg) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Least command increment (deg) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
Max. programmable dimension
±999,999.99 ±999,999.999 ±99,999.9999 ±9,999.99999 ±999.999999
(deg)
Max. rapid traverse (deg/min)*1 999,000 999,000 100,000 10,000 1,000
*1
Feedrate range (deg/min) 0.01 to 999,000 0.001 to 999,000 0.0001 to 100,000 0.00001 to 10,000 0.000001 to 1,000
0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001
0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
Incremental feed (deg/step)
1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01 0.001
Tool compensation amount
0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999 0 to ±9,999.9999 0 to ±9,999.99999 0 to ±999.999999
(deg)*2
Backlash compensation amount
0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
(pulses)*3
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999 0 to 99,999.9999 0 to 9,999.99999 0 to 999.999999

NOTE
*1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations
depending on CNC interpolation capacity. As a
whole system, limitations depending on servo
system must also be considered.
*2 Value applied when the offset extension function is
used.
If the mode of input is switched between inch input
and metric input, the maximum compensation value
that can be set at inch input time is (maximum
compensation value) × 1/25.4. If a value exceeding
this value is specified at inch input time, the
compensation value is not converted to a metric
value correctly when the mode of input is switched
to metric input.
*3 The unit is the detection unit.
*4 Depends on the increment system of the axis at in
address X.

- 347 -
B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

B LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM

FORMAT
In the list, the following symbols are used:
• For machining center system
x : 1st basic axis (X),
y : 2nd basic axis (Y),
z : 3rd basic axis (Z)
• For lathe system
x : 1st basic axis (X),
z : 2nd basic axis (Z),
coded using G code system A
IP_ : presents a combination of arbitrary axis addresses using X, Y, Z,
A, B, C, U, V, and W (such as X_ Y_ Z_ A_).
α : One arbitrary address
β : One arbitrary address
Xp : X axis or its parallel axis
Yp : Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp : Z axis or its parallel axis

- 348 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT

(1/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Positioning IP G00 IP_ ;
(G00)
Start point
Linear interpolation IP G01 IP_ F_;
(G01)
Start point
Circular interpolation • For machining center system
(G02, G03) Start point
G02 R_
G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_

R G02
J G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
I
(x, y)
G03 G02 R_
(x, y) G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 J_ K_

• For lathe system

R G02 R_
J X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
I
Start point
Helical interpolation z G02 R_
(G02, G03) G17 X_ Y_ α_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_

G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ α_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
Start
point (xyz)
G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ α_ F_ ;
(x, y) G03 J_ K_

In case of G03 on X-Y plane α : Any axis other than circular

interpolation axes.
Involute interpolation Yp G02.2
End point G17 Xp_ Yp_ I_ J_ R_ F_ ;
(G02.2, G03.2) Start G03.2
Pe
point
I
Ps Po
J G02.2
0 R G18 Zp_Xp_ K_ I_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2
Base circle
G02.2
Xp G19 Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2
(In case of X-Y plane)
Exponential interpolation A (Rotary axis) Positive rotation
(G02.3, G03.3) G02.3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_;
Negative rotation
∆A
G03.3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_;

X (Linear axis)
∆X

Relationship between X-axis and A-axis

- 349 -
B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

(2/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Three-dimensional circular Intermediate point G02.4 XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ;
interpolation X (X1,Y1,Z1)
First block (mid-point of the arc)
(G02.4, G03.4)
Y XX2 YY2 ZZ2 αα2 ββ2 ;
Z
Start Second block (end point of the arc)
point End point (X2,Y2,Z2) α, β : Arbitrary axes other than the 3-
dimensional circular interpolation axis (up
to two axes)
G03.4 can also be specified instead of G02.4.
Dwell X_
G04 ;
(G04) P_
AI contour control G05 P10000 ; AI contour control start
(G05) G05 P0 ; AI contour control end
AI contour control G05.1 Q1 ; AI contour control mode on
(G05.1) G05.1 Q0 ; AI contour control mode off
Nano smoothing G05.1 Q3 IP0 ; Nano smoothing mode on
(G05.1) G05.1 Q0 ; Nano smoothing mode off
Smooth interpolation G05.1 Q2 ; Smooth interpolation mode on
(G05.1) G05.1 Q0 ; Smooth interpolation mode off
NURBS interpolation G06.2[P_] K_ IP_ [R_] [F_];
(G06.2) NURBS interpolation mode on
P : Rank of NURBS curve
IP : Control point
R : Weight
K : Knot
F : Feedrate
Hypothetical axis interpolation G07 IP0 ; Hypothetical axis setting
(G07) G07 IP1 ; Hypothetical axis cancel
Cylindrical interpolation G07 IP_ r_; Cylindrical interpolation mode
(G07.1) r : Cylinder radius
G07 IP 0; Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel
AI contour control (Advanced
G08 P1 ; AI contour control mode on
preview control)
G08 P0 ; AI contour control mode off
(G08)
Exact stop Speed
(G09) G01
G09 G02 IP_ ;
Time G03
In-position check

- 350 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT

(3/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Programmable data input • For machining center system
(G10) Tool compensation memory A
G10 L01 P_ R_ ;
Tool compensation memory B
G10 L10 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount)
G10 L11 P_ R_ ; (Wear offset amount)
Tool compensation memory C
G10 L10 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount/H)
G10 L11 P_ R_ ; (Wear offset amount/H)
G10 L12 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount/D)
G10 L13 P_ R_ ; (Wear offset amount/D)
• For lathe system
Geometry offset amount
G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P = 10000 + Geometry offset number
Wear offset amount
G10 P_ X_ Z_ C_ Q_ ;
P = Wear offset number
Polar coordinate interpolation G12.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation mode on
(G12.1, G13.1) G13.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
Polar coordinate command Local coordinate system G17 G16 Xp_ Yp_ . . . ;
(G15, G16) Yp G18 G16 Zp_ Xp_ . . . ;
Xp
G19 G16 Yp_ Zp_ . . . ;
Yp G15 ; Cancel

Xp
Workpiece coordinate system
Plane selection G17 ; Xp Yp-plane selection
(G17, G18, G19) G18 ; Zp Xp-plane selection
G19 ; Yp Zp-plane selection
Inch/metric conversion Inch input G20 ;
(G20, G21) Metric input G21 ;
Stored stroke check (XYZ) G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
(G22, 23) G23 ; Cancel

(IJK)
Reference position return check IP G27 IP_ ;
(G27)
Start point
Reference position return Reference position (G28) G28 IP_ ;
(G28)
2nd Reference position return Intermediate point G30 IP_ ;
(G30) IP
Start point

2nd reference position(G30)

- 351 -
B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

(4/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Movement from reference Reference position G29 IP_ ;
position
(G29)
IP
Intermediate point
Floating reference position Floating reference position G30.1 IP_ ;
return
Intermediate point
(G30.1)
IP Start
point

Skip function IP G31 IP_ F_ ;

(G31)
Start point Skip signal
Threading F • For machining center system
(G33) G33 IP_ F_ ;
F : Lead
Threading • For lathe system
(G32) Equal lead threading
G32 P_ F_ ;
Cutter or tool nose radius G41 • For machining center system
compensation, three- G17
G18 G41 D_ ;
dimensional cutter G42
G19
compensation
(G38, G39, G40 to G42) D : Tool compensation number
G42
G40 : Cancel
G40

Cutter or tool nose radius • For lathe system only

compensation G41
IP ;
(G40 to G42) G42
(G38, G39)
G40 : Cancel
Programmed path
Cutter compensation for 5-axis Tool vector (path before compensation) G41.2
G42.2 IP_ D_ ; Tool side offset
machining Cutter compensation vector

(G41.2, G42.2) Tool center path G40 IP_ ; Cancellation of cutter compensation
(path after
compensation)
Z
Y
Compensatio Cutter compensation X
n plane amount

Tool side offset

Tool vector
(G41.3) Tool used
G41.3 D_ ; Leading edge offset
Reference
tool
G40 ; Canceling the leading edge offset
Tool center path
(path after
compensation)

Programmed
Cutter path
compensatio Χυττερ χοµπενσατιο
n vector ν αµουντ

Leading edge offset

- 352 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT

(5/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Tool length compensation
G43
(G43, G44, G49) Z_ H_ ;
G44
Compensation

G43
H_ ;
Z G44

H : Tool compensation number

G49 : Cancel
Tool length compensation in G43.1 H_ ; Tool length compensation in tool
tool axis direction axis direction
(G43.1) Tool axis direction H : Compensation number
G49 ; Compensation cancel
B C

Z
Workpiece C
B
Y

Tool center point control G43.4 IP α β H ;

(TYPE1) Tool center point control (TYPE1) start
(G43.4) IP α β ;
IP : In the case of an absolute command, the
coordinate value of the end point of the
tool tip movement
In the case of an incremental command,
the amount of the tool tip movement
α, β :In the case of an absolute command, the
coordinate value of the end point of the
rotation axes
In the case of an incremental command,
the amount of the rotation axis movement
H : Tool compensation number
Tool center point control G43.5 IP H Q ;
(TYPE2) Tool center point control (TYPE2) start
(G43.5) IP I J K ;
IP : In the case of an absolute command, the
coordinate value of the end point of the
tool tip movement
In the case of an incremental command,
the amount of the tool tip movement
I,J,K : Tool axis direction at the block end point
as seen from the programming
coordinate system
H : Tool compensation number
Q : Inclination angle of the tool (in degrees)
Tool offset • For lathe system only
(G43.7)

- 353 -
B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

(6/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Tool offset G 45 Increase • For machining center system
(G45 to G48) IP G45
G 46 Decrease
G46 IP_ D_ ;
G 47 Double increase G47
G48
G 48 IP Double decrease
D : Tool offset number
Offset amount
Scaling • For machining center system
(G50, G51) P4 P3
G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P_
P4' P3' I_ J_ K_ ;
IP
P, I, J, K : Scaling magnification
X, Y, Z : Control position of scaling
P1' P2' G50 : Cancel
P1 P2 • For lathe system only
Enabled when G code system B/C is used
Programmable mirror image Mirror • For machining center system
(G50.1, G51.1) G51.1 IP_ ;
G50.1 ; . . . Cancel
IP
Coordinate system setting X • For lathe system only
Maximum spindle speed clamp G50 IP_ ; (Coordinate system setting)
(G50)
G50 S_ ; (Maximum spindle speed clamp)
Z
Local coordinate system setting Local coordinate G52 IP_ ;
(G52) system
x
IP Workpiece
y coordinate system

Command in machine G53 IP_ ;

coordinate system
(G53)
Tool axis direction control G53.1 ; Tool axis direction control
(G53.1)
Selection of workpiece G54
Workpiece IP : IP_ ;
coordinate system :
G59
origin
(G54 to G59)
offset
Workpiece coordinate system
Machine coordinate system

- 354 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT

(7/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Rotary table dynamic fixture Y • For machining center system
Y
offset Y
G54.2 P_ ; Fixture offset
X
(G54.2) F0
X P : Reference fixture offset value number
F
θ θ0
G54.2 P0 ; Offset cancel
X
Rotation axis
center
C

Z
W
W : Workpiece origin offset value
θ0 : Reference angle
F0 : Reference fixture offset value
Machine coordinate θ : Rotation axis angle
system origin F : Fixture offset value

Single direction positioning IP G60 IP_ ;

(G60)
Cutting mode (G64) G64_ ; Cutting mode
v
Exact stop mode (G61) G61_ ; Exact stop mode
Tapping mode (G63) G64 G63_ ; Tapping mode
t
Automatic corner override G62_ ; Automatic corner override
v
(G62)
G61
t
Custom macro One-shot call
(G65, G66, G66.1, G67) G65 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Macro
P : Program number
O_ ; L : Number of repetition
G65 P_L_ ;
M99 ; Modal call
G66 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Call after the move command
G66.1 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Each block call
G67 ; Cancel
Mirror image for double turret • For lathe system only
(G68, G69) G68 : Mirror image for double turret

G69 : Mirror image cancel

Coordinate system rotation, • For machining center system

Three-dimensional coordinate G17 X_ Y_
conversion Y G68 G18 Z_ X_ Rα;
(G68, G69) G19 Y_ Z_
(G68.1, G69.1) α G69 ; Cancel
(x y) • For lathe system
X G17 X_ Y_
In case of X-Y plane G68.1 G18 Z_ X_ Rα;
G19 Y_ Z_
G69.1 ; Cancel

- 355 -
B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

(8/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Feature coordinate system G68.2 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
selection Feature coordinate system setting
(G68.2) G69 ; Feature coordinate system setting cancel
X, Y, Z : Feature coordinate system origin
I, J, K : Euler angles for determining the
orientation of the feature coordinate
system
Y
Figure copy P1
Rotational copy
(G72.1, G72.2) P0
(G17) X_ Y_
Start point
60° (G18) G72.1 P_ L_ Z_ X_ R_ ;
(G19) Y_ Z_

Linear copy
Y
(G17) I_ J_
(G18) G72.2 P_ L_ K_ I_ ;
P1 (G19) J_ K_
Start point P0 X
Canned cycle for drilling • For machining center system
(G73, G74, G80 to G89) G80 ; Cancel
G73
G74
G76 X_Y_Z_P_Q_R_F_K_ ;
G81
:
G89
Canned cycle • For lathe system only
(G71 to G76) N G70P Q ;
(G90, G92, G94) G71U R ;
G71P Q U W F S T ;
G72W R ;
G72P Q U W F S T ;
G73U W R ;
G73P Q U W F S T ;
G74R ;
G74X(u) Z(w) P Q R F ;
G75R ;
G75X(u) Z(w ) P Q R F ;
G76P Q R ;
G76X(u) Z(w) P Q R F ;
G90
X_ Z_ I_ F_ ;
G92
G94X Z K F ;

- 356 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT

(9/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Absolute programming / • For machining center system
incremental programming G90_ ; Absolute programming
(G90/G91) G91_ ; Incremental programming
:
G90_ G91_ ; Programming in both modes

• For lathe system

X Z C : Absolute programming
U W H : Incremental programming
Distinguished by an address specified in
combined use with a G function such as G00
and G01.
Maximum incremental command G91.1 IP_ ;
value check (G91.1) IP_ ; Maximum incremental value
Set 0 to cancel maximum incremental value
check.
Change of workpiece • For machining center system
coordinate system (G92) IP G92 IP_ ; Change of workpiece coordinate
Maximum spindle speed clamp system
(G92) G92 S_ ; Constant surface speed control :
Maximum spindle speed clamp

Workpiece coordinate system • For machining center system

preset G92.1 IP 0 ;
(G92.1)
Inverse time feed G93 ; Inverse time setting mode
(G93)
Feed per minute, • For machining center system
Feed per revolution G94 F_ ; Feed per minute
(G94, G95) G95 F_ ; Feed per revolution
mm/min inch/min
• For lathe system
mm/rev inch/rev
(G98, G99) G98 F_ ; Feed per minute
G99 F_ ; Feed per revolution

Constant surface speed control Surface speed (m/min or feet/min) G96 S_ ; Constant surface speed control on
(G96, G97) (surface speed specification)
Spindle G97 S_ ; Constant surface speed control off
speed (spindle speed specification)
N(min-1)

Initial point return / R point G98 • For machining center system

Initial level
return G98_ ;
(G98, G99) G99 G99_ ;
R level

Z point

- 357 -
B.LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

(10/10)
Functions Illustration Program format
Optional chamfering/corner R • For machining center system
K ,C_ : Chamfering
,R_ : Corner R

Chamfering/corner R • For lathe system only

I
X_ ; C±K P_ ;
R R

Z_ ; C±K P_ ;
R

- 358 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX C.PROGRAM CODE LIST

C PROGRAM CODE LIST

ISO code EIA code
Custom macro
Usable as file
Character name Code Code without with
Character Character name
(hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) custom custom
macro macro
Number 0 0 30 0 20 *
Number 1 1 B1 1 01 *
Number 2 2 B2 2 02 *
Number 3 3 33 3 13 *
Number 4 4 B4 4 04 *
Number 5 5 35 5 15 *
Number 6 6 36 6 16 *
Number 7 7 B7 7 07 *
Number 8 8 B8 8 08 *
Number 9 9 39 9 19 *
Address A A 41 a 61 *
Address B B 42 b 62 *
Address C C C3 c 73 *
Address D D 44 d 64 *
Address E E C5 e 75 *
Address F F C6 f 76 *
Address G G 47 g 67 *
Address H H 48 h 68 *
Address I I C9 i 79 *
Address J J CA j 51 *
Address K K 4B k 52 *
Address L L CC l 43 *
Address M M 4D m 54 *
Address N N 4E n 45 *
Address O O CF o 46 *
Address P P 50 p 57 *
Address Q Q D1 q 58 *
Address R R D2 r 49 *
Address S S 53 s 32 *
Address T T D4 t 23 *
Address U U 55 u 34 *
Address V V 56 v 25 *
Address W W D7 w 26 *
Address X X D8 x 37 *
Address Y Y 59 y 38 *
Address Z Z 5A z 29 *
Delete DEL FF Del 7F
Back space BS 88 BS 2A
Tabulator HT 09 Tab 2E
End of block LF or NL 0A CR or EOB 80
Carriage return CR 8D

- 359 -
C.PROGRAM CODE LIST APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

ISO code EIA code

Custom macro
Usable as file
Character name Code Code without with
Character Character name
(hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) custom custom
macro macro
Space SP A0 SP 10
Absolute rewind stop % A5 ER 0B
Control out (start of
( 28 (2-4-5) 1A
comment)
Control in (end of
) A9 (2-4-7) 4A
comment)
Plus sign + 2B + 70 *
Minus sign - 2D - 40 *
Colon (address O) : 3A
Optional block skip / AF / 31
Period (decimal point) . 2E . 6B *
Parameter
Sharp # A3
(No.6012)
Dollar sign $ 24
Ampersand & A6 & 0E
Apostrophe ’ 27
Parameter
Asterisk * AA
(No.6010)
Comma , AC , 3B
Semicolon ; FB
Left angle bracket < 2C
Parameter
Equal sign = BD
(No.6011)
Right angle bracket > BE
Question mark ? 3F
Commercial at mark @ C0
Quotation mark “ 22
Parameter
Left square bracket [ DB
(No.6013)
Parameter
Right square bracket ] DD
(No.6014)
Parameter
Underscore _ 6F *
(No.6018)
Lowercase letter a a E1 *
Lowercase letter b b E2 *
Lowercase letter c c 63 *
Lowercase letter d d E4 *
Lowercase letter e e 65 *
Lowercase letter f f 66 *
Lowercase letter g g E7 *
Lowercase letter h h E8 *
Lowercase letter i i 69 *
Lowercase letter j j 6A *
Lowercase letter k k EB *
Lowercase letter l l 6C *
Lowercase letter m m ED *
Lowercase letter n n EE *
Lowercase letter o o 6F *

- 360 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX C.PROGRAM CODE LIST

ISO code EIA code

Custom macro
Usable as file
Character name Code Code without with
Character Character name
(hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) custom custom
macro macro
Lowercase letter p p F0 *
Lowercase letter q q 71 *
Lowercase letter r r 72 *
Lowercase letter s s F3 *
Lowercase letter t t 74 *
Lowercase letter u u F5 *
Lowercase letter v v F6 *
Lowercase letter w w 77 *
Lowercase letter x x 78 *
Lowercase letter y y F9 *
Lowercase letter z z FA *

NOTE
1 The symbols used in the "Custom macro" column
have the following meanings.
(Space) :The character will be registered in
memory and has a specific meaning. It is
used incorrectly in a statement other than
a comment, an alarm occurs.
: The character will not be registered in
memory and will be ignored.
: The character will be registered in
memory, but will be ignored during
program execution.
: The character will be registered in
memory. If it is used in a statement other
than a comment, an alarm occurs.
: If it is used in a statement other than a
comment, the character will not be
registered in memory. If it is used in a
comment, it will be registered in memory.
2 The symbol used in the column "Usable as file
name" has the following meaning:
*: Capable of being coded between "<" and ">" as
a file name.
3 Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is
correct.
4 Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm.
But they are ignored without generating the TH
alarm when they are in the comment section.

- 361 -
D.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF BASIC UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

D EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF BASIC

UNIT
External dimensions of 10.4” LCD-mounted type control unit
Fig. 1
for Series 30i/300is
External dimensions of 15” LCD-mounted type control unit
Fig. 2
for Series 30i/300is

- 362 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX D.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF BASIC UNIT

Fig. 1 External dimensions of 10.4” LCD-mounted type control unit

for Series 30i/300is

At the rear of the metal panel, the area

within 8 mm of the outside edge is left
unpainted.

10.4” LCD unit Mounting panel hole drilling

(The unit is screwed to the outside of the
cabinet, and a cap is attached onto the unit.)

No slot 2 slots

- 363 -
D.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF BASIC UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Fig. 2 External dimensions of 15” LCD-mounted type control unit

for Series 30i/300is

15” LCD unit

(The unit is mounted on the outside of the cabinet
and is secured from the inside by using nuts.)

8-M4 stud 8-M4 stud

No slot 2 slots

- 364 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

E PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

- 365 -
E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Main board (Series 30i)

(1) Main board for 10.4” LCD
- Connector mounting location
Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear of unit

COP10A-1 COP10A-2
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)

CA69A
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41
CD38A
CK20A

CK21A CP1

JD36A JD51A

CA79A
JGM CA87A

CA88A
Main board

CA69A
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41
CD38A
CK20A

CK21A CPD16A

JD36A JD51A

- 366 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

Connector number Application

COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
CA69A Servo check
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1/serial spindle
JD36A RS-232C serial port 2
JA40 Analog output/high-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle/position coder
CPD16A DC24V-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA79A Video signal interface
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Inverter
CD38A Ethernet

- Card and power supply mounting location

Connector
Connector

(1) Axis control card (2) CPU card

Connector

(3) Power supply unit

- 367 -
E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

- DIMM module mounting location

DIMM DIMM
module module
socket socket

(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM

module

- 368 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

(2) Main board for 15” LCD

- Connector mounting location
Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear view
Rear of unit

COP10A-1 COP10A-2 (COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are connectors

installed on the servo card.)

CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
module
COP

CD38S
JD54 JD51A CA75 CA69A
CPD16A

JNA CA78A CN79A CA98

CA88A

Main board

TP2
CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
CPD12 module

CK20A
JD54 JD51A CA75 CA69A
CK21A

CP16A

- 369 -
E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Connector number Application

COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
CA69A Servo check
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1/serial spindle
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2
JA40 Analog output/high-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle/position coder
CPD16A DC24V-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA98 Video signal interface
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Fan adapter
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface

- Card and power supply mounting location

(1) (2) (3)
Axis control card CPU card GUI card

Connector Connector Connector

(4) Power supply unit

Connector

- 370 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

- Configuration of the display control card

In the display control card, a compact flash card is installed.

Compact flash card

Connector

Display control card Compact flash

Connector side

- DIMM module mounting location

<1> PMC module <2> FROM/SRAM
module

Connector Connector Connector

Connector

- 371 -
E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Main board (Series 300is)

- Connector mounting location
Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear view
Rear of unit

(COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are

COP10A-1 COP10A-2 connectors installed on the servo card.)

CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41
Power
COP supply unit

CD38S
JD54 JD51A CA75 CA69A

CPD16A

CA98
JNA CA78A CN79A

CA88A

Main board

TP2 CD46L

CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41
Power
CPD12
supply unit

CK20A
JD54 JD51A CA75
CK21A

CP16A

- 372 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

Connector number Application

COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
CA69A Servo check
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1/serial spindle
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2/USB
JA40 Analog output/high-speed DI
JD51A I/O link
JA41 Serial spindle/position coder
CPD16A DC24V-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA79A Video signal interface (10.4" LCD only)
CA98 Video signal interface (15" LCD only)
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CD46L USB interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Inverter (for 10.4" LCD)
Fan adapter (for 15" LCD)
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface (15" LCD only)
CA75 Bach-up unit interface

- Card and power supply mounting location

(1) (2) (3)
Axis control card CPU card
GUI card

Connector Connector Connector

(4) Power supply unit

Connector

- 373 -
E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

- Confuguration of GUI card

Compact flash card

Connector

GUI card Compact flash

(connector side)

- DIMM module mounting location

(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM
module

Connector Connector Connector

Connector

Main board

- 374 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

Inverter PCBs and connector units

- Inverter and connector units mounting location for 10.4” LCD

Inverter
Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear of unit

- 375 -
E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

- Inverter and connector units mounting location for 15” LCD

Fan adapter PCB Connector unit

Inverter

Rear view
Rear of unit

COP10A-1

Power supply
module
COP

Conversion cable (A660-4042-T047)

Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter PCB. Plug into a matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be connected to either of the two
cables from the inverter.

- 376 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

Fast data server

- Connector mounting location

JG2
S-BUS back-plane connector

CNH6

CD38R

Connector number Use

CNH6 ATA card interface
CD38R 100BASE-TX Ethernet interface

- 377 -
E.PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Additional axis board

- Connector mounting location

JGP
JD1A

COP10A

CA69A

Connector number Use

COP10A FSSB
JD1A I/O LINK
CA69A Servo check

Additional spindle board

- Connector mounting location

JGP

JA41L

Connector number Use

JA41L Serial spindle and position coder

- 378 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX F.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF MDI UNIT

F EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF MDI UNIT

External dimensions of MDI unit (ONG key) for Series 30i/300is Fig. 1
External dimensions of MDI unit (QWERTY key) for Series 30i/300is Fig. 2

- 379 -
 MDI unit Mounting panel hole drilling
(The unit is screwed to the outside of the cabinet,
and a cap is attached onto the unit.)
30i/300is
F.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF MDI UNIT

- 380 -
APPENDIX

At the rear of the metal panel, the area

within 8 mm of the outside edge is left
unpainted.
Fig. 1 External dimensions of MDI unit (ONG key) for Series
B-63942EN/01
 B-63942EN/01

MDI unit Mounting panel hole drilling

(The unit is screwed to the outside of the cabinet,
and a cap is attached onto the unit.)
30i/300is
APPENDIX

- 381 -
At the rear of the metal panel, the area
within 8 mm of the outside edge is left
unpainted.
Fig. 2 External dimensions of MDI unit (QWERTY key) for Series
F.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF MDI UNIT
G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

G EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

External dimensions of manual pulse generator Fig. 1
External dimensions of pendant-type manual pulse generator Fig. 2
External dimensions of separate detector interface unit Fig. 3
External dimensions of ABS battery case for separate detector Fig. 4
External dimensions of external CNC battery unit Fig. 5
External dimensions of punch panel (narrow type) Fig. 6
External dimensions of punch panel Fig. 7
External dimensions of standard machine operator’s panel (main panel) Fig. 8
External dimensions of standard machine operator’s panel (sub panel A) Fig. 9
External dimensions of standard machine operator’s panel (sub panel D) Fig. 10

- 382 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 1 External dimensions of manual pulse generator

Specification No.: A860–0203–T001

3–M4
On the φ72 circumference

- 383 -
G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Fig. 2 External dimensions of pendant-type manual pulse

generator
Specification No.: A860–0203–T010 to T015

- 384 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 3 External dimensions of separate detector interface unit

The connector names in parentheses are for

an expansion unit. The expansion unit does
not have connectors CP11, JA4A, COP10A,
and COP10B.

- 385 -
G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Fig. 4 External dimensions of ABS battery case for separate

detector
Specification No.: A06B–6050–K060
4–M4 counter sinking

Negative polarity indication

Positive polarity indication

Plus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes

Minus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes

4–φ4.3 mounting
hole
Arrow view A

Note) The battery is not included.

- 386 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 5 External dimensions of external CNC battery unit

Main unit
Cover

Mounting panel hole drilling

Mounting hole (countersink)

The battery unit is fitted with a 14–m battery cable.

- 387 -
G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Fig. 6 External dimensions of punch panel (narrow type)

Mounting hole diagram

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of the outside edge is left unpainted.

- 388 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 7 External dimensions of punch panel

Specification No.: A02B–0120–C191 (cable length 1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (cable length 2 m)
A02B–0120–C193 (cable length 5 m)

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8

mm of the outside edge is left unpainted.

The following is the panel cut layout drawing of this punch panel.

- 389 -
G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Fig. 8 External dimensions of standard machine operator’s panel

(main panel)
Specification No.: A02B-0303-C231

Note)
When a screw-lock case of
low-rear type (FI-20-CV7)
manufactured by Hirose
Electric is used, the depth is 60
mm.
When a conventional case is
used, the depth is 80 mm.

Panel cut drawing

Unit : mm

- 390 -
B-63942EN/01 APPENDIX G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 9 External dimensions of standard machine operator’s panel

(sub panel A)
Specification No.: A02B-0236-C232

- 391 -
G.EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B-63942EN/01

Fig. 10 External dimensions of standard machine operator’s panel

(sub panel D)
Specification No.: A02B-0236-C244

Stud for protective grounding (M4)

Panel cut drawing

Unit : mm

- 392 -
B-63942EN/01 INDEX

INDEX
AXNUM Function.......................................................... 27
<A>
ABSOLUTE PROGRAMMING / INCREMENTAL <B>
PROGRAMMING........................................................ 147 BACKLASH COMPENSATION ................................. 286
ACCURACY COMPENSASION FUNCTION ........... 285 BACKLASH COMPENSATION FOR EACH RAPID
ACTUAL CUTTING FEEDRATE DISPLAY ............. 311 TRAVERSE AND CUTTING FEED ........................... 286
ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT ....................... 246 BALANCE CUTTING ................................................. 119
ADDITION OF CUSTOM MACRO COMMON BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
VARIABLES................................................................ 196 AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION ............ 130
ADDITION OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE BELL-SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
SYSTEM PAIR ............................................................ 160 BEFORE LOOK-AHEAD INTERPOLATION............ 138
AI CONTOUR CONTROL I / BI-DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR
AI CONTOUR CONTROL II....................................... 136 COMPENSATION ....................................................... 290
ALARM DISPLAY ...................................................... 307 Block Start Interlock....................................................... 46
ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY .................................... 308 BUFFER REGISTER ..................................................... 63
All-axis Interlock............................................................ 46
<C>
All-axis Machine Lock ................................................... 47
C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR....................................... 235
ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ....................................... 35
CANNED CYCLE........................................................ 198
Arbitrary Axis Name....................................................... 26
CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING............................ 217
ARBITRARY AXIS NAME SETTING ......................... 26
CHAMFERING AND CORNER R.............................. 170
ARBITRARY COMMAND MULTIPLY ...................... 43
CHAMFERING ON/OFF............................................... 54
ARBITRARY POSITION REFERENCE SETTING
CHANGING ACTIVE OFFSET VALUE WITH
FOR Cs AXIS FUNCTION.......................................... 253
MANUAL MOVE ........................................................ 284
Assignment Of Required Parts Count And Machined
CHUCK AND TAIL STOCK BARRIER....................... 51
Parts Count ................................................................... 331
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION.................................... 81
AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION 127
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION BY R P
Automatic Coordinate System Setting .......................... 156
ROGRAMMING .......................................................... 219
AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE ........................ 221
CIRCULAR THREADING .......................................... 103
Automatic Operation (Memory Operation) .................... 60
CLOCK FUNCTION.................................................... 302
Automatic Operation Signal ......................................... 340
COMMON COMPENSATION MEMORY
Automatic Operation Start Lamp Signal....................... 340
BETWEEN EACH PATH ............................................ 259
Automatic Reference Position Return .......................... 110
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL.............. 245
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT ... 279
Constant Surface Speed Signal ..................................... 342
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET.................................... 281
CONTINUOUS THREADING..................................... 101
AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................... 238
CONTROL AXIS DETACH .......................................... 41
AUXILIARY FUNCTION / SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL-IN / CONTROL-OUT............................... 143
FUNCTION .................................................................. 237
CONTROLLED AXIS.................................................... 19
AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK ............................... 239
COORDINATE SYSTEM............................................ 154
AXIS CONTROL BY PMC ........................................... 22
COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION....................... 225
Axis Moving Direction Signal...................................... 342
Cs CONTOURING CONTROL ..................................... 23
Axis Moving Signal...................................................... 341
CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY ............................... 303
Axis Name Expansion .................................................... 25
CUSTOM MACRO ...................................................... 189
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL............................. 34

i-1
INDEX B-63942EN/01

CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES DWELL .......................................................................... 83

BETWEEN EACH PATH ............................................ 196
<E>
CUSTOM SOFTWARE SIZE...................................... 236
Each-axis Interlock ......................................................... 46
CUTTER COMPENSATION FOR 5-AXIS
Each-axis Machine Lock................................................. 47
MACHINING............................................................... 265
EDITING OPERATION............................................... 296
CUTTER OR TOOL NOSE RADIUS
EMBEDDED ETHERNET........................................... 334
COMPENSATION ....................................................... 267
EMERGENCY STOP..................................................... 47
Cutting Block Start Interlock.......................................... 46
End Face Peck Drilling Cycle....................................... 213
CUTTING FEEDRATE CLAMP ................................. 126
End Face Turning Cycle ............................................... 202
CUTTING MODE .......................................................... 79
EXACT STOP ................................................................ 80
CUTTING POINT INTERPOLATION FOR
EXACT STOP MODE.................................................... 79
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ........................... 274
EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION ............................ 82
Cutting Signal............................................................... 341
EXTENDED BI-DIRECTIONAL PITCH ERROR
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ............................. 86
COMPENSATION ....................................................... 290
<D> EXTENDED PART PROGRAM EDITING ................ 300
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT.............................................. 326 External Alarm Message............................................... 331
DATA PROTECTION KEY ........................................ 322 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT......................................... 329
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING / POCKET EXTERNAL DECELERATION .................................. 134
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF BASIC UNIT........... 362
PROGRAMMING........................................................ 148 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT............ 382
Deleting cartridge management table data .................... 184 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF MDI UNIT............... 379
Deleting tool management data .................................... 182 External Machine Zero Point Shift ............................... 330
DI Status Output Signal................................................ 342 External Operator Message........................................... 331
DIAMETER PROGRAMMING / RADIUS External Program Number Search ................................ 330
PROGRAMMING........................................................ 150 External Tool Offset ..................................................... 329
DIAMETER/RADIUS DYNAMIC SWITCHING ....... 150 External Workpiece Coordinate System Shift............... 330
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSION External Workpiece Number Search............................. 330
PROGRAMMING........................................................ 162
<F>
DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE
FAST DATA SERVER ................................................ 328
MEASURED ................................................................ 282
FAST ETHERNET ....................................................... 334
DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE
FEED FUNCTION ....................................................... 121
MEASURED B............................................................. 282
Feed Hold Signal .......................................................... 340
DIRECT INPUT OF WORKPIECE ORGIN
FEED PER MINUTE ................................................... 123
OFFSET VALUE MEASURED................................... 161
FEED PER REVOLUTION ......................................... 124
DIRECTION-DEPENDENT TYPE HIGH-SPEED
FEED STOP ................................................................. 134
POSITION SWITCH...................................................... 57
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE............................................. 131
DIRECTORY DISPLAY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE ... 312
FIGURE COPY ............................................................ 231
DISPLAY OF SPINDLE SPEED AND T CODE AT
Finishing Cycle............................................................. 212
ALL SCREENS ............................................................ 312
FIRST/SECOND/THIRD PMC PATH......................... 336
Distribution End Signal ................................................ 341
FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR............................................... 43
DNC Operation............................................................... 60
Floating Reference Position Return .............................. 113
DNC Operation with Memory Card................................ 60
FOLLOW-UP ................................................................. 53
DRY RUN ...................................................................... 63
DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK .................................... 43

i-2
B-63942EN/01 INDEX

<G> <K>
G Code for Lathe System.............................................. 163 KEY AND PROGRM ENCRYPTION......................... 299
G CODE SYSTEM....................................................... 163
<L>
G Code System for Machining Center .......................... 167
LABEL SKIP................................................................ 142
<H> LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
HELICAL INTERPOLATION....................................... 87 AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION ............ 135
HELICAL INTERPOLATION B ................................... 89 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE......................... 240 BEFORE CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION.......... 131
HIGH-SPEED POSITION SWITCH.............................. 57 LINEAR INTERPOLATION ......................................... 80
HIGH-SPEED PROCESSING ..................................... 138 Linear Scale Interface with Absolute Address Reference
High-speed Skip ........................................................... 108 Mark ............................................................................... 58
HRV CONTROL............................................................ 44 LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESS
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION................ 92 REFERENCE MARK..................................................... 58
Linear Scale with Absolute Address Reference Mark
<I>
Expansion ....................................................................... 58
I/O Link EXPANSION SECOND/THIRD/FOURTH
LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT . 348
CHANNEL ................................................................... 337
LIST OF SPECIFICATION ............................................. 6
Inch Input Signal .......................................................... 341
LOADER CONTROL..................................................... 23
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION.................................... 45
Local Coordinate System.............................................. 158
INCLINATION COMPENSATION ............................ 291
LOOK-AHEAD BLOCKS EXPANSION .................... 138
INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL ...................... 36
INCREMENT SYSTEM ................................................ 42 <M>
INCREMENTAL FEED................................................. 74 Machine Coordinate System ......................................... 154
INDEX TABLE INDEXING........................................ 120 MACHINE GROUP / CONTROLLED PATH /
In-position Signal ......................................................... 341 CONTROLLED AXIS.................................................... 20
INPUT UNIT 10 TIME MULTIPLY ........................... 149 MACHINE LOCK.......................................................... 47
INTERFACE FUNCTION ........................................... 333 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING
INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR EACH PATH............. 55 FUNCTION .................................................................. 325
INTERLOCK.................................................................. 46 MACRO EXECUTOR ................................................. 234
INTERPOLATION FUNCTION.................................... 76 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN ............ 319
INTERPOLATION TYPE PITCH ERROR MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS ................. 61
COMPENSATION ....................................................... 289 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF....................... 161
INTERPOLATION TYPE STRAIGHTNESS MANUAL FEED FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING.............. 69
COMPENSATION ....................................................... 293 MANUAL HANDLE FEED........................................... 68
Interpolation Type Straightness Compensation ............ 293 Manual Handle Feed (1st) .............................................. 68
INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO ............. 197 Manual Handle Feed (2nd and 3rd) ................................ 68
INVERSE TIME FEED................................................ 133 Manual Handle Feed Magnification ............................... 68
INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION.................................... 90 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION ........................ 74
MANUAL NUMERICAL COMMAND ........................ 75
<J>
MANUAL PER REVOLUTION FEED ....................... 133
JERK CONTROL......................................................... 139
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ........... 64
JOG AND HANDLE SIMULTANEOUS MODE.......... 75
MAXIMUM COMMAND VALUES ........................... 144
JOG FEED...................................................................... 64
MDI Operation ............................................................... 60
JOG OVERRIDE.......................................................... 133
MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT ........................... 332

i-3
INDEX B-63942EN/01

MIRROR IMAGE .......................................................... 53 OTHERS....................................................................... 339

MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET............... 220 Outer Diameter / Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle....... 214
Modifying the cartridge management table .................. 183 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Cutting Cycle ......... 198
Modifying tool management data ................................. 182 OVERRIDE CANCEL ................................................. 133
MULTI SPINDLE CONTROL..................................... 248 OVERTRAVEL.............................................................. 47
MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY................................. 322
<P>
MULTI-PATH CONTROL ............................................ 20
PARAMETER SET SUPPORTING SCREEN............. 324
MULTIPLE COMMAND OF AUXILIARY
PARAMETER SETTING AND DISPALY.................. 306
FUNCTION .................................................................. 243
PARITY CHECK ......................................................... 142
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE ............................. 204
PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF
MULTIPLE THREADING............................................. 99
REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS .................................. 297
Multiple Threading Cycle............................................. 215
Pattern Repeating.......................................................... 210
Multi-step Skip ............................................................. 108
PERIODICAL SECONDARY PITCH ERROR
<N> COMPENSATION ....................................................... 290
NAMES OF AXES......................................................... 24 PLANE SELECTION................................................... 151
Names of Axes................................................................ 24 PMC.............................................................................. 335
Naming customization data .......................................... 184 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND......................... 153
Naming tool life states .................................................. 185 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION ................ 84
NANO INTERPOLATION ............................................ 77 POLE POSITION DETECTION FUNCTION ............... 41
NANO SMOOTHING.................................................... 97 POLYGON TURNING................................................. 104
NC Alarm Signal .......................................................... 340 POLYGON TURNING WITH TWO SPINDLES ........ 106
NC Ready Signal .......................................................... 340 POSITION SWITCH...................................................... 57
NONVOLATILE PMC EXTRA RELAY FUNCTION 338 POSITIONING ............................................................... 78
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL ........................... 114 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER .............................. 332
Number of Controlled Axes............................................ 21 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD...................................... 365
Number of Controlled Paths ........................................... 20 PROGRAM CODE....................................................... 142
Number of Controlled Paths and Axes for Loader.......... 21 PROGRAM CODE LIST ............................................. 359
Number of Machine Groups ........................................... 20 PROGRAM DISPLAY................................................. 304
NURBS INTERPOLATION ........................................ 116 PROGRAM EDITING.................................................. 298
PROGRAM FILE NAME............................................. 146
<O>
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR Series15.......................... 233
One Touch Macro Call ................................................. 329
PROGRAM INPUT...................................................... 141
ONE-DIGIT F CODE FEED ........................................ 132
PROGRAM PROTECT................................................ 299
OPERATING MONITOR SCREEN ............................ 313
PROGRAM SEARCH .................................................... 60
OPERATION.................................................................. 59
PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT ............................ 175
OPERATION HISTORY DISPLAY............................ 309
PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE ...................... 230
OPERATION MODE..................................................... 60
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT ............... 186
OPERATOR MESSAGE HISTORY DISPLAY .......... 308
PROTECTION OF DATA AT EIGHT LEVELS ......... 323
OPTIMUM TORQUE
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION......................... 129 <R>
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP .......................................... 143 RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE .............................. 345
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP EXTENSION ................... 143 RAPID TRAVERSE..................................................... 122
OPTIONAL CHAMFERING AD CORNER R ............ 174 RAPID TRAVERSE BELL-SHAPED
OPTIONAL PATH NAME DISPLAY......................... 312 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION......................... 128

i-4
B-63942EN/01 INDEX

RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE................................ 122 SETTING AND DISPLAY........................................... 301

Rapid Traverse Signal................................................... 342 Setting the Pitch Error Compensation Data .................. 175
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE............................ 327 Setting the Tool Compensation Offset Value ............... 177
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ........................... 110 Setting the Tool Management Data .............................. 181
Reference Position Return Check ................................. 111 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value .................. 176
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN FEEDRATE SINGLE BLOCK............................................................ 64
SETTING........................................................................ 66 SKIP FUNCTION ........................................................ 107
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH Skip Function................................................................ 107
MECHANICAL STOPPER............................................ 66 SMOOTH BACKLASH COMPENSATION ............... 287
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG 65 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION ....................................... 96
REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT .................................. 67 SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL .......................... 320
Registering new cartridge management table data........ 183 SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL GENERAL
Registering new tool management data ........................ 181 PURPOSE SWITCH .................................................... 321
Reset Signal .................................................................. 340 Spindle Monitor Screen ................................................ 317
RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING......................... 63 SPINDLE NAME EXPANSION.................................... 28
Rewinding Signal ......................................................... 341 SPINDLE ORIENTATION .......................................... 246
RIGID TAPPING ......................................................... 252 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING FUNCTION ......... 246
RIGID TAPPING BELL-SHAPED SPINDLE OVERRIDE................................................. 245
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION......................... 140 SPINDLE POSITIONING............................................ 251
RIGID TAPPING BY MANUAL HANDLE................ 253 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT ...................................... 244
ROTARY AXIS CONTROL .......................................... 56 SPINDLE SETTING SCREEN .................................... 316
ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER .................................... 152 Spindle Setting Screen.................................................. 316
ROTARY AXIS SPECIFICATION ............................. 152 SPINDLE SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .... 247
ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET ... 283 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT).. 244
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY .......... 310 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.................... 246
Spindle Tuning Screen.................................................. 317
<S>
SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.............................................s-1
INTERPOLATION......................................................... 93
SCALING..................................................................... 222
STATUS DISPLAY...................................................... 302
SCREEN HARD COPY ............................................... 332
STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL ....................................... 340
SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTION .......................... 238
Stock Removal in Facing.............................................. 207
SECOND FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ............................ 132
Stock Removal in Turning............................................ 204
SECOND GEOMETRY TOOL OFFSET..................... 276
STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ............ 288
Second, Third, and Fourth Reference Position Return . 112
STORED STROKE CHECK 1 ....................................... 48
SEQUENCE NUMBER ............................................... 147
STORED STROKE CHECK 2 (G22, G23).................... 49
SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP .. 61
STORED STROKE CHECK 3 ....................................... 49
SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH................................. 60
STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION ......................... 292
Servo Motor Tuning Screen.......................................... 315
Straightness Compensation 128 Points......................... 293
SERVO OFF / MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED ......... 54
STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE.................. 50
Servo Ready Signal....................................................... 340
STROKE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING...................... 48
SERVO SETTING SCREEN ....................................... 314
SUB PROGRAM CALL............................................... 187
Servo Setting Screen..................................................... 314
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL....................................... 32
SERVO WAVEFORM DISPLAY ............................... 318
SYNCHRONOUS / MIXTURE CONTROL.................. 29
Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System....................... 155
Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System....................... 157

i-5
INDEX B-63942EN/01

<T> TOOL LENGTH / WORKPIECE ZERO POINT

Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed / MEASUREMENT........................................................ 280
Table Horizontal Direction Jog Feed / Table Horizontal TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION ........................... 260
Direction Incremental Feed ............................................ 73 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT............................ 278
Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed / Table Vertical TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION ......................... 277
Direction Jog Feed / Table Vertical Direction TOOL OFFSET ............................................................ 262
Incremental Feed ............................................................ 73 TOOL OFFSET PAIRS ................................................ 256
TANDEM CONTROL.................................................... 39 TOOL OFFSET VALUE COUNTER INPUT.............. 278
TANDEM DISTURBANCE ELIMINATION Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed / Tool Tip
CONTROL ..................................................................... 40 Center Rotation Jog Feed / Tool Tip Center Rotation
TANGENTIAL SPEED CONSTANT CONTROL ...... 125 Incremental Feed ............................................................ 72
TAPPING MODE........................................................... 79 TORQUE CONTROL .................................................... 41
Tapping Signal.............................................................. 341 Torque Limit Skip......................................................... 109
THERMAL GROWTH COMPENSATION ALONG
TOOL VECTOR........................................................... 295
<U>
UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE
THREADING ................................................................. 98
DETECTION FUNCTION ............................................. 56
Threading Cycle............................................................ 200
THREADING RETRACT ............................................ 100 <V>
Threading Retract (Canned Cycle) ............................... 100 VARIABLE LEAD THREADING............................... 102
Threading Retract (Multiple Repetitive Cycle)............. 100
Threading Signal........................................................... 341 <W>
THREE-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR WAITING FUNCTION ................................................ 242

INTERPOLATION....................................................... 118 WITHOUT POSITION CODER CONSTANT

THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE SURFACE SPEED CONTROL.................................... 125

CONVERSION ............................................................ 227 WITHOUT POSITION CODER FEED PER

THREE-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER REVOLUTION............................................................. 125

COMPENSATION ....................................................... 271 Workpiece Coordinate System...................................... 154

THREE-DIMENSIONAL ERROR WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET .... 159

COMPENSATION ....................................................... 294 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT........ 160

TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND................. 228 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTION ... 62

Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed / Tool Axis <Y>

Direction Jog Feed / Tool Axis Direction Incremental Y-AXIS OFFSET ......................................................... 266
Feed ................................................................................ 70
Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed /
Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Jog Feed / Tool Axis
Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed........................ 71
TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS
MACHINING............................................................... 264
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY......................... 257
TOOL FUNCTION....................................................... 255
TOOL FUNCTION / TOOL COMPENSATION
FUNCTION .................................................................. 254
TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET AND TOOL WEAR
OFFSET........................................................................ 275

i-6
 Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A DESCRIPTIONS (B-63942EN)

01 Aug., 2003

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.